summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2007-05-09 16:10:43 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2007-05-09 16:10:43 +0000
commit231ec7c96e9fb3af57faf87fe9477615edcb1160 (patch)
tree1ca3ba0336fdd9e0e18354aa4c9868b4002b3bc5 /Master/texmf-dist/source/plain
parent5f842346b2d475bb02af8e29fcc9a50107b21529 (diff)
remove pdcmac barring complaints, it is very old and would need work to get right
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@4269 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/plain')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/changes.txt239
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/config.status35
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/configure302
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/contents.txt40
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/copying.tex373
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags67
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags.1207
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf36
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf.146
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55doc.tex70
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55lft.tex70
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.dtx627
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex193
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.dtx231
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex67
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrman.tex604
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/makefile.in160
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput01.fig323
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput02.fig273
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.dtx609
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex300
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmdoc.tex64
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmlft.tex64
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmsub.tex70
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.dtx881
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex263
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode2.tex292
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcdoc.def232
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.dtx1194
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex398
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.dtx607
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex110
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.fnt29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.tex942
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex56
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex39
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.dtx248
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex117
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdclft.def106
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmacvn.tex1
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex37
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmisc.dtx555
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmondo.tex189
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.dtx986
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex336
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpsdoc.tex81
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpslft.tex81
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcsty.dtx1153
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall86
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall.1108
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir67
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir.181
52 files changed, 0 insertions, 14345 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/changes.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/changes.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index c1da39eb921..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/changes.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,239 +0,0 @@
-Thu Apr 6 12:32:28 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@booth35.ecs>
-
- * pdcguide.tex: Added dtxtags to file lists and TAGS to Makefile
- targets. Shortened a couple of table entries by a word each so
- that the GPL doesn't overflow onto the next page.
-
- * maamac.dtx (\toksa): Added definition of toksa
-
- * pdcfmt2.dtx (\alphabetletter): Added missing backslash.
-
- * pdcoput5.dtx (section{Routines for balanced columns}): Removed
- spurious space from \makepartialpage
-
- * dtxtags: New shellscript, generates an etags-format tags file.
- * makefile.in (mostlyclean): Added support for dtxtags.
-
-
-Thu Mar 30 17:16:01 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@booth10.ecs>
-
- * Release 1.1
-
- * makefile.in (dist): Made version.txt format prettier.
-
- * Changed all header comments to say doc/plain/pdcmac for the sake
- of TWG-TDS 0.61.
-
-Tue Mar 28 13:18:47 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdccode.dtx: Recognizes the "locker" field of RCS id.
- Puts line numbers in headline.
-
- * pdcfsel.dtx: Tidied documentation. Changed \fsel_... to \FSEL...
-
-Fri Mar 24 17:08:36 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
-
- * pinstall: Created a shellscript `pinstall' to replace `install'
- command on systems without GNU `install'. Trying to keep track of
- all the stupid variants of `install' is pointlessly difficult.
- * configure: uses 'pinstall' script if not gnu 'install'.
- * makefile.in (install): much simplified by assuming either GNU
- "install" or my "pinstall". Changed "mkdirhier" ro "pmkdir" at
- the same time. Added manpages for the three shellscripts included
- with the package.
-
- * pdcmisc.dtx (section{PDCIMTH}): Added version ID \message.
-
- * makefile.in: Added new target, version.txt, which is the version
- IDs of all the DTX files. Checked all the DTX files in to RCS (at
- long last).
-
-Thu Mar 16 12:52:02 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdccode.dtx: notepars now allow \rightskip to shrink.
-
- * pdcfmt2.dtx: chased down some overfull hboxes
-
- * pdcsty.dtx (section{Starting up}): Changed name of pdcmasub to
- the more sensible pdccmsub.
-
-Tue Mar 14 12:58:09 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@booth8.ecs>
-
- * pdcadobe.dtx: Corrected definition or rbrace.
-
-Thu Mar 9 16:42:07 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdcmisc.dtx (pdccmsub.dtx): new name for pdcmasub.dtx.
- \currency, \orda, \ordo, \florin, \brdecimal, \permille.
-
-Wed Mar 8 16:53:36 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdcsty.dtx (\abstract): Stop from generating underfull
- hbox.
-
- * pdcadobe.dtx (\brdecimal): Removed spurious redefinition.
-
- * pdcguide.tex: Added list of file suffixes. Added
- pdcadobe.{dtx,tex} and pdcl1maa.{dtx,tex} to lists of files.
- Added PostScript title for when POstScript fonts available.
-
-Mon Mar 6 16:54:15 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdcl1maa.dtx: New file
-
- * pdcsty.dtx: Chased down some overful hboxes.
-
-Fri Mar 3 18:12:02 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdcfmt2.dtx (verbatim): added \ttminus, so that PostScript fonts
- used as typewriter fonts can change hyphens to minus signs.
-
- * pdcsty.dtx: Added use of \asyfam, etc.
-
- * pdcadobe.dtx: Tested with pdcguide and tested ISO Latin-1
- support, found several bugs.
-
-Thu Mar 2 18:08:48 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdcsty.dtx: Added rudimentary support for PostScript fonts.
-
- * pdcadobe.dtx: New file!!
-
-Tue Feb 28 10:17:40 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdcsty.dtx: Removed attempts to make a Concrete style; there
- really doesn't seem to be much point. Put more of the common code
- in pdc{lft,doc}1.tex.
-
- * pdcguide.tex: reorganized sections, expanded user guide and
- installation sections.
-
-Mon Feb 27 14:43:43 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdcguide.tex: Made it into a "doc" not a "lft"; expanded
- installation section (unfinished)
-
- * pdccode.dtx: Added summary to end of file, and some backgorund
- info at the start.
- (section{Layout}): CHanged width to 72 \tentt characters not 36
- \tenrm ems.
-
-Fri Feb 24 18:55:30 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdcguide.tex: Removed use of PostScript fonts -- now does a
- title using the circlew10 font!
-
-Thu Feb 23 16:50:33 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * install.txt: new file
-
- * configure (INSTALL): sets INSTALL and INSTALL_DATA to "cp
- -p" and puts package name at end of "$docdir".
-
- * magrman.tex (\twocolgr): adjusted to use new \rigidbalance syntax
-
- * pdcoput5.dtx (section{Making a page vbox}): adjust colht by
-
- (section{Routines for balanced coumns}): \rigidpalane no longer
- takes an argukent for the width of the completed columns; instead
- one should enclose \rigidbalance in \hbox to ...{...}. Eliminated
- some variables (\RGDfirstcol etc.).
-
- *depth* of topbox and partialpage as well as height.
-
- * pdccode.dtx: New file, which generates tmp.tex (the Makefile
- checks it isn't truncated before renaming it to pdccode.tex).
- (section{Code sections}): added \~ for a tilde in expanded lines.
-
- Changed text width and suppressed parindent at start of sections.
- Copied verbatim text from pdcfmt2.dtx. Added \filelocker; this is
- empty if the file has been checked in.
-
-Wed Feb 22 15:46:06 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdcoput5.dtx: Added section headings and brief comments on the
- rest of the file. Seached out overfull hboxes in the text so
- far.
-
- (section{Routines for balanced coumns}): Added
- \rigidbalancedpartialpage.
-
-Thu Feb 16 18:04:55 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdcfmt2.dtx: Adjusted a little so that it now TeXs without hbox
- warnings.
-
- * pdccode.tex: Changed to allow ragged-right printing inside
- footnotes. Added \title and \author commands, and set \everycode
- and \evercodeline so that some common code at the start of DTX
- files is factored out.
-
-Wed Feb 15 15:45:30 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdcsty.dtx (section{Starting up}): pdcoput->pdcoput5
-
- * configure (cfgdate): Configuration shellscript, made by cutting
- down the pdctt configure script.
-
- * pdcoput5.dtx: Changed name to prevent conflict with old version
- of pdcoput (since the calling interface is changing).
-
-Tue Feb 14 12:20:41 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdcoput.dtx (section{How to make one column}): Change to just
- use vertical mode material to do illustrations insteasd of
- separate <dimen> and caption arguments. Added \topillustration
- and \botillustration commands.
-
- * pdcsty.dtx (section{Layout}): foomarge->foomg to match pdcoput.dtx
-
- * config.status.sh: placeholder for configuration script.
-
-Mon Feb 13 14:23:50 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdcoput.dtx: New file, made from pdcoput.tex 4.1.7.
-
-Fri Feb 10 13:46:10 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdcguide.tex: Added a copy of the GNU GPL to the end.
-
- * copying.tex: new file -- a formatted copy of copying.txt, which
- is the GNU General Public License.
-
- * *.dtx: Updated header comments to include GPL.
-
-Thu Feb 9 10:38:59 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
-
- * pdccode2.tex: a new version of pdccode that allows multiple
- files to be generated.
-
- * pdcsty.dtx: replaces ma55doc.dtx, pdccm*.dtx. Uses pdccode2 to
- generate multiple files. Sectioning commands go in pdcdoc1.tex
- and pdclft1.tex.
-
- * pdcguide.tex: new file
-
-Sat Dec 3 16:26:00 1994 P. Damian Cugley (pdc@alleged)
-
- * pdccode.tex:
- Set the vertical margins so that files may be printed on American
- paper without losing any of the print.
-
- * pdcfsel.dtx:
- Added a title line on the first page. Removed the dependency of
- the code file on pdcutil.tex by adding definitions for \expcs and
- \noexpcs.
-
-Fri Dec 2 00:55:38 1994 P. Damian Cugley (pdc@alleged)
-
- * pdccode.tex:
- Changed \rcs...\end to \rcs...\endrcs for consistency with other
- macros that go \foo...\endfoo.
-
- * pdcfsel.dtx: Removed spurious definiton of \n. Changed
- \rcs...\end to \rcs...\endrcs. Changed name of \ldfont to
- \loadfont. Removed \setmag. Now produces pdcfsel.tex not xx.tex.
-
- * pdccode.tex: checked in with -k by pdc at 1994/12/02 00:50:24
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/config.status b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/config.status
deleted file mode 100644
index 34a118a9ff7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/config.status
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-# config.status -- configuration status file
-# creator: configure for pdcmac 1.0 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-24> < >
-# created: 1996-04-29
-# command: configure
-
-case "$1" in
- -r*|--r*)
- shift
- echo $0: rerunning configure 1>&2
- exec sh configure $* ;;
-esac
-
-echo This is config.status, generated by configure for pdcmac on 1996-04-29
-
-srcdir=.
-date=1996-04-29
-files="${*-makefile}"
-sedscript='
- s,@package@,pdcmac,
- s,@srcdir@,.,
- s,@texmf@,//texmf,
- s,@configure@,configure,
- s,@INSTALL@,install,
- s,@INSTALL_DATA@,$(INSTALL) --mode=644,
- s,@texdir@,$(texmf)/tex/plain/$(package),
- s,@docdir@,$(texmf)/doc/plain/$(package),
-'
-
-for file in $files; do
- echo $0: writing $file... 1>&2
- sed -e 's,Template for configure,Generated from '$file'.in on '$date' by '$0, \
- -e "$sedscript" $srcdir/$file.in > $file || exit 1
-done
-
-exit 0
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/configure b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/configure
deleted file mode 100644
index 267494d6269..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/configure
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,302 +0,0 @@
-#!/bin/sh
-
-# Mini-configure script for PDCMAC for the benefit of UNIX users
-
-version="1.0 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-24>"
-
-# Takes arguments a bit like the GNU autoconf, but only uses them to
-# try to guess the TeX root directory
-
-package=pdcmac
-date=`date +19%y-%m-%d`
-files=makefile
-unique=pdcmisc.dtx
-cmd="$0 $@"
-me=`basename $0`
-
-# The flag used with "test" to see if a directory is writable.
-# For debugging, I sometimes set writable to -d so that
-# the searches will pretend that I have write-access to system
-# directories (so I can simulate running the script as root)
-writable=-w
-
-echo "This is configure for $package $version $cfgdate"
-
-tmp=${TMPDIR-/tmp}/cfg$$
-trap 'rm -f $tmp; exit 1' 1 2 15
-
-while test $# -gt 0; do
- case $1 in
- -n*|--n*)
- nocreate=t ;;
- -v*|--v*)
- echo "configure for $package $version <$cfgauthor $cfgdate>" 1>&2
- exit 0 ;;
- -h*|--h*)
- cat 1>&2 <<@EOF
-USAGE: configure [ option ]...
-
-Running this script creates config.status and optionally
-$files.
-
-Options:
- -h, -help, --help, -v, -version, --version
- print a message and exit
-
- -p DIR, -prefix DIR, --prefix=DIR
- prefix for installed file names, for example /usr/local
-
- -e DIR, -exec_prefix DIR, --exec_prefix=DIR
- ignored
-
- -t DIR, -texmf DIR, --texmf=DIR
- prefix for all TeX-related installed file names, for
- example /usr/texmf or /usr/local/lib/tex
-
- -w tds, -with tds, --with-tds
- Assume a TDS-like directory tree
-@EOF
- exit 0 ;;
- --p*=*)
- prefix=`expr $1 : '--p.*=\(.*\)'` ;;
- -p|-prefix|--p*)
- prefix=$2; shift ;;
- -p*)
- prefix=`expr $1 : '-p\(.*\)$'` ;;
- --s*=*)
- srcdir=`expr $1 : '--s.*=\(.*\)'` ;;
- -s|-srcdir|--s*)
- srcdir=$2; shift ;;
- -s*)
- srcdir=`expr $1 : '-s\(.*\)$'` ;;
- --t*=*)
- texmf=`expr $1 : '--t.*=\(.*\)'` ;;
- -t|-texmf|--t*)
- texmf=$2; shift ;;
- -t*)
- texmf=`expr $1 : '-t\(.*\)$'` ;;
- --f*=*)
- fonts=`expr $1 : '--f.*=\(.*\)'` ;;
- -f|-fonts|--f*)
- fonts=$2; shift ;;
- -f*)
- fonts=`expr $1 : '-f\(.*\)$'` ;;
- --w*-*)
- with=$with/`expr $1 : '--w.*-\(.*\)'`/ ;;
- -w|-with|--w*)
- with=$with/$2/; shift ;;
- -w*)
- with=$with/`expr $1 : '-w\(.*\)$'`/ ;;
- -e*|--e*=*)
- ;;
- -e|--e*)
- shift ;;
- *)
- echo $me: ignoring $1 1>&2
- ;;
- esac
- shift
-done
-
-# Check for the "with" keywords we're interested in:
-case $with in */tds/*) tds=t ;; esac
-# case $with in */bigendian/*) bigendian=t ;; esac
- # endianness doesn't matter because no fonts in this package
-
-
-# Find out how to print a dot with no newline
-n=-n c=
-echo $n x$c > $tmp
-case "`cat $tmp`" in
- -n*)
- n= c='\\c' ;;
-esac
-dot="$n .$c"
-
-
-# INSTALL -- oh, I can't be bothered trying to be clever.
-if install --version 2>&1 | grep GNU >/dev/null; then
- INSTALL="install"
-else
- INSTALL='$(srcdir)/pinstall'
-fi
-INSTALL_DATA='$(INSTALL) --mode=644'
-echo $me: install files with $INSTALL
-
-
-# find srcdir
-if test -z "$srcdir" ; then
- echo $n "$me: searching for srcdir (package directory)..$c"
- for d in . `dirname $0` ..; do
- echo $dot
- if test -f $d/$unique; then
- echo srcdir=$d
- srcdir=$d
- break
- fi
- done
-fi
-
-if test -z "$srcdir"; then
- echo ""
- echo $me: fatal error: could not find sourcdir
- exit 1
-fi
-
-# User might use --prefix to give the TeX prefix:
-
-if test -z "$texmf"; then
- case "$prefix" in
- */texmf|*/tex)
- texmf=$prefix ;;
- esac
-fi
-
-# If $texmf is not set, then search for it
-# We look in all sorts of prefixes like /usr/local (with or without extra
-# lib), using all sorts of directiry names like "tex"
-#
-
-if test -z "$texmf"; then
- prefixes="$prefix
- `echo $TEXINPUTS:$TEXFONTS | tr : \\\\12 |
- sed -n -e 's,/[Tt]e[Xx].*,,p' -e 's,/font.*,,p' | uniq`
- / /usr /usr/local /opts /p /packages /package
- /pd /usr/pd /usr/local/pd /usr/contrib /usr/TeX
- $HOME"
- echo $n $me: searching for \$texmf..$c
- for d in texmf tex TeX tex3.14 tex3 tex82; do
- for p in $prefixes; do
- echo $dot
- if test -d $p/$d -a $writable $p/$d; then
- echo texmf=$p/$d
- texmf=$p/$d
- break 2
- fi
- if test -d $p/lib/$d -a $writable $p/lib/$d; then
- echo texmf=$p/lib/$d
- texmf=$p/lib/$d
- break 2
- fi
- done
- done
-fi
-if test -z "$texmf"; then
- echo ""
- echo $me: fatal error: could not guess a texmf directory 1>&2
- exit 1
-fi
-if test ! -d "$texmf" -o ! -w "$texmf"; then
- echo $me: warning: $texmf needs to be a writable directory 1>&2
-fi
-
-
-# If --with-tds not set, try to guess whether we have found
-# a TDS directory or not:
-if test -n "$tds" || test -d $texmf/tex/plain; then
- tds=t
- echo "$me: using TWG-TDS 0.61 directory structure"
-else
- echo "$me: using old-style directory structure :-("
-fi
-
-
-# Start making the config.status file
-
-f=config.status
-
-# Special care is taken with the -n option
-# -- -n is not to be included by default when configure is run with
-# "config.status -r", so it must be removed from $cmd
-# -- -n (or other options) may be included on the command line
-# of "config.status -r" and will be passed to configure
-cmd2=`echo $cmd | sed 's/ --*n[a-z-]*//g'`
-cat >$f <<@EOF
-# config.status -- configuration status file
-# creator: configure for $package $version <$cfgauthor $cfgdate>
-# created: $date
-# command: $cmd
-
-case "\$1" in
- -r*|--r*)
- shift
- echo \$0: rerunning $cmd2 1>&2
- exec sh $cmd2 \$* ;;
-esac
-
-echo This is config.status, generated by configure for $package on $date
-
-srcdir=$srcdir
-date=`date +19%y-%m-%d`
-files="\${*-$files}"
-sedscript='
- s,@package@,$package,
- s,@srcdir@,$srcdir,
- s,@texmf@,$texmf,
- s,@configure@,$0,
- s,@INSTALL@,$INSTALL,
- s,@INSTALL_DATA@,$INSTALL_DATA,
-@EOF
-
-if test -n "$tds"; then
- echo >>$f " s,@texdir@,\$(texmf)/tex/plain/\$(package),"
- echo >>$f " s,@docdir@,\$(texmf)/doc/plain/\$(package),"
-else
- echo $n $me: searching for TeX macro dir..$c; found=
- for d in inputs macros; do
- echo $dot
- if test -d $texmf/$d -a $writable $texmf/$d; then
- echo $texmf/$d
- echo >>$f " s,@texdir@,$texmf/$d,"
- found=t
- break
- fi
- done
- if test -z "$found"; then
- echo ""
- echo $0: fatal error: TeX macro dir NOT FOUND 1>&2
- exit 1
- fi
-
- # now same again for a documentation directory
- echo $n $me: searching for documentation dir..$c; found=
- for p in $texmf $fonts $prefixes; do
- for d in doc doc/tex docs docs/tex ; do
- echo $dot
- if test -d $p/$d -a $writable $p/$d; then
- echo $p/$d/$package
- echo >>$f " s,@docdir@,$p/$d/\$(package),"
- found=t
- break 2
- fi
- done
- done
- if test -z "$found"; then
- echo ""
- echo $0: warning: documentation dir NOT FOUND 1>&2
- fi
-fi
-
-
-# Finish off the config.status file:
-
-cat >>$f <<'@EOF'
-'
-
-for file in $files; do
- echo $0: writing $file... 1>&2
- sed -e 's,Template for configure,Generated from '$file'.in on '$date' by '$0, \
- -e "$sedscript" $srcdir/$file.in > $file || exit 1
-done
-
-exit 0
-@EOF
-
-echo $me: configuration status written on config.status
-
-if test -z "$nocreate"; then
- sh config.status
-fi
-
-rm -f $tmp
-exit 0
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/contents.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/contents.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 165cc4ab2fc..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/contents.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-total 498
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 1006 Mar 20 14:23 00readme.txt
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 7984 Apr 6 16:10 changes.txt
--rwxr-xr-x 1 pdc mc86 6910 Mar 24 18:56 configure
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 0 Apr 6 16:10 contents.txt
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 19466 Mar 8 18:16 copying.tex
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 19038 Feb 10 11:02 copying.txt
--rwxr-xr-x 1 pdc mc86 1282 Apr 6 14:38 dtxtags
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 4267 Apr 6 12:19 dtxtags.1
--rwxr-xr-x 1 pdc mc86 787 Mar 24 18:34 fig2epsf
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 1101 Mar 27 16:56 fig2epsf.1
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 3196 Feb 23 18:51 install.txt
--r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 21818 Apr 6 14:34 maamac.dtx
--r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 7785 Mar 29 17:32 magrmac.dtx
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 21216 Feb 23 17:39 magrman.tex
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 4854 Apr 6 12:43 makefile.in
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 387 Apr 6 14:38 news.txt
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 10187 Apr 6 12:42 oput01.eps
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 8784 Feb 13 17:07 oput01.fig
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 12285 Apr 6 12:42 oput02.eps
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 8032 Feb 13 15:34 oput02.fig
--r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 20544 Mar 30 17:07 pdcadobe.dtx
--r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 29428 Mar 30 17:08 pdccode.dtx
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 8194 Apr 6 12:44 pdccode.tex
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 7961 Mar 3 15:41 pdccode2.tex
--r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 38300 Apr 6 12:55 pdcfmt2.dtx
--r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 23174 Mar 28 20:06 pdcfsel.dtx
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 61708 Apr 6 16:04 pdcguide.dvi
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 31674 Apr 6 16:04 pdcguide.tex
--r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 8670 Mar 30 17:10 pdcl1maa.dtx
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 27 Apr 6 12:20 pdcmacvn.tex
--r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 18597 Mar 30 17:13 pdcmisc.dtx
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 5207 Mar 29 15:54 pdcmondo.tex
--r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 32746 Apr 6 12:51 pdcoput5.dtx
--r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 37441 Mar 30 17:12 pdcsty.dtx
--rwxr-xr-x 1 pdc mc86 1695 Mar 24 19:10 pinstall
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 1744 Mar 27 15:47 pinstall.1
--rwxr-xr-x 1 pdc mc86 1876 Mar 27 14:22 pmkdir
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 1538 Mar 27 16:49 pmkdir.1
--rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 789 Apr 6 14:38 version.txt
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/copying.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/copying.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 184f8803bdd..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/copying.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,373 +0,0 @@
-\section{GNU General Public License\ifnum\pageno>0 \note{This licence is reproduced
- verbatim, therefore the American spelling is used.}\fi}
- Version 2, June 1991
-
-\noindent
- Copyright \copyright~1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
- 675~Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA
-
- Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of
- this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
-
-
-\noindent{\bf Preamble}\quad
- The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom
-to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is
-intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to
-make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public
-License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and
-to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free
-Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General
-Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
-
- When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
-price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
-have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
-this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if
-you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
-free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
-
- To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
-anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
-These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
-distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
-
- For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
-gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
-you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
-source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
-rights.
-
- We protect your rights with two steps: (1)~copyright the software, and
-(2)~offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
-distribute and/or modify the software.
-
- Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
-that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
-software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
-want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
-that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
-authors' reputations.
-
- Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
-patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
-program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
-program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
-patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
-
- The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
-modification follow.
-
-\bigskip
-\noindent{\bf TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
- MODIFICATION\advance\rightskip0pt plus 1em \par}
-\medskip
-
- 1. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a
- notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
- under the terms of this General Public License. The `Program',
- below, refers to any such program or work, and a `work based on the
- Program' means either the Program or any derivative work under
- copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a
- portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
- translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
- included without limitation in the term `modification'.) Each
- licensee is addressed as `you'.
-
- Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are
- not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act
- of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the
- Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
- the Program (independent of having been made by running the
- Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
-
- 2. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source
- code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
- conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
- copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
- notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
- warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of
- this License along with the Program.
-
- You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
- and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange
- for a fee.
-
- 3. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of
- it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
- distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
- above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
-
-\numbered
- \\You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
- stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
-
- \\You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that
- in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or
- any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to
- all third parties under the terms of this License.
-
- \\If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
- when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
- interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display
- an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and
- a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you
- provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the
- program under these conditions, and telling the user how to
- view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program
- itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
- announcement, your work based on the Program is not required
- to print an announcement.)
-\endnumbered
-
- These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
- identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
- Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
- works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply
- to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But
- when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a
- work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on
- the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees
- extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part
- regardless of who wrote it.
-
- Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
- contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
- intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of
- derivative or collective works based on the Program.
-
- In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the
- Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a
- volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other
- work under the scope of this License.
-
- 4. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
- under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms
- of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the
- following:
-
-\numbered
- \\ Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
- source code, which must be distributed under the terms of
- Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
- software interchange; or,
-
- \\ Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
- years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
- cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
- machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
- distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
- medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
-
- \\ Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
- to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
- allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
- received the program in object code or executable form with
- such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
-\endnumbered
-
- The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
- making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete
- source code means all the source code for all modules it contains,
- plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts
- used to control compilation and installation of the executable.
- However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need
- not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source
- or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so
- on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless
- that component itself accompanies the executable.
-
- If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
- access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
- access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
- distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
- compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
-
- 5. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
- except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
- otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
- void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
- License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
- from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated
- so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
-
- 6. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
- signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify
- or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions
- are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.
- Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work
- based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License
- to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
- distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
-
- 7. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
- Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
- original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject
- to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
- restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
- herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
- parties to this License.
-
- 8. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
- infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent
- issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
- agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
- License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this
- License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously
- your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
- obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the
- Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
- royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive
- copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you
- could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
- from distribution of the Program.
-
- If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable
- under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is
- intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply
- in other circumstances.
-
- It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
- patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of
- any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting
- the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
- implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
- generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
- through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
- system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is
- willing to distribute software through any other system and a
- licensee cannot impose that choice.
-
- This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed
- to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
-
- 9. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
- certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces,
- the original copyright holder who places the Program under this
- License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
- excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only
- in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this
- License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of
- this License.
-
- 10. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
- versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new
- versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
- differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
-
- Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the
- Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to
- it and `any later version', you have the option of following the
- terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version
- published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not
- specify a version number of this License, you may choose any
- version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
-
- 11. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
- programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the
- author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by
- the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
- Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision
- will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of
- all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
- and reuse of software generally.
-
-\medbreak\centerline{\bf NO WARRANTY}\nobreak\smallskip\nobreak
-\begingroup\tolerance=3000 \advance\rightskip 0pt plus 1em
-
- 12. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
- WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
- LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
- AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY
- OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
- LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
- FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
- PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
- DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
- OR CORRECTION.
-
- 13. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
- WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
- MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
- LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
- INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
- INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
- DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU
- OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY
- OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
- ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
-
-\endgroup
-\bigskip \centerline{\bf END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS}\medbreak
-
-\noindent{\bf How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs}\quad
- If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
-possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
-free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these
-terms.
-
- To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
-to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
-convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
-`copyright' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
-
-\quotation
- {\it one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does}
-
- Copyright (C) 19{\it yy} {\it name of author}
-\smallskip
- This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
- it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
- the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
- (at your option) any later version.
-\smallskip
- This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
- but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
- MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
- GNU General Public License for more details.
-\smallskip
- You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
- along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
- Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-\endquotation
-
-Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
-
-If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
-when it starts in an interactive mode:
-
-\quotation
- Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19YY NAME OF AUTHOR
- Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
- This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
- under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
-\endquotation
-
-The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the
-appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the
-commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show
-c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items---whatever suits your
-program.
-
-You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
-school, if any, to sign a `copyright disclaimer' for the program, if
-necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
-
-\quotation
- Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
- `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
-
- SIGNATURE OF TY COON, 1 April 1989
- Ty Coon, President of Vice
-\endquotation
-
-This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program
-into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you
-may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications
-with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library
-General Public License instead of this License.
-
-
-%Local Variables:
-%tex-mother-file: "pdcguide.tex"
-%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags
deleted file mode 100644
index a54f61760ab..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-#! /bin/sh
-
-# dtxtags -- getenerate a TAGS file for the DTX files
-version="1.1 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-04-06>"
-
-# The grep line produces LINE:BYTE:PATTERN
-# the sed converts this to LINE:BYTE:PATTERN:TAG
-
-tmp=${TMP-/tmp}/mktags$$
-trap 'rm -f $tmp*' 0
-
-me=`basename $0`
-outfile=TAGS
-
-touch $tmp
-while test $# -gt 0; do
- case $1 in
- --o*=*)
- outfile=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ;;
- -o|--o*)
- outfile=$2; shift ;;
- -o*)
- outfile=`expr $1 : '-.\(.*\)$'` ;;
- -h|--h*)
- cat <<@EOF
-$me: construct an etags-style tags file from DTX files.
-
-USAGE:
- $me [ --output=OUTFILE ] [ INFILE... ]
- $me --help | --version
-@EOF
- exit 0 ;;
- -V|--v*)
- echo This is $me $version
- exit 0 ;;
- -*)
- echo >&2 $me: $1: not understood, try $me --help
- exit 2 ;;
- *)
- i=$1
- echo >&2 $1:
- egrep -nb '^[ ]\|[ ]*\\([a-z]*def|new)' <$1 |
- sed '
- s/\([ ]*|\\[a-z]*\\[A-Za-z]*\).*$/\1/
- t finish
- s/\([ ]*|\\[a-z]*\\.\).*$/\1/
- t finish
- s/\([ ]*|\\[a-z]*[^a-z]\).*$/\1/
- : finish
- s/\([0-9]*\):\([0-9]*\):\(.*\)/\3\1,\2/
- ' > $tmp.a
- wc $tmp.a
- echo ' ' >> $tmp
- echo $1,`wc -c <$tmp.a` >>$tmp
- cat $tmp.a >> $tmp
- ;;
- esac
- shift
-
-done
-
-mv 2>/dev/null $outfile $outfile.bak &&
-echo >&2 backup written to $outfile.bak
-
-mv $tmp $outfile
-
-exit 0
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags.1 b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 1d37d72bac7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,207 +0,0 @@
-.TH DTXTAGS 1 "Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-04-06>" "PDCMAC 1.0" "CONTRIBUTED SOFTWARE"
-.SH NAME
-dtxtags \- generate an Emacs tags (etags) file from DTX files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.na
-.B dtxtags
-[
-.BI \-\-output= outfile
-] [
-.I infile
-]\|.\|.\|.
-.br
-.B dtxtags
-.B \-\-help
-|
-.B \-\-version
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.na
-This is a shellscript that looks for definitions in
-.B dtx
-files
-(Documented TeX Macros, as used in the
-.SM PDCMAC
-package), and generates a tags file in
-.IR etags (1)
-format. The tags file will be called
-.SM
-.B TAGS
-by default.
-Any old tags file will be written to
-.BR TAGS.bak .
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.BI \-\-output= outfile, " \-o " outfile
-Write tags to
-.I outfile
-instead of the default.
-Any existing file with that name will be renamed
-.IB outfile .bak
-first.
-.TP
-.BR \-\-help ", " \-h
-Print a summary of options and exit.
-.TP
-.BR \-\-version ", " \-V
-Print version identification and exit.
-.SH "INPUT SYNTAX"
-This section describes the constructs in the
-.B dtx
-that will be recognized as tags. You should already be acquainted with
-TeX terminology like `control sequence'.
-.PP
-A
-.I keyword
-is (1)\ a TeX control sequence
-.I containing
-.RB ` def ',
-such as
-.B \edef
-or
-.B \edefverbatim
-or
-.BR \emathchardef ,
-or (2)\ a control sequence
-.I starting
-with
-.RB ` \enew ',
-like
-.B \enewif
-and
-.BR \enewcount .
-Keywords define the
-.I tag
-(a control sequence or single character) immediately following.
-.PP
-Keywords are recognized only if immediately following a
-.RB ` | '
-at the start of a line, the code used to introduce macro code in
-.B dtx
-files.
-.PP
-There may be whitespace between the start of the line and the
-vertical bar, and between the vertical bar and the keyword (this means a
-few definitions appearing within definitions are spuriously tagged, but
-this should be harmless).
-.SH "OUTPUT FORMAT"
-This section sumarizes the syntax of the tag file that is generated,
-because the documentation for
-.IR etags (1)
-omits it. Since this syntax description was made by reverse-engineering
-.I etags
-output, it should not be taken as definitive!
-.PP
-A tags file is composed of
-.I sections
-catenated together,
-each section made of a
-.I header
-followed by the
-.IR body .
-All numbers are expressed in ASCII in decimal notation.
-.PP
-The header consists of a form feed, a newline, the name of the file the
-tags are found in, a comma, and the size in bytes of the body and a
-newline.
-.PP
-The body consists of
-.I entries
-which may be in
-old format or new format.
-Old format entries are of the form
-.IP "" 4n
-.I fragment
-.B \e177
-.IB line ,
-.I byte
-.SM NL
-.PP
-where
-.I fragment
-is a fragment from the file containing the tag (where the start of the
-fragment is at the beginning of a line in the file),
-.B \e177
-is a
-.SM DEL
-character (character 127),
-.I line
-is the number of the line in which the fragment appears,
-.I byte
-is the position of the start of the fragment in bytes from the
-start of the file,
-and
-.SM NL
-is a newline (character 10).
-.PP
-New format entries are of the form
-.IP "" 4n
-.I fragment
-.B \e177
-.IB line ,
-.IB byte ,
-.B \e001
-.I tag
-[
-.B \e001
-.I tag
-]\|.\|.\|.
-.SM NL
-.PP
-(two commas) where
-.B \e001
-is a
-.SM SOH
-character (character 1), and
-.I tag
-is the exact tag (necessary for C++, where the entire tag is not
-necessarily found on the definition line). The brackets and ellipsis
-indicate that there may be one or more tags in the entry.
-.PP
-Real tags files may also have references to other tag files, but I don't
-use this feature.
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-.TP
-.SM TMP
-Name of directory for temporary files.
-Default is
-.BR /tmp .
-.SH FILES
-.TP
-.SB TAGS
-Default output file name.
-.TP
-.B /tmp/mktags\(**
-Temporary files.
-.SH AUTHOR
-P. Damian Cugley
-.RI ( damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk ).
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-etags(1), emacs(1)
-.PP
-The file
-.B etc/etags.notes
-in the Emacs distribution.
-.PP
-Richard Stallman,
-.I Emacs Reference Manual
-(or the corresponding Info file).
-.PP
-P. Damian Cugley,
-.I PDCMAC User Guide
-(file
-.B pdcguide.tex
-in the
-.SM PDCMAC
-distribution),
-for information about
-.B dtx
-files.
-.SH BUGS
-This is just a shellscript emulating a subset of
-.IR etags 's
-functionality.
-.PP
-Despite the name, this program does not work with the
-.B dtx
-files used in LaTeX 2e distributions, which have a completely different
-format (and their own indexing scheme).
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf
deleted file mode 100644
index 210dd47edb8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-#! /bin/sh
-
-# Convert Fig files to conformant EPSF-3.0 files
-# Fig's PostScript translation creates EPSF files that cause
-# many laser printers to abort in mid-document.
-# This script attempts to remedy this.
-
-version="1.0 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-24>"
-
-# Usage fig2epsf [ -m MAG ] [ -f FONT ] [ -s FSIZE ] [
-
-case $1 in
- -V|--version)
- echo 'This is fig2epsf $version, using fig2dev from'
- fig2dev -V
- exit 0
-esac
-
-fig2dev -Lps $* | sed '
- s/^%!$/%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0/
- s/^%!PS-Adobe-2.0 EPSF-2.0/%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0/
- s/%%Pages: 0/%%Pages: 1/
- /\/\$F2psDict/d
- /\$F2psDict begin/d
- / end/d
- /\/\$F2psBegin/d
- /\/\$F2psEnd/d
- /\$F2psBegin/d
- /\/col-1/d
- s/col-1//g
- s,\$F2psDict /mtrx matrix put,/mtrx matrix def,
- s/\$F2psEnd/showpage/
- /%%EndProlog/a\
-\
-%%Page: 1 1
-'
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf.1 b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 10985153141..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-.TH FIG2EPSF 1 "Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-27>" "PDCMAC 1.0" "CONTRIBUTED SOFTWARE"
-.SH NAME
-fig2epsf \- convert Fig picture files into Encapsulate PostScript format
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.na
-.B fig2epsf
-[
-.I fig2dev options
-]
-.I figfile
-.B >
-.I epsffile
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.na
-This is a shellscript that uses the
-.IR fig2dev (1)
-program to convert files in Fig's format
-(see
-.IR fig (1)
-or
-.IR xfig (1))
-into Encapsulated PostScript Format compliant with version 3.0 of the
-.SM EPSF
-guidelines. The
-.SM EPSF
-file is printed on the standard output stream.
-.PP
-This shellscript cleans up some of the redundant PostScript code that
-.I fig2dev
-2.1.4.1 produces, so that the resulting files may be printed on a
-tiny-brained LaserWriter, and corrects the header comments so that it
-may be previewed with
-.IR ghostview (1).
-.SH AUTHOR
-P. Damian Cugley
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-fig2dev(1)
-.PP
-.I
-PostScript Language Reference Manual
-Second Edition
-(Addison\-Wesley, 1990),
-Appendix E.
-.SH BUGS
-It is possible that later versions of TransFig will produce less buggy
-PostScript files, and that these will break this shellscript.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55doc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55doc.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index c22a178174f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55doc.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-% ma55doc.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "ma55doc.tex",
-%%% version = "1.2",
-%%% date = "1995/03/30",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "Top-level macro file for documents set in
-%%% Malvern 55, 56 and 75 fonts.
-%%% This macro file was generated by running plain
-%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "maamac.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex,
-%%% pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
-%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdcdoc.def",
-%%%}
-
-\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
-
-\input pdcimth
-\input pdcmigr
-\input pdcfmt2
-\input pdchyex
-\input pdcoput5
-\input pdcfsel
-\input maamac
-\def\footnotetextmark#1{{\rmsy#1}}
-\def\footnotenotemark#1{{\rmsy#1}}
-\autoloadfonts
-\def\STYheadingT{%
- \m{rm}{ma75a}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}%
- \f{it}{ma76a}\@\f{tt}{cmtt10}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
-}
-\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading}
-\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading}
-\newfam\rmsyfam
-\def\STYbodyT{%
- \m{rm}{ma55a}\f{rmsy}{ma55b}\m{it}{ma56a}%
- \m{bf}{ma75a}\f{bi}{ma76a}%
- \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
- \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
- \f{tt}{cmtt}\f{tb}{cmsltt}%
-}
-\font\bodymi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep2
-\font\bodysy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
-\font\notemi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep1
-\font\notesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
-\font\smallmi=cmmi10 scaled \magstephalf
-\font\smallsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstephalf
-\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny}
-\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt}
-\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000
-\bodyfonts
-{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 }
-\def\PS{\csc{PostScript}}
-\def\La{L\negthinspace\flushtop{\char"C1 }}
-\input pdcdoc.def
-\inputifexists{ma55doc.cfg}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55lft.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55lft.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 0b72a6e99a4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55lft.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-% ma55lft.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "ma55lft.tex",
-%%% version = "1.2",
-%%% date = "1995/03/30",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "Top-level macro file for documents set in
-%%% Malvern 55, 56 and 75 fonts.
-%%% This macro file was generated by running plain
-%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "maamac.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex,
-%%% pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
-%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdclft.def",
-%%%}
-
-\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
-
-\input pdcimth
-\input pdcmigr
-\input pdcfmt2
-\input pdchyex
-\input pdcoput5
-\input pdcfsel
-\input maamac
-\def\footnotetextmark#1{{\rmsy#1}}
-\def\footnotenotemark#1{{\rmsy#1}}
-\autoloadfonts
-\def\STYheadingT{%
- \m{rm}{ma75a}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}%
- \f{it}{ma76a}\@\f{tt}{cmtt10}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
-}
-\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading}
-\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading}
-\newfam\rmsyfam
-\def\STYbodyT{%
- \m{rm}{ma55a}\f{rmsy}{ma55b}\m{it}{ma56a}%
- \m{bf}{ma75a}\f{bi}{ma76a}%
- \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
- \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
- \f{tt}{cmtt}\f{tb}{cmsltt}%
-}
-\font\bodymi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep2
-\font\bodysy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
-\font\notemi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep1
-\font\notesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
-\font\smallmi=cmmi10 scaled \magstephalf
-\font\smallsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstephalf
-\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny}
-\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt}
-\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000
-\bodyfonts
-{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 }
-\def\PS{\csc{PostScript}}
-\def\La{L\negthinspace\flushtop{\char"C1 }}
-\input pdclft.def
-\inputifexists{ma55lft.cfg}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index a4398caa417..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,627 +0,0 @@
-% maamac.dtx -- documentation & source for maamac.tex -*-tex-*-
-
-%%%@TeX-document-file {
-%%% title = "MAAMAC -- Malvern A Macros",
-%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/maamac.dtx",
-%%% version = "$Revision: 1.5 $",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% date = "$Date: 1995/04/06 13:33:44 $",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for
-%%% the TeX definitions file maamac.tex.
-%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
-%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute
-%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
-%%% General Public License as published by the Free
-%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
-%%% or (at your option) any later version.",
-%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
-%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
-%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
-%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
-%%% License for more details.",
-%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
-%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write
-%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
-%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
-%%%}
-
-%{{{ maamac
-%{{{ preamble
-
-\relax
-\input pdccode
-
-\document
-\rcs$Id: maamac.dtx,v 1.5 1995/04/06 13:33:44 pdc Exp $\endrcs
-
-\newcount\chcda \newcount\chcdc \newcount\chcdn
-\def\changecodes#1#2#3#4{%
- \chcda#2\relax \chcdc#3\relax \chcdn#4\relax
- \loop \ifnum\chcdn>0
- #1\chcda\chcdc
- \advance\chcda1 \advance\chcdc1 \advance\chcdn-1
- \repeat
-}
-\changecodes\mathcode{`a}{"7461}{26}
-
-\codefile{maamac.tex}
-%}}} preamble
-%{{{ introduction
-
-\author{P. Damian Cugley}
-\title{MAAMAC---Malvern A Macros}
-\advance\seccount-1
-\section{Introduction}
-
- This document describes |maamac.tex|, a collection of formatting
- macros for plain \TeX\ documents using fonts with the Malvern~A
- encoding. For example, it defines commands for making composite
- letters and special symbols.
-
-\subsec{About this document}
-
- The definitions file and this printed documentation are both in
- |maamac.dtx|, a `documented \TeX\ macros' file\footnote*{The
- \LaTeX~2e distribution uses files with the `|dtx|' suffix for
- similar purposes.} which, when processed by plain \TeX,
- generates a fresh copy of |maamac.tex| in the current directory
- in addition to the |dvi| file. This ensures that the printed
- documentation and the code it describes are identical. The
- |dtx| file uses the macros in |pdccode.tex|.
-
-\subsec{What is in MAAMAC?}
-
- The definitions in |maamac.tex| fall into three sections:
-\smallskip
-\item{\S1} Building {\it composite letters} like `\'e' from {\it
- marks} like `\'{}' and {\it base letters} like `e'. This gives
- new definitions for commands like |\'| and |\"|.
-\item{\S2} Symbols and special letters: replacements for existing
- commands like |\P| (\P) and |\ae| (\ae), and new commands like
- |\registered| and |\pounds|.
-\item{\S3} Switching between alphabets. The Malvern~A encoding includes
- separate small capital and medium capital alphabets in addition
- to the usual capitals and lower case. This section defines
- commands for transliterating a list of tokens from one alphabet
- to another.
-
-\smallskip\noindent
- The first two sections make changes to commands described in
- {\it\TeX book} Chapter~9 (and a few maths symbols from
- Chapter~16) and defined in Appendix~B.
-
-%}}} introduction
-%{{{ File identification
-\subsec{File identification}
-
- Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the
- file.
-
-\code
- \|\% maamac.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- Malvern A Macros
- |
- |%%%@TeX-definition-file {
- |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex",
- \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
- \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
- |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
- |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
- |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
- |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
- |%%% codetable = "USASCII",
- |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
- |%%% supported = "Maybe",
- |%%% abstract = "Macros for using the Malvern-A font coding
- |%%% scheme in plain TeX documents.
- |%%% This file was generated by running
- \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx",
- |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
- \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the
- |%%% package it came in.",
- |%%% dependencies = "",
- |%%% }
- |
- \|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\}
- |
-\endcode
-
-%}}}
-%{{{ building composite letters
-\section{Building composite letters}
-
- THis section redefines commands listed at the start of Chapter~9
- of the {\it\TeX book}: |\'|, |\"|, etc. The main difference is
- that these now use `medium capitals' and differently-drawn marks
- to make composite capital letters.
-
- I~also define \<chardef tokens> called |\acuteglyph|,
- |\twodotsglyph| which may be used to print these marks in a
- document: `the acute mark ``\'{}''\dots' might be typeset with
- `|the acute mark ``\acuteglyph''|\dots'. Also, if you don't
- like the way my macros look, you can say `|\accent\acuteglyph
- E|' rather than having to look up its glyph number.
-
-%{{{ utility macros
-
-\subsec{Utility macros}
-
- First some nicknames for scratch registers.
-\code
- |\dimendef\dimena0 \dimendef\dimenb2
- |\toksdef\toksa0
- |\countdef\counta255
- |\ifx\countb\UNDEFINED \csname newcount\endcsname\countb \fi
- |\ifx\countc\UNDEFINED \csname newcount\endcsname\countc \fi
-\endcode
-
- A macro to find the code in \TeX's internal encoding for a
- character. The character might be represented by (1)~a
- character with category code~11 or~12, (2)~a token defined with
- |\chardef|, or (3)~the token |\char| followed by a \<number>.
-\code
- |\def\code#1{%
- | \ifcat#1a%
- | `#1
- | \else\ifcat#1+%
- | `#1
- | \else\ifx\char#1
-\endcode
-\hbox{\hskip6\fontdimen6\tentt
- \% If the first token is |\char| the rest is the
- \<number> we want.}
-\code
- | \else
- | #1%
- | \fi\fi\fi
- |}
-\endcode
-
- So as to make conditional macros that can be skipped over if
- they appear nested inside another conditional, we make include
- the token |\then| amongst the arguments, making this the `if-'
- token to match the |\else| and |\fi| following it. This way we
- write, for example
-$$\hbox{|\ifcap|\<character> |\then| \<true text>
- |\else| \<false text> |\fi|}$$
-\code
- |\let\then=\iffalse
-\smallbreak
- |\def\ifcap#1\then{\expandafter\ifcapnum\code{#1}\then}
- |\def\ifcapnum#1\then{\ifnum\lccode#1=#1}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\iflower#1\then{\expandafter\iflowernum\code{#1}\then}
- |\def\iflowernum#1\then{\ifnum\uccode#1=#1}
-\endcode
-
- A macro to extract the slant-per-point parameter of a font in
- toe form of a \TeX\ \<factor>.
-\code
- |\def\fontslant#1{\expandafter\stripPT\the\fontdimen1#1}
-\smallbreak
- |\begingroup \uccode`2=`p \uccode`3=`t \uppercase{\toksa{\endgroup
- | \def\\#123{#1}
- |}} \the\toksa
- |\let\stripPT=\\
-\endcode
-%}}} utility macros
-%{{{ macros for placing marks
-
-\subsec{Macros for placing marks}
-
- This simple macro places the text |#3| at displaced
- $(\hbox{|#1|},\hbox{|#2|})$ from current position:
-\code
- |\def\putxy#1#2#3{\leavevmode\rlap{\hskip#1\raise#2\hbox{#3}}}
-\endcode
-
- Now we have a generic mark-placement macro. It is similar to
- the |\accent| primitive, but takes two extra parameters:
-$$
- \hbox{|\putmarkxy|\arg{$xf$}\arg{$dy$}\arg{$mark$}\arg{$base$}}
-$$
- The horizontal position $xf$ of the optical centre of the base
- letter (ignoring slant) is expressed as a \<factor> (i.e.,
- decimal fraction of the width of the base glyph). The vertical
- displacement $dy$ is expressed as a fragment of \TeX\ code that
- will calculate $dy$. The code is expanded after setting box~0
- to contain the base glyph, and must put the result in |\dimena|.
- For example, we could define
-$$
- \hbox{|\def\fakeaccent{\putmarkxy{0.5}{\dimena\ht0
- \advance\dimena-1ex }}|}
-$$
- This produces an approximation to the primitive |\accent|
- command.
-
- Given the $x$-factor $xf$, a base glyph with width $wd$, a font
- with slant $s$, the horizontal displacement $dx$ is given by
-$$
- dx = xf \times wd + s \times dy\quad.
-$$
- In this macro it is stored in |\dimenb|.
-\code
- |\def\putmarkxy#1#2#3#4{{%
- | \setbox0=\hbox{#4}#2\relax
- | \dimenb#1\wd0 \advance\dimenb\fontslant\font\dimena
- | \leavevmode
- | \putxy{\dimenb}{\dimena}{\hbox to 0pt{\hss\char#3\hss}}%
- | \box0
- |}}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\putmarky{\putmarkxy{0.5}}
-\endcode
-%}}} macros for placing marks
-%{{{ type I marks
-
-\subsec{Type~I Marks}
-
- A Type~I mark is one which does not have any scope for being
- `squashed' to go over capital letters---for example, the
- two-dots mark `\"{}' and macron `\={}'.
-
- Here's a macro for placing a Type~I mark given by |#1| (a
- \<number>) over base glyph |#2| (which is anything that |\code|
- understands). The difference between this macro and simply
- using |\accent| is (1)~if presented with a capital letter it
- will use the corresponding medium capital letter and (2)~the the
- mark is raised by an amount intended to centre it vertically
- between the top of the base letter and the top of the
- body-height---assuming it was original centered between
- body-height and $x$-height.
-
- If $H$ is the body height, $h$ the height of the base glyph,
-$$ \mathcode`/="202F
- \eqalign{dy &= { H + h \over 2 } - { H + 1\,{\rm
- ex} \over 2}\cr
- &= \textstyle { 1\over2}h - {1\over2}\,{\rm ex}\cr}
-$$
-\code
- |\def\typeImark#1#2{{%
- | \setbox2=\hbox{#2}%
- | \ifdim \ht2=1ex
- | \accent#1\relax#2%
- | \else
- | \counta\code{#2}%
- | \ifnum\counta>64 \ifnum\counta<96
- | \advance\counta 128
- | \fi \fi
- | \putmarky{\dimena0.5\ht0 \advance\dimena-0.5ex }
- | {#1}{\char\counta}%
- | \fi
- |}}
-\endcode
-
- Finally we define the composite-letter-building commands.
-\code
- |\chardef\dotglyph22 \def\.{\typeImark\dotglyph}
- |\chardef\twodotsglyph23 \def\"{\typeImark\twodotsglyph}
- |\chardef\macronglyph150 \def\={\typeImark\macronglyph}
- |\chardef\longmacronglyph151
- | \def\longmacronmark{\typeImark\longmacronglyph}
-\endcode
-%}}} type I marks
-%{{{ type II marks
-
-\subsec{Type~II Marks}
-
- These marks have an alternative glyph for use of capital and
- medium capital letters. As with |\typeImark|, |#1| is a
- \<number> and |#2| is anything understood by |\code|.
-\code
- |\def\typeIImark#1#2{{%
- | \counta#1\relax \countb\code{#2}%
- | \ifcap{#2}\then
- | \ifnum \counta<128 \advance\counta 128 \fi
- | \ifnum \countb<128 \advance\countb 128 \fi
- | \fi
- | \accent\counta \char\countb
- |}}
-\smallbreak
- |\chardef\acuteglyph8 \def\'{\typeIImark\acuteglyph}
- |\chardef\graveglyph9 \def\`{\typeIImark\graveglyph}
- |\chardef\circumglyph10 \def\^{\typeIImark\circumglyph}
- |\chardef\tildeglyph11 \def\~{\typeIImark\tildeglyph}
- |\chardef\ringglyph12 \def\ringmark{\typeIImark\ringglyph}
- |\chardef\caronglyph13 \def\v{\typeIImark\caronglyph}
- |\chardef\breveglyph14 \def\u{\typeIImark\breveglyph}
- |\chardef\hungarglyph15 \def\H{\typeIImark\hungarglyph}
-\endcode
- I have abbreviated `circumflex' as `circum' (consistent with
- Adobe's `|asciicircum|'). I~have called the hook `\v{}'
- `|caron|' because that is its name as used by ISO and Adobe.
- I~have called the long Hungarian umlaut `\H{}' `|hungar|' for
- want of a better name (it's shorter than |hungarumlaut|)..
-%}}} type II marks
-%{{{ cedilla ogonek
-
-\subsec{Cedilla and ogonek}
-
- The cedilla and ogonek each have a variant intended for capital
- letters (in this case the variant is larger not smaller).
-\code
- |\def\cedillalike#1#2#3{{%
- | \setbox0=\hbox{#3}%
- | \ifdim\ht0>1ex
- | \ooalign{\hidewidth\char#2\relax\hidewidth\crcr\unhbox0 }%
- | \else
- | \accent#1 #3%
- | \fi
- |}}
-\smallbreak
- |\chardef\cedillaglyph6 \chardef\Cedillaglyph134
- |\def\c{\cedillalike\cedillaglyph\Cedillaglyph}
-\smallbreak
- |\chardef\ogonekglyph7 \chardef\Ogonekglyph135
- |\def\k{\cedillalike\ogonekglyph\Ogonekglyph}
-\endcode
-%}}} cedilla ogonek
-%}}}
-%{{{ symbols
-\section{Symbols and special letters}
-%{{{ special letters
-
-\subsec{Special letters}
-
- The letters defined here that are not included in Chapter~9 of
- the {\it\TeX book} are the Icelandic thorn (|\TH|, |\th|) and
- eth\footnote*{Also called `edh'.} (|\DH|, |\dh|), the Polish
- {\it a} and {\it e} with ogonek (|\A|, |\a|, |\E|, |\e|), and
- the Sami eng\footnote\dag{Also called `ing' or `ng'.} (|\NG|,
- |\ng|).
-
- We also give replacements for {\it d}, {\it t} and {\it l} with
- hook (which are usually drawn with a apostrophe-like mark), and
- the Esperanto letter {\it hho} (\^h).
-\code
- |\chardef\TH"00 \chardef\th"10 \chardef\DH"04 \chardef\dh"14
- |\chardef\A "01 \chardef\a "11 \chardef\E "05 \chardef\e "15
- |\chardef\NG"02 \chardef\ng"12 \chardef\L "03 \chardef\l "13
- |\chardef\AE"5E \chardef\ae"7E \chardef\OE"5F \chardef\oe"7F
- |\chardef\O "5C \chardef\o "7C
-\smallbreak
- |\chardef\vd"9C \chardef\vt"9D \chardef\h "9E \chardef\vl"9F
- |\chardef\ss"18 \chardef\i "19 \chardef\j "1A
-\smallbreak
- |\def\aa{\ringmark a} \def\AA{\ringmark A}
-\endcode
-
-\code
-\smallbreak
- |\chardef\orda"98 \chardef\ordo"99 \def\No{N\ordo} \def\no{n\ordo}
- |\chardef\csuperior"98 \def\Mc{M\csuperior}
-\endcode
- The command |\Mc| is used for forming names like
- M\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam \b c}Donald.
-%}}} special letters
-%{{{ text syms
-
-\subsec{Other symbols used in text}
-
- There are several new symbols here. Note that |\trademark| is
- what you will get if you use the ASCII double quote character
- `|"|' in your manuscript.
-\code
- |\chardef\trademark "22
- |\chardef\copyright "FB \chardef\registered"FD
- |\chardef\careof "9A \chardef\Box "A0
- |\chardef\cents "A2 \chardef\pounds "A3
- |\chardef\currency "A4 \chardef\permille "A5
- |\chardef\yen "A8 \chardef\florin "A9
- |\chardef\dag "AA \chardef\ddag "AB
- |\chardef\gbdecimal "AE \chardef\minus "AF
- |\chardef\S "BA \chardef\P "BB
- |\chardef\degrees "C0
- |\chardef\lguillemet"BC \chardef\rguillemet"BE
-\endcode
- The |\careof| sign ($\rm ^c\!/\!_o$) is an abbreviation for
- `care of' in English-language addresses (actually, Australians
- traditionally write `$\rm ^c\!/\!_-$'). The raised dot
- |\gbdecimal| is the British decimal point (I~usually do
- |\mathcode`.=\gbdecimal| and let maths mode do all the work).
- The |\degrees| sign replaces \TeX's |$^\circ$|.
-
- The guillemets can also be obtained with the ligatures |<<| and
- |>>|.
-
-
-%}}} text syms
-%{{{ maths syms
-
-\subsec{Symbols used in maths}
-
- I have stuck with the plain \TeX\ conventions as much as
- possible---even though |\bullet| is more often used in text than
- maths.
-\code
- |\mathcode`\,"602C \mathcode`\-"20AF
- |\mathcode`\."002E \mathcode`\/"002F
-\smallbreak
- |\mathchardef\bullet "2020 \mathchardef\times "20A6
- |\mathchardef\backslash"005B \mathchardef\setminus "205B
- |\mathchardef\cdot "20AE \mathchardef\cdotp "60AE
-\smallbreak
- |\def\langle{\delimiter"40DB30A } \delcode`\<"0DB30A
- |\def\rangle{\delimiter"50DD30B } \delcode`\>"0DD30B
- |\def\lbrace{\delimiter"407B308 } \let\{\lbrace \mathcode`\{"407B
- |\def\rbrace{\delimiter"507D309 } \let\}\rbrace \mathcode`\}"407D
-\endcode
-
-%}}} maths syms
-%}}} symbols
-%{{{ switching alphabets
-\section{Switching between alphabets}
-
- This is one of the strange ideas that went into the design of
- the Malvern font---I wanted to have small capitals and medium
- capitals treated as separate alphabets rather than as a
- different style, just as I treat old-style and ranging numerals
- as separate symbols. These extra alphabets are present in all
- Malvern~A encodings\footnote*{Fonts with the Malvern~A encoding
- but made from normal PostScript fonts will have medium capitals
- replaced with full capitals, and old-style numerals replaced
- with ranging numerals.}
-
- These extra alphabets are obtained by transliterating a sequence
- of letters using the |\uppercase| and |\lowercase|
- commands.\footnote\dag{Alas! this task would be so much easier
- and more efficient if it were possible to declare new
- alphabet-switching tables styled after the |\uccode| and
- |\lccode| tables which make |\uppercase| and |\lowercase| work.
- Then all this nonsense could happen in \TeX's mouth, which has
- some advantages. I~can imagine commands |\newchartable| (used
- to create a token which can be used in the same way as
- |\uccode|) and |\usechartable| (used to defined macros that work
- like |\uppercase|). E\TeX\ hackers take note!} For example, to
- transliterate capitals into small capitals (the |\sc| command),
- we first make assignments so that, for example, |\lccode`a| is
- set to the code for small-capital $\scriptstyle A$, then apply
- |\lowercase| to the token list.
-
-\subsec{Setting upper and lower case codes for special letters}
-
- These entries in the |\uucode| and |\lccode| tables are used by
- the composite-letter-building commands rather then the
- alphabet-switchign commands, but they are included here to be
- near the other code-hackery.
-
-\code
- |\uccode\th\TH \lccode\TH\th \uccode\TH\TH \lccode\th\th
- |\uccode\a \A \lccode\A \a \uccode\A \A \lccode\a \a
- |\uccode\ng\NG \lccode\NG\ng \uccode\NG\NG \lccode\ng\ng
- |\uccode\l \L \lccode\L \l \uccode\L \L \lccode\l \l
- |\uccode\dh\DH \lccode\DH\dh \uccode\DH\DH \lccode\dh\dh
- |\uccode\e \E \lccode\E \e \uccode\E \E \lccode\e \e
- |\uccode\o \O \lccode\O \o \uccode\O \O \lccode\o \o
- |\uccode\ae\AE \lccode\AE\ae \uccode\AE\AE \lccode\ae\ae
- |\uccode\oe\OE \lccode\OE\oe \uccode\OE\OE \lccode\oe\oe
-\smallbreak
- |\uccode\i`I \uccode\j`J \lccode\i\i \lccode\j\j
- |\uccode\csuperior`C
-\endcode
-
-
-\subsec{A macro for changing character codes}
-
- The |\changecodes| command is used to change those segments of
- character tables that are contiguous and map onto a contiguous
- segment in the range. It is invoked as
-$$
- \hbox{\it |\changecodes| command x y n}
-$$
- (where $\it command$ is a token like |\uccode| or |\mathcode|
- and $x$, $y$, and $n$ are \<number>s), and does the equivalent
- of
-$$
- {\it command}\;i\mathrel{\hbox{\tt=}}
- j\qquad \hbox{for all $\cases{x \le i < x + n\cr
- y \le j < y + n\cr}$}
-$$
-
-\code
- |\def\changecodes#1#2#3#4{%
- | \counta#2\relax \countb#3\relax \countc#4\relax
- | \loop
- | \ifnum\countc>0
- | #1\counta\countb
- | \advance\counta 1
- | \advance\countb 1
- | \advance\countc-1
- | \repeat
- |}
-\endcode
-
- We can use this immediately to arrange that lowercasing medium caps
- makes lower case, and uppercasing small caps makes full caps:
-\code
- |\changecodes\uccode{"E1}{`A}{26}
- |\changecodes\uccode{"C1}{"C1}{26}
- |\changecodes\lccode{"E1}{"E1}{26}
- |\changecodes\lccode{"C1}{`a}{26}
-\endcode
-
- We also make old-style numerals behave as lower case for ranging
- numerals, and also arrange that maths mode uses ranging figures.
-\code
- |\changecodes\lccode{"B0}{`0}{10}
- |\changecodes\uccode{`0}{"B0}{10}
-\endcode
-
- In maths mode (1)~we use text italic for letters, since CM MAth
- Italic will not match the body text and (2)~we use ranging
- figures.
-\code
- |\changecodes\mathcode{`a}{"7461}{26}
- |\changecodes\mathcode{`A}{"7441}{26}
- |\changecodes\mathcode{`0}{"70B0}{10}
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Changing the alphabet for special letters got with commands}
-
- When applying |\uppercase| or |\lowercase| to a token list,
- macros will be unaffected (|\ae| will still generate `ae'). To
- get around this we define macros that redefine these control
- sequences. They each take as parameters hex digits used to make
- character codes.
-\code
- |\def\capspecials#1#2{%
- | \chardef\TH"#10 \chardef\A "#11 \chardef\NG"#12
- | \chardef\L "#13 \chardef\DH"#14 \chardef\E "#15
- | \chardef\O "#2C \chardef\AE"#2E \chardef\OE"#2F
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\lcspecials#1#2#3{%
- | \chardef\th"#10 \chardef\a "#11 \chardef\ng"#12
- | \chardef\l "#13 \chardef\dh"#14 \chardef\e "#15
- | \chardef\o "#2C \chardef\ae"#2E \chardef\oe"#2F
- | \def\ss{\char"#23 \char"#23 }\chardef\i"#39 \chardef\j"#3A
- |}
-\endcode
-\subsec{Pulling it all together}
- Now we can define the user macros that do the work. These take
- one argument, a piece of text to transliterate: |\sc{OX1~3QD}|
- produces a small-capital `${\rm\scriptstyle OX}{\mit 1\
- 3}{\rm\scriptstyle QD}$';
- |\csc{ABCdef}| produces caps and small caps
- `ABC{\the\scriptfont0 DEF}'.
-\code
- |\def\sc#1{{%
- | \changecodes\lccode{`A}{"E1}{26}\capspecials9F\lowercase{#1}%
- |}}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\mc#1{{%
- | \changecodes\lccode{`A}{"C1}{26}\capspecials8D\lowercase{#1}%
- |}}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\csc#1{{%
- | \changecodes\uccode{`a}{"E1}{26}\lcspecials9FE\uppercase{#1}%
- |}}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\allcaps#1{{%
- | \lcspecials054\uppercase{#1}%
- |}}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\alllc#1{{%
- | \capspecials17\lowercase{#1}%
- |}}
-\endcode
-%}}} switching alphabets
-\endcodefile
-\enddocument
-\bye
-%}}} maamac
-
-
-% Local variables:
-% fold-folded-p: t
-% fill-prefix: "\t"
-% End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index c3c2835eb10..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,193 +0,0 @@
-% maamac.tex 1.5 1995/04/06 -- Malvern A Macros
-
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex",
-%%% version = "1.5",
-%%% date = "1995/04/06",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "Macros for using the Malvern-A font coding
-%%% scheme in plain TeX documents.
-%%% This file was generated by running
-%%% plain TeX on maamac.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute maamac.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "",
-%%% }
-
-\message{1.5 <pdc 1995/04/06>}
-
-\dimendef\dimena0 \dimendef\dimenb2
-\toksdef\toksa0
-\countdef\counta255
-\ifx\countb\UNDEFINED \csname newcount\endcsname\countb \fi
-\ifx\countc\UNDEFINED \csname newcount\endcsname\countc \fi
-\def\code#1{%
- \ifcat#1a%
- `#1
- \else\ifcat#1+%
- `#1
- \else\ifx\char#1
- \else
- #1%
- \fi\fi\fi
-}
-\let\then=\iffalse
-\def\ifcap#1\then{\expandafter\ifcapnum\code{#1}\then}
-\def\ifcapnum#1\then{\ifnum\lccode#1=#1}
-\def\iflower#1\then{\expandafter\iflowernum\code{#1}\then}
-\def\iflowernum#1\then{\ifnum\uccode#1=#1}
-\def\fontslant#1{\expandafter\stripPT\the\fontdimen1#1}
-\begingroup \uccode`2=`p \uccode`3=`t \uppercase{\toksa{\endgroup
- \def\\#123{#1}
-}} \the\toksa
-\let\stripPT=\\
-\def\putxy#1#2#3{\leavevmode\rlap{\hskip#1\raise#2\hbox{#3}}}
-\def\putmarkxy#1#2#3#4{{%
- \setbox0=\hbox{#4}#2\relax
- \dimenb#1\wd0 \advance\dimenb\fontslant\font\dimena
- \leavevmode
- \putxy{\dimenb}{\dimena}{\hbox to 0pt{\hss\char#3\hss}}%
- \box0
-}}
-\def\putmarky{\putmarkxy{0.5}}
-\def\typeImark#1#2{{%
- \setbox2=\hbox{#2}%
- \ifdim \ht2=1ex
- \accent#1\relax#2%
- \else
- \counta\code{#2}%
- \ifnum\counta>64 \ifnum\counta<96
- \advance\counta 128
- \fi \fi
- \putmarky{\dimena0.5\ht0 \advance\dimena-0.5ex }
- {#1}{\char\counta}%
- \fi
-}}
-\chardef\dotglyph22 \def\.{\typeImark\dotglyph}
-\chardef\twodotsglyph23 \def\"{\typeImark\twodotsglyph}
-\chardef\macronglyph150 \def\={\typeImark\macronglyph}
-\chardef\longmacronglyph151
- \def\longmacronmark{\typeImark\longmacronglyph}
-\def\typeIImark#1#2{{%
- \counta#1\relax \countb\code{#2}%
- \ifcap{#2}\then
- \ifnum \counta<128 \advance\counta 128 \fi
- \ifnum \countb<128 \advance\countb 128 \fi
- \fi
- \accent\counta \char\countb
-}}
-\chardef\acuteglyph8 \def\'{\typeIImark\acuteglyph}
-\chardef\graveglyph9 \def\`{\typeIImark\graveglyph}
-\chardef\circumglyph10 \def\^{\typeIImark\circumglyph}
-\chardef\tildeglyph11 \def\~{\typeIImark\tildeglyph}
-\chardef\ringglyph12 \def\ringmark{\typeIImark\ringglyph}
-\chardef\caronglyph13 \def\v{\typeIImark\caronglyph}
-\chardef\breveglyph14 \def\u{\typeIImark\breveglyph}
-\chardef\hungarglyph15 \def\H{\typeIImark\hungarglyph}
-\def\cedillalike#1#2#3{{%
- \setbox0=\hbox{#3}%
- \ifdim\ht0>1ex
- \ooalign{\hidewidth\char#2\relax\hidewidth\crcr\unhbox0 }%
- \else
- \accent#1 #3%
- \fi
-}}
-\chardef\cedillaglyph6 \chardef\Cedillaglyph134
-\def\c{\cedillalike\cedillaglyph\Cedillaglyph}
-\chardef\ogonekglyph7 \chardef\Ogonekglyph135
-\def\k{\cedillalike\ogonekglyph\Ogonekglyph}
-\chardef\TH"00 \chardef\th"10 \chardef\DH"04 \chardef\dh"14
-\chardef\A "01 \chardef\a "11 \chardef\E "05 \chardef\e "15
-\chardef\NG"02 \chardef\ng"12 \chardef\L "03 \chardef\l "13
-\chardef\AE"5E \chardef\ae"7E \chardef\OE"5F \chardef\oe"7F
-\chardef\O "5C \chardef\o "7C
-\chardef\vd"9C \chardef\vt"9D \chardef\h "9E \chardef\vl"9F
-\chardef\ss"18 \chardef\i "19 \chardef\j "1A
-\def\aa{\ringmark a} \def\AA{\ringmark A}
-\chardef\orda"98 \chardef\ordo"99 \def\No{N\ordo} \def\no{n\ordo}
-\chardef\csuperior"98 \def\Mc{M\csuperior}
-\chardef\trademark "22
-\chardef\copyright "FB \chardef\registered"FD
-\chardef\careof "9A \chardef\Box "A0
-\chardef\cents "A2 \chardef\pounds "A3
-\chardef\currency "A4 \chardef\permille "A5
-\chardef\yen "A8 \chardef\florin "A9
-\chardef\dag "AA \chardef\ddag "AB
-\chardef\gbdecimal "AE \chardef\minus "AF
-\chardef\S "BA \chardef\P "BB
-\chardef\degrees "C0
-\chardef\lguillemet"BC \chardef\rguillemet"BE
-\mathcode`\,"602C \mathcode`\-"20AF
-\mathcode`\."002E \mathcode`\/"002F
-\mathchardef\bullet "2020 \mathchardef\times "20A6
-\mathchardef\backslash"005B \mathchardef\setminus "205B
-\mathchardef\cdot "20AE \mathchardef\cdotp "60AE
-\def\langle{\delimiter"40DB30A } \delcode`\<"0DB30A
-\def\rangle{\delimiter"50DD30B } \delcode`\>"0DD30B
-\def\lbrace{\delimiter"407B308 } \let\{\lbrace \mathcode`\{"407B
-\def\rbrace{\delimiter"507D309 } \let\}\rbrace \mathcode`\}"407D
-\uccode\th\TH \lccode\TH\th \uccode\TH\TH \lccode\th\th
-\uccode\a \A \lccode\A \a \uccode\A \A \lccode\a \a
-\uccode\ng\NG \lccode\NG\ng \uccode\NG\NG \lccode\ng\ng
-\uccode\l \L \lccode\L \l \uccode\L \L \lccode\l \l
-\uccode\dh\DH \lccode\DH\dh \uccode\DH\DH \lccode\dh\dh
-\uccode\e \E \lccode\E \e \uccode\E \E \lccode\e \e
-\uccode\o \O \lccode\O \o \uccode\O \O \lccode\o \o
-\uccode\ae\AE \lccode\AE\ae \uccode\AE\AE \lccode\ae\ae
-\uccode\oe\OE \lccode\OE\oe \uccode\OE\OE \lccode\oe\oe
-\uccode\i`I \uccode\j`J \lccode\i\i \lccode\j\j
-\uccode\csuperior`C
-\def\changecodes#1#2#3#4{%
- \counta#2\relax \countb#3\relax \countc#4\relax
- \loop
- \ifnum\countc>0
- #1\counta\countb
- \advance\counta 1
- \advance\countb 1
- \advance\countc-1
- \repeat
-}
-\changecodes\uccode{"E1}{`A}{26}
-\changecodes\uccode{"C1}{"C1}{26}
-\changecodes\lccode{"E1}{"E1}{26}
-\changecodes\lccode{"C1}{`a}{26}
-\changecodes\lccode{"B0}{`0}{10}
-\changecodes\uccode{`0}{"B0}{10}
-\changecodes\mathcode{`a}{"7461}{26}
-\changecodes\mathcode{`A}{"7441}{26}
-\changecodes\mathcode{`0}{"70B0}{10}
-\def\capspecials#1#2{%
- \chardef\TH"#10 \chardef\A "#11 \chardef\NG"#12
- \chardef\L "#13 \chardef\DH"#14 \chardef\E "#15
- \chardef\O "#2C \chardef\AE"#2E \chardef\OE"#2F
-}
-\def\lcspecials#1#2#3{%
- \chardef\th"#10 \chardef\a "#11 \chardef\ng"#12
- \chardef\l "#13 \chardef\dh"#14 \chardef\e "#15
- \chardef\o "#2C \chardef\ae"#2E \chardef\oe"#2F
- \def\ss{\char"#23 \char"#23 }\chardef\i"#39 \chardef\j"#3A
-}
-\def\sc#1{{%
- \changecodes\lccode{`A}{"E1}{26}\capspecials9F\lowercase{#1}%
-}}
-\def\mc#1{{%
- \changecodes\lccode{`A}{"C1}{26}\capspecials8D\lowercase{#1}%
-}}
-\def\csc#1{{%
- \changecodes\uccode{`a}{"E1}{26}\lcspecials9FE\uppercase{#1}%
-}}
-\def\allcaps#1{{%
- \lcspecials054\uppercase{#1}%
-}}
-\def\alllc#1{{%
- \capspecials17\lowercase{#1}%
-}}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 71f2dd83cfe..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,231 +0,0 @@
-% magrmac.dtx -- documentation and source for magrmac.tex -*-tex-*-
-
-%%%@TeX-document-file {
-%%% title = "MAGRMAC.TEX -- Malvern Greek Macros",
-%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.dtx",
-%%% version = "$Revision: 1.3 $",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% date = "$Date: 1995/03/29 16:32:24 $",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for
-%%% the TeX definitions file magrmac.tex.
-%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
-%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute
-%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
-%%% General Public License as published by the Free
-%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
-%%% or (at your option) any later version.",
-%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
-%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
-%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
-%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
-%%% License for more details.",
-%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
-%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write
-%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
-%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
-%%%}
-
-%{{{ magrmac.dtx
-%{{{ preamble
-
-\relax
-\input pdccode
-
-\document
-\rcs$Id: magrmac.dtx,v 1.3 1995/03/29 16:32:24 pdc Exp $\endrcs
-
-\codefile{magrmac.tex}
-
-%}}} preamble
-%{{{ introduction
-\author{P. Dmaian Cugley}
-\title{MAGRMAC---Malvern Greek Macros}
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
- This document describes |magrmac.tex|, a small file of macros
- for setting Greek with Malvern~G fonts. `Malvern~G' is the name
- of an encoding for typesetting Greek texts. Malvern
- release~$1{\cdot}2$ has a collection of fonts ({\tt
- ma$XX$g$YY$}) which use this encoding. The Levy and Dryllerakis
- fonts should work to an extent.
-
- The conventions for Malvern Greek text files are intended to be
- similar to those for K.~J.\ Dryllerakis's Greek\TeX\ (the
- `|kd|-' fonts), and will be most useful on computers where the
- operating system uses latin letters (as opposed to those which
- can display Greek letters on the screen).
-
- There is a brief guide for |magrmac.tex| called |magrman.tex|.
-\notepar
- These macros are not necessarily in final form and are not
- intended to be supported. Use them at your own risk.
-\endnotepar
-
- The document you are reading is a plain \TeX\ file called
- |magrmac.dtx|. This `documented \TeX\ macros'\footnote*{The
- suffix |dtx| is the same as files used to simlar effect in the
- \LaTeX~2e distribution.} file produces the file `|magrmac.tex|'
- in the current directory, in addition to the usual |dvi| file.
- The code lines in the printed documentation are identical to
- those in the macros file.
-
-%}}} introduction
-%{{{ file identification
-\section{File identification}
-
- Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the
- file, for the benefit of people wondering what the file is for.
-
-\code
- \|\% magrmac.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- Malvern Greek Macros
- |%%%@TeX-definition-file {
- |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex",
- \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
- \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
- |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
- |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
- |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
- |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
- |%%% codetable = "USASCII",
- |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, Malvern, Greek, macros",
- |%%% supported = "Maybe",
- |%%% abstract = "Macros for using Malvern Greek fonts.
- |%%% This file was generated by running
- |%%% plain TeX on magrmac.dtx",
- |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
- |%%% Distribute magrmac.dtx only as part of the
- |%%% package it came in.",
- |%%% dependencies = "",
- |%%%}
- |
- \|\\message\{\fileversion~\filedate\}
- |
-\endcode
-%}}} file identification
-%{{{ greek mode
-\section{Greek Mode}
-
- The Greek Mode is started with |\begingreek| for compatibility
- with the precedent of Greek\TeX\ and Levy's original Greek
- macros.\footnote*{The conventions of PDCFMT2 would suggest
- |\greek|\dots|\endgreek| but (besides being incompatible with
- existing Greek macros) it is probable that the hyphenation table
- code (|\language| code) for Greek would be called |\greek|,
- based on the names I~have seen used.}
-
- The token register |\everygreek| is expanded each time we enter
- Greek mode. At a minimum it should contain a command to select
- an appropriate Greek font.
-\code
- |\newtoks\everygreek
- |\chardef\other=12
-\smallbreak
- |\def\begingreek{%
- | \begingroup
- | \catcode`\~\other \catcode`\|\other \catcode`\"\other
- | \the\everygreek
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\let\endgreek=\endgroup
-\endcode
-%}}} greek mode
-\section{Customization}
-%{{{ lunate sigma, curly phi
-
-\subsec{Lunate sigma}
-
- The macro |\grlunatesigma| belongs in |\everygreek|. It makes
- |s| an active char expanding to |c|. A certain amount of
- jiggery-pokery is required because making |s| active makes it
- impossible to use the name |\grlunatesigma|!
-
-\code
- |\toksdef\toksa=0
-\smallbreak
- |\begingroup \let\\=\toksa \catcode`\s=13 \catcode`\S=13 \\={\endgroup
- | \def\tmp{%
- | \catcode`\s\active \chardef s`c
- | \catcode`\S\active \chardef S`C
- | }
- |}\the\\
- |\let\grlunatesigma=\tmp
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Variant phi}
-
- In the end I~make the two-stroke phi $\phi$ the default one,
- with $\varphi$ as the `variant', for compatibility with plain
- \TeX.
-\code
- |\chardef\ninetytwo=92
-\smallbreak
- |\begingroup \uccode`\~=`f \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
- | \def\grvarphi{%
- | \catcode`\f\active \chardef~\ninetytwo
- | }
- |}} \the\toksa
-\endcode
-%}}} lunate sigma
-%{{{ accent
-
-\subsec{One-accent Greek}
-
- The |\monotonik| macro makes all the accent characters generate
- the modern symmetrical accent, while the breathings and iota
- subscript do nothing.
-\code
- |\begingroup \catcode`\<=\active \catcode`\>=\active
- | \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active \toksa={\endgroup
- | \def\monotoniko{%
- | \catcode\lq\'\active \chardef'3
- | \catcode\lq\`\active \chardef`3
- | \catcode\lq\~\active \chardef~3
- | \catcode\lq\<\active \let<\relax
- | \catcode\lq\>\active \let>\relax
- | \catcode\lq\|\active \let|\relax
- | }
- |}\the\toksa
-\smallbreak
- |\def\plutoniko{%
- | \catcode`\'\other \catcode`\`\other \catcode`\~\other
- | \catcode`\<\other \catcode`\>\other \catcode`\|\other
- |}
-\endcode
-%}}} accent
-%{{{ define delims
-
-\subsec{Choose shorthand delimiters for Greek Mode}
-
- Define |#1| to be a `greek shift' in the way |$| is a maths
- shift. Like |$|, |#1| will stand for either |\begingreek| or
- |\endgreek| as required. |#1| must be a one-character control
- sequence (as might be used after |`|).
-\code
- |\def\grdelimiter#1{
- | \begingroup \uccode`~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
- | \def~{\begingreek \let~\endgreek}
- | }} \the\toksa
- |}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} define delims
-\endcodefile
-\enddocument
-\bye
-%}}} macros for greek
-
-% Local variables:
-% fold-folded-p: t
-% tex-macros-p: t
-% End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index eebec3bdfac..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-% magrmac.tex 1.3 1995/03/29 -- Malvern Greek Macros
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex",
-%%% version = "1.3",
-%%% date = "1995/03/29",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, Malvern, Greek, macros",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "Macros for using Malvern Greek fonts.
-%%% This file was generated by running
-%%% plain TeX on magrmac.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute magrmac.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "",
-%%%}
-
-\message{1.3 1995/03/29}
-
-\newtoks\everygreek
-\chardef\other=12
-\def\begingreek{%
- \begingroup
- \catcode`\~\other \catcode`\|\other \catcode`\"\other
- \the\everygreek
-}
-\let\endgreek=\endgroup
-\toksdef\toksa=0
-\begingroup \let\\=\toksa \catcode`\s=13 \catcode`\S=13 \\={\endgroup
- \def\tmp{%
- \catcode`\s\active \chardef s`c
- \catcode`\S\active \chardef S`C
- }
-}\the\\
-\let\grlunatesigma=\tmp
-\chardef\ninetytwo=92
-\begingroup \uccode`\~=`f \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
- \def\grvarphi{%
- \catcode`\f\active \chardef~\ninetytwo
- }
-}} \the\toksa
-\begingroup \catcode`\<=\active \catcode`\>=\active
- \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active \toksa={\endgroup
- \def\monotoniko{%
- \catcode\lq\'\active \chardef'3
- \catcode\lq\`\active \chardef`3
- \catcode\lq\~\active \chardef~3
- \catcode\lq\<\active \let<\relax
- \catcode\lq\>\active \let>\relax
- \catcode\lq\|\active \let|\relax
- }
-}\the\toksa
-\def\plutoniko{%
- \catcode`\'\other \catcode`\`\other \catcode`\~\other
- \catcode`\<\other \catcode`\>\other \catcode`\|\other
-}
-\def\grdelimiter#1{
- \begingroup \uccode`~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
- \def~{\begingreek \let~\endgreek}
- }} \the\toksa
-}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrman.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrman.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 5e746d36fa8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrman.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,604 +0,0 @@
-% magman.tex -- info about Malvern Greek.
-%{{{ Malvern Greek manual
-%{{{ preamble
-
-\errorcontextlines=1000
-\input pdccmlft
-\input magrmac
-
-\font\notegr=ma55g9
-\font\bodygr=ma55g11
-\font\biggr=ma55g24 % used in sample
-\font\gri=ma56g11 % used in sample
-
-\toksa=\expandafter{\STYbodyT}
-\edef\STYbodyT{\the\toksa\noexpand\f{gr}{ma55g}}
-
-\bodyfonts
-
-\everygreek{\gr \baselineskip=14pt}
-
-\grdelimiter\* % * is already an active char
-+\defverbatim\_+ % | is often used in examples
-
-\majorheadline{Typesetting Greek using Malvern fonts}
-
-%{{{ font tables
-
-%% Code to typeset a font table -- lifted from my testfont.tex
-
-\newcount\tableN
-\newcount\hexcount
-\def\hexdigit#1{\ifcase#1\relax 0\or 1\or 2\or 3\or 4\or 5\or 6\or 7\or
- 8\or 9\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\fi}
-
-\def\ntablecr
-{%
- \cr
- \noalign{\nointerlineskip}
- \multispan2\hfill &\multispan{33}\hrulefill
-}
-\def\ntable
-{
- \medskip
- \begingroup \openup1\jot
- \def\\{\char\tableN \global\advance\tableN 1}
- \def\0##1{&\omit&\sevenrm##1}
- \halign to \hsize
- {%
- \chartstrut\hss##\tabskip=0pt plus 10pt &
- &\hss##\hss&##\vrule\cr
- \lower 6.5pt\null
- &\00\01\02\03\04\05\06\07\08\09\0A\0B\0C\0D\0E\0F
- \ntablecr
- \global\tableN=0
- \ntablelines
- \crcr
- }
- \medbreak
- \endgroup
-}
-
-\def\ntablelines
-{%
- \ifnum\tableN<256
- \let\next\ntablecontinuation
- \else
- \let\next\relax
- \fi
- \next
-}
-
-\newcount\ntabtmp
-
-\def\ntablecontinuation
-{%
- % Find out if none of this row are defined by making a horizontal
- % list of all of them preceeded by a penalty of 1; if any of them
- % are defined then \lastpenalty will be something other than 1:
- \setbox0=\hbox{\penalty1
- \def~{\char\tableN \advance\tableN 1}%
- ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~\global\ntabtmp=\lastpenalty}%
- % Now set the row in the table iff ntabtmp # 1:
- \ifnum\ntabtmp=1
- \global\advance\tableN 16 \let\next=\ntablelines
- \else
- \let\next=\ntablecontinuationcontinuation
- \fi
- \next
-}
-
-\def\ntablecontinuationcontinuation
-{%
- \cr
- \noalign{\nointerlineskip \penalty5000 }
- & \hexcount=\tableN \divide\hexcount16 \sevenrm\hexdigit\hexcount
- &&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&
- \ntablecr
- \ntablelines
-}
-
-\def\chartstrut{\lower 0.25\baselineskip \vbox to \baselineskip{}}
-
-%}}} font tables
-%{{{ two-column quotations
-
-\def\twocolgr{
- \smallskip
- \beginthe{twocolgr}
- \setbox0=\vbox\bgroup
- \hsize=\bodywd \advance\hsize-\colsep \divide\hsize by 2
- \begingreek \strut \ignorespaces
-}
-\def\endtwocolgr{%
- \par\endgreek \egroup
- \moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{
- \hrule\smallskip
- \hbox to \bodywd{\rigidbalance{0}{2}{\ht\strutbox}{\hfil}}
- \smallskip\hrule
- }
- \smallbreak
- \endthe{twocolgr}
-}
-%}}} two-column quotations
-%}}} preamble
-%{{{ bibliography
-
-\def\TB{{\it TUGboat}}
-
-\counta=0
-\newtoks\bibliography
-\newcount\bibcount
-
-\def\FAQnote
-{%
- \par {\bf Note on FAQs}\quad An FAQ is an electronic document, posted
- regularly to a USENET newsgroup, usually in the form of a list of
- answers to frequently asked questions. Many FAQs are available on
- the archive site |pit-manager.mit.edu| (alias |rtfm.mit.edu|)
- [18.172.1.27] in the directory |pub/usenet/news.answers|. The
- reference gives the name of the compiler, the title, the
- last-modified date (in lieu of an edition or version number) and
- name under which the FAQ is archived appears in parentheses.
- \par
-}
-
-\def\bibdef#1#2%
-{
- \expcs\edef{cite#1}%
- {%
- \noexpand\docite\noexpcs{cite#1}\noexpcs{refer#1}%
- }
- \toks0={#2}
- \expcs\edef{refer#1}{\noexpand\bibitem{\expcs\noexpand{cite#1}}
- \the\toks0}
-}
-\def\docite#1#2%
-{%
- \global\advance\bibcount1
- \global\bibliography=\expandafter
- {\the\bibliography #2}%
- \global\edef#1%
- {[\the\bibcount]}#1%
-}
-
-\bibdef{Allen}
-{
- W. Sidney Allen, {\it Vox Graeca: A Guide to Pronunciation of Classical
- Greek}, 3rd Ed.\ (Cambridge University Press, 1987),
- pp.\thinspace177--179.
-}
-
-\bibdef{KD}
-{
- K.~J. Dryllerakis (|kd@doc.ic.ac.uk|), {\it Typesetting Greek Texts with
- Greek\TeX}, Greek\TeX~3.1 (also known as KDGreek) (CTAN
- |fonts/greek/kd|).
-}
-
-\bibdef{FAQ}
-{
- Nikolaos Fotis (ed.), {\it soc.culture.greek} FAQ --
- Linguistics ({\tt greek-\penalty\exhyphenpenalty faq\slash
- linguistics}, 1993/03/06).
-}
-
-\bibdef{Yannis}
-{
- Yannis Haralambous and Klaus Thull, Typesetting Modern Greek with 128
- Character Codes, \TB\/ 10 (1989), pp.\thinspace354--359 (CTAN
- |fonts/greek/yannis|).
-}
-
-\bibdef{Harts}
-{
- Horace Hart, {\it Hart's Rules for Compositors and Readers at the
- University Press, Oxford}, 39th Edition, revised (Oxford
- University Press, 1989), pp.\thinspace111--116.
-}
-
-\bibdef{Levy}
-{
- Silvio Levy, Using Greek Fonts with \TeX, \TB\/ 9 (1988),
- pp.\thinspace20--24 (CTAN |fonts/greek/levy|).
-}
-
-\bibdef{COD}
-{
- {\it The Concise Oxford Dictionary of Current English}, 8th Ed.
- (Oxford University Press, 1990), p.\thinspace1453.
-}
-
-\def\bibitem#1%
-{%
- \smallskip
- \indent \llap{#1\hskip1pc}\ignorespaces
-}
-
-
-%}}} bibliography
-
-\twosidedtrue
-
-\noheadlinetrue
-\majorheadline{Typesetting Greek using Malvern fonts}
-\leftline{\headingfonts \the\majorheadline}
-\bigskip
-\leftline{P. Damian Cugley}
-\leftline{Oxford University Computing Laboratory}
-\leftline{(|Damian.Cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk|)}
-\leftline{April 1993}
-\bigskip
-
-\noindent
- Malvern is a sanserif font family, implemented in \MF. This
- document describes Malvern encoding~G (the Greek alphabet).
-
-\section{Using Malvern G}
-
- Because most latin-alphabet languages require additional composite
- letter glyphs to be properly typeset by \TeX, most Malvern fonts
- will be used as the raw material for composite fonts. In contrast,
- the Malvern Greek font can be used directly to typeset Greek, both
- with the old accent-and-breathing systems and the newer (post-1974)
- one-accent system. It follows the conventions of Silvio Levy's
- original |gr| family \citeLevy\ and K.~J. Dryllerakis's Greek\TeX\
- (|kd| fonts) \citeKD. It is almost compatible with the reduced
- Greek fonts (|rgr| and |mrgr| families) described by Yannis
- Haralambous and Karl Thull \citeYannis.
-
-%{{{ typesetting
-
-\section{Macro file}
-
- The file |magrmac.tex| has some macros for setting texts in plain
- \TeX. A future production release may instead work as an option or
- extension of Greek\TeX, with the objective of making it possible to
- switch an existing document to Malvern without much editing.
-
- Greek text is set within a \dfn{Greek mode}, delimited by macros
- |\begingreek| and |\endgreek|. Each time Greek mode is entered, the
- contents of the token register |\everygreek| is scanned first.
- Since |magrmac| does {\it not} load a particular font by default, a
- manuscript using |magrmac| will want to include an assignment like
-\display
- |\everygreek={\greekfont}|\cr
- |\catcode`\*=\active \grdelimiter\*|
-\enddisplay
- where |\greekfont| has been bound to some Greek font or another such
- as |ma55g12|. The macro |\grdelimiter| takes one parameter, an
- active character (represented by a one-character control sequence),
- and makes that character into a self-matching delimiter for Greek
- mode (like |$|--|$| works for mathematics mode). Thus, `|*This is
- Greek*|' produces `*This is Greek*'.
-
-\section{The alphabet}
-
- The letters are transliterated as
- follows:
-\table \hfil#\hfil&&\enspace\hfil#\hfil\cr
- \gr a&\gr b&\gr g&\gr d&\gr e&\gr z&\gr h&\gr j&\gr i&\gr k&\gr
- l&\gr m&\gr n&\gr x&\gr o&\gr p&\gr r&\gr ss&\gr c&\gr t&\gr
- u&\gr f&\gr v& \gr q&\gr y&\gr w\cr
- \tt a&\tt b&\tt g&\tt d&\tt e&\tt z&\tt h&\tt j&\tt i&\tt k&\tt
- l&\tt m&\tt n&\tt x&\tt o&\tt p&\tt r&\tt s&\tt c&\tt t&\tt u&\tt
- f&\tt v& \tt q&\tt y&\tt w\cr
-\noalign{\smallskip}%
- \gr A&\gr B&\gr G&\gr D&\gr E&\gr Z&\gr H&\gr J&\gr I&\gr K&\gr
- L&\gr M&\gr N&\gr X&\gr O&\gr P&\gr R&\gr S&\gr C&\gr T&\gr
- U&\gr F&\gr V& \gr Q&\gr Y&\gr W\cr
- \tt A&\tt B&\tt G&\tt D&\tt E&\tt Z&\tt H&\tt J&\tt I&\tt K&\tt
- L&\tt M&\tt N&\tt X&\tt O&\tt P&\tt R&\tt S&\tt C&\tt T&\tt U&\tt
- F&\tt V& \tt Q&\tt Y&\tt W\cr
-\endtable
- The letter *C c* is \dfn{lunate sigma} (see below). The letter *V v*
- is \dfn{digamma} (wau). I~put it next to *f* because I~don't know
- where it belongs in the alphabet.
-
- A lower case sigma `*s@*' at the end of a word (or followed by
- punctuation) is automatically changed to the final form `*s*'
- through \TeX's ligature mechanism.\note{Occasionally \TeX's notion
- of word boundaries causes the wrong glyph to appear. There are two
- special invisible glyphs that can be used to control this in obscure
- circumstances. The so-called \dfn{compound word mark} (or cwm) acts
- as a word-boundary in the middle of a word. It has code~32, so
- `|as^^`a|' produces `*as^^`a*', for example. The \dfn{null glyph}
- is invisible, but, because it is not a boundary character, it can be
- used to prevent a ligature with a following word boundary. It has
- code 64, so `|as@|' produces `*as@*'.}
-
-\section{Composite letters}
-
- The marks that go above the letters are obtained with the
- following characters, which go before the letter:
-\table \gr#\hfil&\quad#\hfil&\quad #\hfil& \quad *#*\hfil\cr
-\noalign{\hrule height 1pt \vskip1\jot}%
- \omit Mark\hfil&\omit\quad Char\hfil&
- Name&\omit\quad Name in \citeYannis\hfil\cr
-\noalign{\vskip\jot \hrule \vskip\jot}
- <@& |<|& asper (rough, = h)& dase'ia\cr
- >@& |>|& lenis (smooth)& yil'h\cr
- "@& |"| (double quote)&
- diaeresis& dialutik'a\cr
- '@& |'| (quote)&
- acute accent& >oxe'ia\cr
- `@& |`|& grave accent& bare'ia\cr
- \char126 @& |~|& circumflex& perispwm'enh\cr
-\noalign{\vskip1\jot \hrule height 1pt\smallskip}%
-\endtable
- A breathing or diaeresis can be combined with an accent, thus
- `|<~a|' for *<~a*, `|>'e|' for *>'e*.
-
-
- The vowels *a*, *h* and *w* may have an iota beneath them, called
- `subscript': *a|*, *h|*, *w|*. These are produced with a vertical
- bar `_|_' after the letter in Greek mode: `_a|_' makes
- *a|*, `_<a|_' makes `*<a|*', and so on.
-
-
- As an example: `*>en >arq~h| >~hn <o l'ogos*' is generated with `_>en
- >arq~h| >~hn <o l'ogos_'.
-
-% In old-style Greek, all vowels beginning a word require a breathing
-% -- but *u* may only have an asper (rough). In diphthongs (*ai*,
-% *ei*, *oi*, *ui*, *au*, *eu*, *hu*, *ou*, *wu*), breathings and
-% accents stand over the second letter: *a<i*, *o>u*. Double *rr*
-% used to be written *>r<r*.
-
-%\section{Apostrophe (sign of elision)}
-
-% The lenis is also used like an apostrophe, to mark the elision of
-% vowels at the end of a word when the next word starts with a vowel.
-% The Malvern-G fonts, like the Levy-derived fonts, also has a
-% separate apostrophe glyph, which can be set with `|''|' (two quote
-% characters) or `|'|' (one quote) at the end of a word. Thus you
-% have a choice of `|d>|' or `|d'|' (*d>* or *d'*).
-
-
-\section{Punctuation}
-
- Here's a table of correspondences for punctuation:
-\table \hfil#\hfil&&\enspace\hfil#\hfil\cr
- *.*&*,*&*;*&*:*&*!*&*?*&*''*&*((*&*))*\cr
- |.|&|,|&|;|&|:|&|!|&|?|&|''|&|((|&|))|\cr
-\endtable
- The apostrophe is also generated by a single single-quote at the end
- of a word: `*d'*' can be generated by `|d'|'. There are also
- digits, parentheses, brackets, hyphen, dashes, slash, per cent sign,
- asterisk, plus and equals signs.
-
-\section{One-accent Greek}
-
- The easiest way to write modern Greek is simply to use |'| for the
- accent and otherwise to use |\begingreek|--|\endgreek| as before:
- `*en arq'h hn o l'ogos*' is generated with `|en arq'h hn o l'ogos|'.
-
- Malvern also has glyphs for a symmetrical accent (*\char3*) and
- composite letters (such as *\char3 a*, *"\char3u*). The macro
- |\monotoniko|\note{This macro is so named for compatibility with the
- |rgr|/|mrgr| macros \citeYannis. It might usefully go in
- |\everygreek|.} in Greek mode makes |'| an active character,
- expanding to the symmetrical accent. Then `|En'w|' produces
- `*En\char3w*'. In fact, the other accent characters |`| and |~| are
- also made to substitute `*\char3*', and |<|, |>| and _|_ expand to
- the null glyph, so that a text with all the breathings and accents
- and be hacked into almost-correct one-accent Greek.\note{Again, for
- compatibility with the |rgr|/|mrgr| macros. Because monosyllables
- should not have accents at all in one-accent Greek, a complete
- conversion from old-style to new-style requires changes to the
- manuscript anyway, so the usefulness of this feature is debatable!}
- For example, `_>En~w|_' becomes `*\monotoniko >En~w|*'.
-
-\section{Variant glyphs}
-
- Sigma has a variant called lunate sigma, written *Cc*. These
- letters can be obtained directly (produced by the character `|c|' in
- the manuscript). So that a given text can be switched between the
- two styles, there is also a macro |\grlunatesigma|, which redefines
- `|s|' is as active character equivalent to `|c|'. Obviously this is
- only useful when Greek mode is only used for plain texts, since it
- prevents `|s|' from being used in control sequence names.
-
- Similarly, there are two ways to write lower case phi: *f* and
- *\char92 * (`|f|' and glyph~92). There is no difference in meaning
- between *f* and *\char92 *; the choice of one or the other is only
- made on aesthetic grounds. The macro |\grvarphi| redefines `|f|' as
- an active character equivalent to `*\char92 *', in effect replacing
- *f* with *\char92 *.
-
- Normally these macros, if used, will go in |\everygreek|.
-
-%}}} typesetting
-\iffalse
-%{{{ background
-\section{Background}
-
- This section is optional reading.
-
-\subsection{Development of the Levy-derived font families}
-
- Silvio Levy's |gr| fonts \citeLevy\ used the \TeX~2 ligature system
- to make *s* become *s@* when followed by a letter, and had glyphs
- for almost all the composite letters.
-
- Yannis Haralambous and Klaus Thull created a set of reduced
- (128-glyph) fonts, for \TeX\ systems still unable to manage
- 256-glyph fonts \citeYannis. These fonts (the |rgr| and |mrgr|
- families) still used Levy's character programs. Because they could
- not include glyphs for all the composite letters, many composite
- letters had to be obtained with macros rather than ligatures. The
- |mrgr| family is for new-style (one-accent) Greek.
-
- Finally K.~J. Dryllerakis's Greek\TeX\ package (also called KDGreek)
- \citeKD\ uses the Levy character programs again, but takes advantage
- of the new ligature features of \TeX~3 to make *s@* become *s*
- (without needing compound glyphs for every combination of *s@* with
- a letter). The fonts are given names starting with |kd|.
- Greek\TeX\ also includes format files for plain \TeX\ and \LaTeX,
- transliteration programs and other useful things.
-
-\subsection{Designing Greek letters for Malvern}
-
- My Malvern-G encoding is intended to be `ligature-compatible' with
- Levy's and Dryllerakis's, meaning that `|<'a|||' will produce
- `*<'a|*' in each of them, even though this is glyph~141 in
- |grreg10|, 201 in |kdgr10| and some random number in |ma55g10|. The
- punctuation characters have the same encoding.
-
- Designing a sanserif Greek lower case alphabet (*alfabet*?) is tricky
- because the lower case letters have a very cursive style, as if
- hand-drawn with a brush by a scribe in a hurry -- which is pretty
- much the opposite of most sanserif styles. I~made sketches (on
- paper) of Greek letters forced into the same sorts of shapes as
- other Malvern letters, and the results were uniformly horrid. The
- original idea of Malvern was to make a humanist/geometric hybrid, so
- I tried approaching it from the from the humanist end this time.
-
-%}}} background
-\fi
-%{{{ references
-
-\section{References}
-
- Since I don't speak a word of Greek -- the only word I know is
- *barbaroi* and I don't know how to spell it -- I have relied on
- reading between the lines of the documentation for other systems for
- typesetting Greek, including Hart's Rules \citeHarts.
-
- CTAN is the Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network, a collection of FTP
- sites (such as |ftp.tex.ac.uk|, under directory |tex-archive|).
-
-\beginthe{bib} \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt
- \the\bibliography
- \par
-\endthe{bib}
-
-%}}} postamble
-
-%{{{ samples
-
-\section{Examples of text in Malvern 55 and 56}
-
-\iffalse
- This quotation is used by Haralambous and Thull \citeYannis\ as an
- example of the old-style accent-and-breathing system:
-%{{{ Popess Johanna
-
-\begin twocolgr
- >En~w| <esp'eran tin`a >exantl'hsas t`a murol'ogi'a tou
- >ekoim~ato <o Froum'entios >ep`i t~hs >'ammou t~hs paral'ias,
- katab`as >ex o>uran~wn <o >ap'ostolos >eke~inos t~wn Sax'onwn
- >'hnoixe di`a maqa'iras t`a st'hjh to~u koimwm'enou,
- e>is'hgage to`us <iero`us dakt'ulous tou e>is t`hn >op`hn kai
- >exag`wn t`hn kard`ian >eb'ujisen a>ut'hn e>is l'akkon pl'hrh
- <'udatos, <'oper <hg'iasen prohgoum'enws. <H fl'egousa
- >eke'inh kard'ia >'efrizen e>is t`o <'udwr <ws smap`is >ent`os
- to~u thgan'iou, >afo~u d`e >ekr'uwsen, >'ejese p'alin a>ut`hn
- <o <'agios e<is t`on t'opon ths ka`i kle'isas t`hn plhg`hn
- >ep'estreyen e>is t`on >idik'on tou.
-
- >'Etuq'e pote, >anagn~wst'a mou, n`a >apokoimhj~h|s m`e
- >anup'oforon b~hqa, koim'wmenos n`a <idr'wsh|s ka`i >exupn'hsas
- n`a e<urej~h|s >iatreum'enos? >Agn~wn <'oti e>~isai
- kal`a >ano'igeis mhqanik~ws t`o st'oma, <'ina plhr'wsh|s e>is
- t`on >epikat'araton b~hqa t`on sun'hjh f'oron. >All`a
- p'oshn a>isj'anesai qar'an, m`h e<ur'iskwn e>is t`on l'arugga
- t`o >oqlhp`on jhr'ion! O<'utw <'ama >'hnoixe ka`i <o
- Froum'entios to`us >ofjalmo'us, <htoim'asjn n`a prosf'erh|
- e>is t`hn >aq'ariston >Iw'annan t`hn sun'hjh dakr'uwn
- spond'hn, >all`a par`a p~asan prosdok'ian o<i >ofjalmo'i
- tou e<ur'ejhsan xhro`i ka'i n`a progeumat'ish| m~allon >`h
- n`a kla'ush| >h|sj'aneto >'orexin met`a polu'hmeron nhste'ian
- <o kal`os Benedekt~inos.
-\end twocolgr
-\rightline{\csc{Emmanouil Ro\"{\i}dis}, `The Popess Johanna (1896)'}
-\vskip 0pt plus \baselineskip
-
-%}}} Popess Johanna
-\fi
-
- The following paragraph is set in 11-point Malvern~55 (11-point
- Malvern has comprable x-height to 12-point Computer Modern). This
- quotation is used as one of the examples in Levy's article
- \citeLevy:
-\twocolgr
- >All' >ako'usontai, >enper e>~u dok~h|s l'egein. t'ode d'e sou
- >ene'ohsa <'ama l'egontos, ka`i pr`os >emaut`on skop~w; e>i <'oti
- m'alist'a me E>uj'ufrwn did'axeien, <ws o<i jeo`i <'apantes t`on
- toio~uton j'anaton <hgo~untai >'adikon e>~inai, t'i m~allon >eg`w
- mem'ajhka par' E>uj'ufronos, t'i pot' >est`in t`o <'osi'on te ka`i
- t`o >an'osion? jeomis`es m`en g`ar to~uto t`o >'epgon, <ws
- >'eoiken, e>'in >'an; >all`a g`ar o>u to'utw| >ef'anh >'arti
- <wrism'ena t`o <'osion ka`i m'h; t`o g`ar jeomis`es >`on ka`i
- jeofil`es >ef'anh. <wste to'utou m`en >af'ihm'i se, >~w E>uj'ufron;
- e>i bo'ulei, p'antes a>ut`o <hge'isjwn jeo`i >'adikon ka`i p'antes
- miso'untwn. >all' >~ara to~uto n~un >epanorj'wmeja >en t~w| l'ogw|,
- <ws <`o m`en p'antes o<i jeo`i mis~wsin, >an'osi'on >estin, <`o d'
- >`an fil~wsin, <`osion; <`o d' >`an o<i m`en fil~wsin, o<i d`e
- mis~wsin, o>ud'etera >`h amf'otera? >~ar' o<'utw bo'ulei <hm~in
- <wr'isjai n~un per`i to~u <os'iou ka`i to~u >anos'iou?
-\endtwocolgr
- \rightline{Plato, `Euthyphro'}
-\vskip 1\medskipamount plus \baselineskip
-
-
- This quotation (similarly stolen) is in Malvern~56 and has
- |\grvarphi| and |\grlunatesigma| in effect:
-
-\twocolgr \gri \grvarphi \grlunatesigma
- T`h stigm`h to'uth ni'wjw p'oso bar'u ''nai t`o must'hrio t~hs
- xomol'oghshs. <Ws t'wra, kane`is d`en x'erei p~ws p'erasa t`a du`o
- qr'onia mou st`o <'Agion >'Oros. O<i f'iloi mou jarro~un p`ws p~hga
- n`a d~w buzantin`a kon'ismata >`h >ap`o mustikop'ajeia n`a z'hsw
- mi`a perasm'enh >epoq'h. Ka`i t'wra, n'a, ntr'epomai n`a mil'hsw.
-
- P~ws n`a t`o p~w? Jumo~umai <'ena >anoixi'atiko deilin'o, po`u
- kat'ebaina t`on Ta"'ugeto, mi`a xafnik`h j'uella m`e k'uklwse kont`a
- sto'us Pentaulo'us. T'oso fober`os >anemos'ifounas, po`u >'epesa
- katag~hs gi`a n`a m`hn gkremist~w. O<i >astrap`es m' >'exwsan
- <olo~uje ki >'ekleisa t`a m'atia m`hn tuflwj~w, ka`i kat'aqama,
- p'istoma, per'imena. <'Olo t`o pan'uyhlo boun`o >'etreme, ka`i du`o
- >'elata d'ipla mou tsak'isthkan >ap' t`h m'esh ka`i br'onthxan
- q'amou. >'Eniwja t`o jei'afi to~u kerauno~u st`on >a'era, ka`i
- xafnik`a x'espase <h mp'ora, >'epesen <o >'anemos, ka`i qontr'es,
- jerm'es st'ales broq`h qt'uphsan t`a dentr`a ka`i t`o q~wma. T`o
- jum'ari, <h jro'umpa, t`o fask'omhlo, t`o flisko'uni, qtuphm'ena
- >ap' t`o ner'o, t'inaxan t`is murwdi'es tous ki <'olh <h g~hs
- m'urise.
-\endtwocolgr
-\rightline{\csc{Kazantzakis}, `Symposium'}
-\vskip 0pt plus \baselineskip
-
-%}}} samples
-\iffalse
-%{{{ table
-
-*\ntable*
-\smallskip \noindent
- This is a working encoding, and will likely be different in future
- versions.
-%}}} table
-\fi
-%{{{ 24-pt sample
-
-\bigbreak
-\moveleft\leftmargin \vbox{ \hsize=\bodywd
-\hrule height 1pt \bigskip
-\begingreek \biggr\baselineskip=30pt
-\centerline{((ABGDEZHJIKLMNXOPRSCTUFVQYW))}
-\centerline{](abgdezhjiklmnxoprss^^`ctuf\char92 vqyw)[}
-\centerline{=0123456789---\%\char42 +/--''!,:;?.-}
-\centerline{\char3 '@ `@ ~@ <@ <'@ <`@ <~@ >@ >'@ >`@ >~@ "@ "'@ "`@ "~@
- "\char3 @}
-\endgreek
-\medskip\hrule height 1pt
-}
-%}}} 24-pt sample
-\bye
-%}}} Malvern Greek manual
-
-% Local variables:
-% fill-prefix: "\t"
-% fill-column: 76
-% fold-folded-p: t
-% End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/makefile.in b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/makefile.in
deleted file mode 100644
index e1c797dcead..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/makefile.in
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,160 +0,0 @@
-# Makefile for the PDCMAC package
-# Template for configure
-
-package = @package@
-
-# directory source code is in:
-srcdir = @srcdir@
-
-# directory for TeX macro files:
-texmf = @texmf@
-texdir = @texdir@
-docdir = @docdir@
-
-# End of configuration section
-########################################################################
-
-TEX = tex </dev/null
-DVIPS = dvips
-FIG2EPSF = $(srcdir)/fig2epsf
-ETAGS = $(srcdir)/dtxtags
-INSTALL = @INSTALL@
-INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@
-MKDIR = $(srcdir)/pmkdir $(MKDIRFLAGS)
-MKDIRFLAGS = --mode=755
-
-code_files = pdccode.tex pdccode2.tex
-
-# The macro files are divided according to whether they have their own
-# DTX file, or come from pdcmisc.dtx or pdcsty.dtx
-self_files = pdcfmt2.dtx pdcfsel.dtx magrmac.dtx pdcoput5.dtx \
- pdcadobe.dtx pdcl1maa.dtx maamac.dtx
-misc_files = pdcmigr.tex pdcimth.tex pdchyex.tex pdccmsub.tex
-sty_files = ma55lft.tex ma55doc.tex pdccmlft.tex pdccmdoc.tex\
- pdcpsdoc.tex pdcpslft.tex pdcdoc.def pdclft.def
-macro_files = $(self_files:.dtx=.tex) $(misc_files) $(sty_files)
-
-misc_dtx = pdcmisc.dtx
-sty_dtx = pdcsty.dtx
-dtxfiles = $(self_files) $(sty_dtx) $(misc_dtx) pdccode.dtx
-dvifiles = $(dtxfiles:.dtx=.dvi) pdcguide.dvi
-
-figures = oput01.eps oput02.eps
-documents = pdcguide.tex magrman.tex copying.tex pdcmacvn.tex
-config_files = makefile.in configure
-miscscript = fig2epsf pmkdir pinstall dtxtags
-miscdoc = 00readme.txt install.txt copying.txt version.txt
-
-distfiles = $(miscdoc) pdcguide.dvi pdcmondo.tex \
- $(code_files) $(dtxfiles) $(documents) $(config_files) \
- $(figures) $(figures:.eps=.fig) \
- $(miscscript) $(miscscript:=.1)
-
-########################################################################
-# Standard targets
-
-all: pdcguide.dvi $(macro_files)
-
-# Note. This target assumes either I can use GNU "install", or
-# an "install" compatible with it, or the "pinstall" shellscript supplied.
-install: all pdccode.dvi
- test -d $(texdir) || $(MKDIR) $(texdir)
- $(INSTALL_DATA) $(macro_files) $(texdir)
- -test -d $(docdir) || $(MKDIR) $(docdir)
- -$(INSTALL_DATA) $(dvifiles) $(figures) $(miscdoc) $(docdir)
- -test -r news.txt && $(INSTALL_DATA) news.txt $(docdir)
-
-uninstall:
- cd $(texdir); rm -f $(macro_files)
- cd $(docdir) && rm -f $(dvifiles) $(figures) $(miscdoc)
-
-mostlyclean:
- rm -f *.log *.ilg *.toc *.bak
-clean: mostlyclean
- rm -f *.dvi *.aux *.idx $(macro_files) .misc.flag .sty.flag
-distclean: clean
- rm -f makefile config.status TAGS
-realclean: distclean
- rm -f *.ind $(figures) version.txt
-
-dist: $(distfiles)
- sed -n '/pdcmacv/s/.*[^0-9.]\([0-9.]*\)[^0-9.].*$$/$(package)-\1/p' \
- pdcmacvn.tex > .fn
- rm -rf `cat .fn`
- mkdir `cat .fn`
- cp -p $(distfiles) `cat .fn`
- -cp -p ChangeLog `cat .fn`/changes.txt
- -cp -p news.txt `cat .fn`/news.txt
- cd `cat .fn`; ls -Rl > contents.txt
- tar -cf `cat .fn`.tar `cat .fn` && gzip -v9f `cat .fn`.tar
- cd `cat .fn`; zip -9qrl ../`cat ../.fn`.zip *
- rm -rf `cat .fn` .fn
-
-version.txt: $(dtxfiles) $(miscscript) pdcmacvn.tex
- sed -e 's/\\def\\pdcmacversion{\([0-9]*\.[0-9]*\)}/* $(package) release \1 */' \
- -e 's/\\def\\pdcmacversion{\([0-9]*\.[0-9]*\)\.\([0-9]*\)}/* $(package) release \1, patch level \2 */' \
- pdcmacvn.tex > version.txt
- date '+Version ID list generated %Y-%m-%d' >> version.txt
- echo >> version.txt
- ( grep -h 'rcs\$$Id' $(dtxfiles) | \
- sed -e 's/^.*: \(.*\) \$$.*$$/\1/' -e 's/,v/ =/' | sort; echo; \
- grep version= $(miscscript) configure | \
- sed -e 's/:version=/ = /' -e 's/"//g' | sort ) | \
- align_equals >> version.txt
-
-tagfiles = $(dtxfiles)
-TAGS: $(tagfiles) $(srcdir)/dtxtags
- $(ETAGS) $(ETAGSFLAGS) $(tagfiles)
-
-########################################################################
-# Individual targets
-
-$(self_files) $(miscfiles): pdccode.tex
-$(sty_files): pdccode2.tex
-
-pdcguide.dvi magrman.dvi: $(macro_files)
-pdcguide.dvi: copying.tex pdcmacvn.tex
-
-pdcoput5.dvi pdcoput5.tex: $(figures)
-
-$(misc_files): .misc.flag
-.misc.flag: $(misc_dtx)
- $(TEX) $(misc_dtx) && touch .misc.flag
-
-$(sty_files): .sty.flag
-.sty.flag: $(sty_dtx)
- $(TEX) $(sty_dtx) && touch .sty.flag
-
-pdccode.dvi pdccode.tex: pdccode.dtx
- $(TEX) pdccode.dtx
- grep endinput tmp.tex && mv tmp.tex pdccode.tex
-
-pdcguide.ps: pdcguide.tex copying.tex $(macro_files)
- echo '\let\usepsfonts! \input pdcguide' > tmp.tex
- $(TEX) tmp
- rm -f tmp.tex
- $(DVIPS) $(DVIPSFLAGS) -o $@ tmp
-
-# A scratch file for doing tests:
-tryit.dvi: tryit.tex ma55lft.tex pdcl1maa.tex
- $(TEX) tryit
-
-
-# rules for the configuration itself
-makefile: makefile.in config.status
- sh config.status makefile
-config.status: $(srcdir)/configure
- sh config.status --recheck --nocreate
-
-########################################################################
-# Implicit rules
-
-.SUFFIXES: .dtx .tex .dvi .ps .eps .fig
-.dtx.tex:
- $(TEX) $<
-.tex.dvi:
- $(TEX) $<
-.dvi.ps:
- $(DVIPS) $(DVIPSFLAGS) $< -o $@
-.fig.eps:
- $(FIG2EPSF) $< > $@
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput01.fig b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput01.fig
deleted file mode 100644
index e4b75f258f0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput01.fig
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,323 +0,0 @@
-#FIG 2.1
-80 2
-6 89 317 224 329
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 329 224 329 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 329 224 317 89 317 89 329 224 329 9999 9999
--6
-6 89 227 224 299
-6 89 287 224 299
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 299 224 299 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 299 224 287 89 287 89 299 224 299 9999 9999
--6
-6 89 272 224 284
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 284 224 284 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 284 224 272 89 272 89 284 224 284 9999 9999
--6
-6 89 257 224 269
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 269 224 269 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 269 224 257 89 257 89 269 224 269 9999 9999
--6
-6 89 242 224 254
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 254 224 254 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 254 224 242 89 242 89 254 224 254 9999 9999
--6
-6 89 227 224 239
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 239 224 239 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 239 224 227 89 227 89 239 224 239 9999 9999
--6
--6
-6 89 152 224 224
-6 89 212 224 224
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 224 224 224 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 224 224 212 89 212 89 224 224 224 9999 9999
--6
-6 89 197 224 209
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 209 224 209 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 209 224 197 89 197 89 209 224 209 9999 9999
--6
-6 89 182 224 194
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 194 224 194 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 194 224 182 89 182 89 194 224 194 9999 9999
--6
-6 89 167 224 179
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 179 224 179 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 179 224 167 89 167 89 179 224 179 9999 9999
--6
-6 89 152 224 164
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 164 224 164 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 164 224 152 89 152 89 164 224 164 9999 9999
--6
--6
-6 89 77 224 149
-6 89 137 224 149
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 149 224 149 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 149 224 137 89 137 89 149 224 149 9999 9999
--6
-6 89 122 224 134
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 134 224 134 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 134 224 122 89 122 89 134 224 134 9999 9999
--6
-6 89 107 224 119
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 119 224 119 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 119 224 107 89 107 89 119 224 119 9999 9999
--6
-6 89 92 224 104
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 104 224 104 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 104 224 92 89 92 89 104 224 104 9999 9999
--6
-6 89 77 224 89
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 89 224 89 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 224 89 224 77 89 77 89 89 224 89 9999 9999
--6
--6
-6 239 77 374 149
-6 239 137 374 149
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 149 374 149 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 149 374 137 239 137 239 149 374 149 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 122 374 134
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 134 374 134 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 134 374 122 239 122 239 134 374 134 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 107 374 119
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 119 374 119 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 119 374 107 239 107 239 119 374 119 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 92 374 104
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 104 374 104 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 104 374 92 239 92 239 104 374 104 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 77 374 89
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 89 374 89 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 89 374 77 239 77 239 89 374 89 9999 9999
--6
--6
-6 239 152 374 224
-6 239 212 374 224
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 224 374 224 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 224 374 212 239 212 239 224 374 224 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 197 374 209
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 209 374 209 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 209 374 197 239 197 239 209 374 209 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 182 374 194
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 194 374 194 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 194 374 182 239 182 239 194 374 194 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 167 374 179
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 179 374 179 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 179 374 167 239 167 239 179 374 179 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 152 374 164
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 164 374 164 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 164 374 152 239 152 239 164 374 164 9999 9999
--6
--6
-6 239 227 374 299
-6 239 287 374 299
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 299 374 299 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 299 374 287 239 287 239 299 374 299 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 272 374 284
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 284 374 284 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 284 374 272 239 272 239 284 374 284 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 257 374 269
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 269 374 269 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 269 374 257 239 257 239 269 374 269 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 242 374 254
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 254 374 254 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 254 374 242 239 242 239 254 374 254 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 227 374 239
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 239 374 239 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 239 374 227 239 227 239 239 374 239 9999 9999
--6
--6
-6 239 302 374 374
-6 239 362 374 374
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 374 374 374 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 374 374 362 239 362 239 374 374 374 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 347 374 359
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 359 374 359 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 359 374 347 239 347 239 359 374 359 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 332 374 344
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 344 374 344 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 344 374 332 239 332 239 344 374 344 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 317 374 329
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 329 374 329 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 329 374 317 239 317 239 329 374 329 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 302 374 314
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 314 374 314 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 314 374 302 239 302 239 314 374 314 9999 9999
--6
--6
-6 239 377 374 449
-6 239 437 374 449
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 449 374 449 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 449 374 437 239 437 239 449 374 449 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 422 374 434
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 434 374 434 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 434 374 422 239 422 239 434 374 434 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 407 374 419
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 419 374 419 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 419 374 407 239 407 239 419 374 419 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 392 374 404
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 404 374 404 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 404 374 392 239 392 239 404 374 404 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 377 374 389
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 389 374 389 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 389 374 377 239 377 239 389 374 389 9999 9999
--6
--6
-6 239 482 374 494
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 494 374 494 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 494 374 482 239 482 239 494 374 494 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 467 374 479
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 479 374 479 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 479 374 467 239 467 239 479 374 479 9999 9999
--6
-6 239 452 374 464
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 239 464 374 464 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 374 464 374 452 239 452 239 464 374 464 9999 9999
--6
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 59 449 59 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 524 449 524 9999 9999
-2 2 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 0 0 0
- 479 554 479 29 59 29 59 554 479 554 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 254 344 9999 9999
-2 1 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 308 224 308 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 563 269 569 344 569 344 563 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 308 569 317 581 320 581 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 29 344 83 308 9999 9999
-2 2 1 1 -1 5 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
- 224 494 224 77 164 77 164 494 224 494 9999 9999
-2 2 1 1 -1 5 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
- 299 494 299 77 239 77 239 494 299 494 9999 9999
-2 2 1 1 -1 5 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
- 374 494 374 77 314 77 314 494 374 494 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 5 0.000 0 0 0
- 449 59 449 47 89 47 89 59 449 59 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 5 0.000 0 0 0
- 449 524 449 512 89 512 89 524 449 524 9999 9999
-2 2 1 1 -1 5 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
- 449 494 449 77 389 77 389 494 449 494 9999 9999
-2 2 1 1 -1 5 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
- 149 494 149 77 89 77 89 494 149 494 9999 9999
-4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 36 113 326 caption
-4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 44 146 215 column 0
-4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 44 311 218 column 1
-4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 42 275 53 headline
-4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 37 359 515 footline
-4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 39 323 584 grid cell
-4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 48 8 371 separator
-4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 36 8 359 caption
-4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 54 104 419 illustration
-4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 15 54 419 404 illustration
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput02.fig b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput02.fig
deleted file mode 100644
index fb7858b0c43..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput02.fig
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,273 +0,0 @@
-#FIG 2.1
-80 2
-6 179 317 254 329
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 254 329 254 317 179 317 179 329 254 329 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 179 329 254 329 9999 9999
--6
-6 179 332 254 344
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 254 344 254 332 179 332 179 344 254 344 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 179 344 254 344 9999 9999
--6
-6 179 287 254 299
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 254 299 254 287 179 287 179 299 254 299 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 179 299 254 299 9999 9999
--6
-6 179 272 254 284
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 254 284 254 272 179 272 179 284 254 284 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 179 284 254 284 9999 9999
--6
-6 179 257 254 269
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 254 269 254 257 179 257 179 269 254 269 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 179 269 254 269 9999 9999
--6
-6 179 242 254 254
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 254 254 254 242 179 242 179 254 254 254 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 179 254 254 254 9999 9999
--6
-6 179 227 254 239
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 254 239 254 227 179 227 179 239 254 239 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 179 239 254 239 9999 9999
--6
-6 179 212 254 224
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 254 224 254 212 179 212 179 224 254 224 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 179 224 254 224 9999 9999
--6
-6 179 197 254 209
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 254 209 254 197 179 197 179 209 254 209 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 179 209 254 209 9999 9999
--6
-6 179 182 254 194
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 254 194 254 182 179 182 179 194 254 194 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 179 194 254 194 9999 9999
--6
-6 179 167 254 179
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 254 179 254 167 179 167 179 179 254 179 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 179 179 254 179 9999 9999
--6
-6 269 347 344 359
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 359 344 347 269 347 269 359 344 359 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 359 344 359 9999 9999
--6
-6 269 317 344 329
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 329 344 317 269 317 269 329 344 329 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 329 344 329 9999 9999
--6
-6 269 332 344 344
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 344 344 332 269 332 269 344 344 344 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 344 344 344 9999 9999
--6
-6 269 287 344 299
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 299 344 287 269 287 269 299 344 299 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 299 344 299 9999 9999
--6
-6 269 272 344 284
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 284 344 272 269 272 269 284 344 284 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 284 344 284 9999 9999
--6
-6 269 257 344 269
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 269 344 257 269 257 269 269 344 269 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 269 344 269 9999 9999
--6
-6 269 242 344 254
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 254 344 242 269 242 269 254 344 254 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 254 344 254 9999 9999
--6
-6 269 227 344 239
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 239 344 227 269 227 269 239 344 239 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 239 344 239 9999 9999
--6
-6 269 212 344 224
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 224 344 212 269 212 269 224 344 224 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 224 344 224 9999 9999
--6
-6 269 197 344 209
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 209 344 197 269 197 269 209 344 209 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 209 344 209 9999 9999
--6
-6 269 182 344 194
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 194 344 182 269 182 269 194 344 194 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 194 344 194 9999 9999
--6
-6 269 167 344 179
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 179 344 167 269 167 269 179 344 179 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 179 344 179 9999 9999
--6
-6 269 362 344 374
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 374 344 362 269 362 269 374 344 374 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 374 344 374 9999 9999
--6
-6 269 377 344 389
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 389 344 377 269 377 269 389 344 389 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 389 344 389 9999 9999
--6
-6 269 302 344 314
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 314 344 302 269 302 269 314 344 314 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 269 314 344 314 9999 9999
--6
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 59 434 59 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 89 524 434 524 9999 9999
-2 2 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 0 0 0
- 479 554 479 29 59 29 59 554 479 554 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 494 74 494 494 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 494 494 494 527 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 509 59 509 89 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 524 29 524 74 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 524 494 524 554 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 539 29 539 554 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 89 569 434 569 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 59 584 479 584 9999 9999
-2 1 1 1 -1 0 0 0 4.000 -1 0 0
- 425 89 515 89 9999 9999
-2 1 1 1 -1 0 0 0 4.000 -1 0 0
- 431 59 515 59 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 449 59 449 74 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 449 104 449 89 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 329 158 344 158 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 374 158 359 158 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 5 0.000 0 0 0
- 434 524 434 512 89 512 89 524 434 524 9999 9999
-2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 5 0.000 0 0 0
- 434 59 434 47 89 47 89 59 434 59 9999 9999
-2 2 1 1 -1 10 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
- 434 164 434 74 89 74 89 164 434 164 9999 9999
-2 2 1 1 -1 10 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
- 434 389 434 164 359 164 359 389 434 389 9999 9999
-2 2 1 1 -1 10 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
- 164 389 164 164 89 164 89 389 164 389 9999 9999
-2 2 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 0 0 0
- 254 389 254 164 179 164 179 389 254 389 9999 9999
-2 2 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 0 0 0
- 344 389 344 164 269 164 269 389 344 389 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 155 284 155 299 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 155 329 155 314 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 179 158 254 158 9999 9999
-2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
- 365 164 365 389 9999 9999
-2 1 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 170 164 170 389 9999 9999
-2 1 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 179 308 254 308 9999 9999
-2 1 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 260 164 260 389 9999 9999
-2 1 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
- 350 164 350 389 9999 9999
-2 2 1 1 -1 0 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
- 89 389 89 494 434 494 434 389 89 389 9999 9999
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 32 269 566 bodywd
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 36 269 581 paperwd
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 24 521 524 botmg
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 49 491 509 footlineskip
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 28 491 284 bodyht
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 32 536 284 paperht
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 53 506 74 headlineskip
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 24 521 53 topmg
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 30 449 86 topskip
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 27 350 155 colsep
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 27 269 119 topbox
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 27 269 464 botbox
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 32 269 518 footline
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 36 254 56 headline
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 37 218 266 column 0
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 37 305 266 column 1
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 28 125 221 leftbox
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 31 218 338 caption
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 14 215 374 illo
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 25 215 152 colwd
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 21 374 284 colht
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 33 407 251 rightbox
-4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 29 152 308 capsep
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 443b766d82c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,609 +0,0 @@
-% pdcadobe.dtx -- documentation & source for pdcadobe.tex -*-tex-*-
-
-%%%@TeX-document-file {
-%%% title = "PDCADOBE -- Formatting Macros",
-%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.dtx",
-%%% version = "$Revision: 1.3 $",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% date = "$Date: 1995/03/30 16:07:31 $",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for
-%%% the TeX definitions file pdcadobe.tex.
-%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
-%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute
-%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
-%%% General Public License as published by the Free
-%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
-%%% or (at your option) any later version.",
-%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
-%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
-%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
-%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
-%%% License for more details.",
-%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
-%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write
-%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
-%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
-%%%}
-
-%{{{ pdcadobe
-%{{{ preamble
-\relax
-\input pdccode
-
-\document
-\rcs$Id: pdcadobe.dtx,v 1.3 1995/03/30 16:07:31 pdc Exp $\endrcs
-
-\codefile{pdcadobe.tex}
-%}}} preamble
-%{{{ introduction
-
-\author{P. Damian Cugley}
-\title{PDCAdobe---Macros for using Adobe fonts}
-\section{Introduction}
-
- This document describes |pdcadobe.tex|, a collection of macros
- for using Adobe's Standard Roman character set, via DVIPS's
- variation on the \TeX\ Text encoding.
-
-\notepar
- You will need to use a different strategy if your PostScript
- fonts adhere strictly to the \TeX\ Text conventions (the
- conventions of Computer Modern Roman, described in {\it\TeX
- book}\/ Appendix~F, and called OT1 by the \LaTeX~3 team), such
- as the fonts generated with Fontinst.
-\endnotepar
-
-\subsec{New text symbols}
-
- The new characters now available in text are:
-$$\halign{\indent\tt\char`\\#1\hfil&\quad#\hfil\cr
- quotesingle& typewriter-style apostrophe ({\tt\char"0D })\cr
- quotedouble& typewriter-style double apostrophe ({\tt"})\cr
- asciicircum& ASCII circumflex\cr
- asciitilde& ASCII tilde\cr
-}$$
-
-
-\subsec{Use of the Symbol font}
-
- The assumption is that one of the resons for using PostScript
- fonts is that, if you stick to the `Adobe~35', the resulting
- PostScript files are much smaller because no font bitmaps need
- to be downloaded. On this assumption, Adobe's Symbol font is
- used whenever possible, even when the Computer Modern symbol is
- arguably prettier.
-
- The Symbol font will need to have its own maths family, which by
- convention this file expects to find defined as |\asyfam|.
-
-\subsec{Composite letters}
-
-\setbox0=\hbox{accent}
-\edef\\{\vrule height\the\ht0 depth\the\dp0 width\the\wd0 \relax }
-
- Composite letters are those made from some base letter and a
- {\it mark}, for example {\it\'e}, {\it\"u}.\footnote*{`Composite
- letters' is a euphemism for what English speakers usually refer
- to as `\\ed letters', since the word `\\' tends to provoke
- lectures to the effect that composite letters are not considered
- to be `\\ed' in many of the lanuages in which they are used.}
- In the Adobe Standard Roman character set, and hence in
- |afm2tfm|'s encoding, the composite letters of ISO 8859--1 are
- included as separate glyphs. These glyphs are accessed using
- ligatures between mark glyphs and base letters (so that |^^13e|
- in the manuscript file produces `\'e'). Unfortunately,
- exploiting this is tricky if we also want to allow for composite
- glyphs {\it not} included in the PostScript fonts.
-
- The approach taken in these definitions is that \TeX's composite
- letter commands (|\'|, |\"|, and friends) are left unchanged, so
- that `|\'e|' works through \TeX's |\|\\ command. The magic
- glyphs are available as commands with names like |\acuteglyph|
- or via the Latin-1 special symbols, so that `|\acuteglyph e|' or
- `|^^b4e|' (which might liik like `{\tt\char"13 e}' on the screen
- if your computer uses Latin-1) produces `\'e' as a single glyph
- (which might mean tha mark is better aligned). Finally, the
- Latin-1 composite letters generate the single glyphs vial
- ligatures, so that `|^^e9|' (which may well look like `{\tt\'e}'
- on the screen) expands to `|\acuteglyph e|' and hence `\'e'.
-
-\subsec{About this document}
-
- The definitions file and the printed documentation are both in
- |pdcadobe.dtx|, a `documented \TeX\ macros' file\footnote*{The
- \LaTeX~2e distribution uses files with the `|dtx|' suffix for
- similar purposes.} which, when processed by plain \TeX,
- generates a fresh copy of |pdcadobe.tex| in the current directory
- in addition to the |dvi| file. This ensures that the printed
- documentation and the code it describes are identical. The
- |dtx| file uses the macros in |pdccode.tex|.
-
-%}}} introduction
-%{{{ File identification
-\section{File identification}
-
- Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the
- file.
-
-\code
- \|\% pdcadobe.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- macros for Adobe style fonts
- |
- |%%%@TeX-definition-file {
- |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex",
- \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
- \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
- |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
- |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
- |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
- |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
- |%%% codetable = "USASCII",
- |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
- |%%% supported = "Maybe",
- |%%% abstract = "Formatting macros for Adobe-style fonts.
- |%%% This file was generated by running
- \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx",
- |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
- \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the
- |%%% package it came in.",
- |%%% dependencies = "",
- |%%% }
- |
- \|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\}
- |
-\endcode
-%}}} file id
-%{{{ chardefs
-\section{Characters available in all styles}
-
- The following characters are in the fonts generated by
- |afm2tfm|, so are available in all styles.
-\code
- |\chardef\quotesingle="0D
- |\chardef\quotedouble="22
- |\chardef\_="5F
- |\chardef\asciicircum="80
- |\chardef\asciitilde="81
- |\chardef\cents="A2
- |\chardef\pounds="A3
- |\chardef\fractionslash="A4
- |\chardef\yen="A5
- |\chardef\florin="A6
- |\chardef\S="A7
- |\chardef\currency="A8
- |\chardef\lguillemet="AB
- |\chardef\dag="B2
- |\chardef\ddag="B3
- |\chardef\gbdecimal="B4
- |\chardef\P="B6
- |\chardef\bullet="B7
- |\chardef\quotesinglebase="B8
- |\chardef\quotedblbase="B9
- |\chardef\rguillemet="BB
- |\chardef\ellipsis="BC \def\dots{\ellipsis\thinspace}
- |\chardef\permille="BD
- |\chardef\orda="E3
- |\chardef\ordo="EB
-\endcode
- Some glyphs, like |\fractionslash| and |\gbdecimal| may well be
- used in maths mode, but are defined using |\chardef| to allow
- them to be used in text as well.
-
- The definition of |\dots| adds the thin space that is included
- in plain \TeX's |\dots|, so that `|\dots,|' will have a thin
- space between the third full stop and the comma.
-
-\subsec{Maths stuff}
-
- These symbols are available in maths mode, coming from the |\rm|
- font (fam~0).
-\code
- |\mathchardef\backslash="205C
- |\edef\lbrace{\delimiter"407B308} \let\{=\lbrace \mathcode`\{="407B
- |\mathcode`\|="707C \mathchardef\mid="307C
- |\edef\rbrace{\delimiter"507D309} \let\}=\rbrace \mathcode`\}="507D
- |\mathchardef\sim="3081
- |\mathchardef\cdot="20B4
- |\mathchardef\bullet="20B7
- |\mathchardef\ldots="60BC
-\endcode
- There {\it are} extensible braces in the Adobe Symbol font,
- which I~would have used for the |\lbrace| and |\rbrace|
- commands. Unfortunately, the TFM file generated with |afm2tfm|
- seems to lack the special information that makes extensible
- characters work, so the |cmex10| glyphs must be used instead.
-
-\subsec{Marks for composite letters}
-
- Some common accented letters can be got by printing the accent
- glyph before the letter glyph. However not all combinations
- will work, so I~have left plain \TeX's definitions in place.
-
- For later reference, the glyphs used for the accents are given
- names.
-\code
- |\chardef\graveglyph="12
- |\chardef\acuteglyph="13
- |\chardef\hookglyph="14
- |\chardef\breveglyph="15
- |\chardef\macronglyph="16
- |\chardef\ringglyph="17
- |\chardef\cedillaglyph="18
- |\chardef\circumglyph="5E
- |\chardef\tildeglyph="7E
- |\chardef\twodotsglyph="7F
- |\chardef\dotglyph="C7
- |\chardef\hungarianglyph="CD
- |\chardef\ogonekglyph="CE
-\endcode
-
-
- Some special letters and marks have been moved to new slots.
-\code
- |\chardef\AA="C8 \chardef\aa="98
- |\chardef\L="E8 \chardef\l="F8
- |\def\.#1{\accent\dotglyph #1}
- |\def\H#1{\accent\hungarianglyph"CD #1}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} chardefs
-%{{{ adobe sy
-\section{Adobe Symbol font characters}
-
- Most of Adobe's Symbol font's glyphs exist already in one of the
- maths fonts. Nevertheless I~think it makes sense to use them
- whenever possible, because if it so happens that none of the
- glyphs in the maths fonts are used, the bitmaps for the fonts
- may be omitted from the PostScript file, making it much smaller.
- For these definitions to work, there must be a family |\asyfam|
- and font nickname |\asy|.
-
-\code
- |\ifx\asyfam\UNDEFINED
- | \newfam\asyfam
- |\fi
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Extracting the fam name}
-
-\code
- |\edef\\{\ifcase\asyfam 0\or 1\or 2\or 3\or 4\or 5\or 6\or 7\or
- | 8\or 9\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\fi
- |}
-\endcode
-
- Where plain \TeX's definition uses glyphs from the roman font,
- I~have let the definition stand.
-\code
- |\mathchardef\forall="0\\22
- |\mathchardef\exists="0\\24
- |\mathchardef\suchthat="0\\27
- |\mathcode`*="2\\2A
- |\mathcode`,="6\\2C
- |\mathcode`-="2\\2D
- |\mathcode`.="2\\2E
- |\mathcode`/="2\\2F
- |\mathcode`<="3\\3C
- |\mathcode`>="3\\3E
-\smallbreak
- |\mathchardef\cong="3\\40
- |\mathchardef\Alpha="0\\41
- |\mathchardef\Beta="0\\42
- |\mathchardef\Chi="0\\43
- |\mathchardef\Delta="0\\44
- |\mathchardef\Epsilon="0\\45
- |\mathchardef\Phi="0\\46
- |\mathchardef\Gamma="0\\47
- |\mathchardef\Eta="0\\48
- |\mathchardef\Iota="0\\49
- |\mathchardef\vartheta="0\\4A
- |\mathchardef\Kappa="0\\4B
- |\mathchardef\Lambda="0\\4C
- |\mathchardef\Mu="0\\4D
- |\mathchardef\Ni="0\\4E
- |\mathchardef\Omicron="0\\4F
-\smallbreak
- |\mathchardef\Pi="0\\50
- |\mathchardef\Theta="0\\51
- |\mathchardef\Rho="0\\52
- |\mathchardef\Sigma="0\\53
- |\mathchardef\Tau="0\\54
- |\mathchardef\varUpsilon="0\\55
- |\mathchardef\varsigma="0\\56
- |\mathchardef\Omega="0\\57
- |\mathchardef\Xi="0\\58
- |\mathchardef\Psi="0\\59
- |\mathchardef\Zeta="0\\5A
-%
- |\mathchardef\therefore="3\\5C
-%
- |\mathchardef\perp="3\\5E
-%
-\smallbreak
-%
- |\mathchardef\alpha="0\\61
- |\mathchardef\beta="0\\62
- |\mathchardef\chi="0\\63
- |\mathchardef\delta="0\\64
- |\mathchardef\epsilon="0\\65
- |\mathchardef\phi="0\\66
- |\mathchardef\gamma="0\\67
- |\mathchardef\eta="0\\68
- |\mathchardef\iota="0\\69
- |\mathchardef\varphi="0\\6A
- |\mathchardef\kappa="0\\6B
- |\mathchardef\lambda="0\\6C
- |\mathchardef\mu="0\\6D
- |\mathchardef\ni="0\\6E
- |\mathchardef\omicron="0\\6F
-\smallbreak
- |\mathchardef\pi="0\\70
- |\mathchardef\theta="0\\71
- |\mathchardef\rho="0\\72
- |\mathchardef\sigma="0\\73
- |\mathchardef\tau="0\\74
- |\mathchardef\upsilon="0\\75
- |\mathchardef\varpi="0\\76
- |\mathchardef\omega="0\\77
- |\mathchardef\xi="0\\78
- |\mathchardef\psi="0\\79
- |\mathchardef\zeta="0\\7A
- |\mathchardef\sim="3\\7E
-%
-\smallbreak
- |\mathchardef\Upsilon="0\\A1
- |\mathcode`'="0\\A2 \mathchardef\minutes="0\\A2
- |\mathchardef\leq="3\\A3 \let\le=\leq
- |\mathchardef\fractionslash="0\\A4
- |\mathchardef\infinity="0\\A5
-%
- |\mathchardef\clubsuit="0\\A7
- |\mathchardef\diamondsuit="0\\A8
- |\mathchardef\heartsuit="0\\A9
- |\mathchardef\spadesuit="0\\AA
- |\mathchardef\leftrightarrow="3\\AB
- |\mathchardef\leftarrow="3\\AC \let\gets=\rightarrow
- |\mathchardef\uparrow="3\\AD
- |\mathchardef\rightarrow="3\\AE \let\to=\rightarrow
- |\mathchardef\downarrow="3\\AF
-\smallskip
- |\mathchardef\degrees="0\\B0
- |\mathchardef\pm="2\\B1
- |\mathchardef\seconds="0\\B2
- |\mathchardef\geq="3\\B3 \let\ge=\geq
- |\mathchardef\times="2\\B4
- |\mathchardef\propto="3\\B5
- |\mathchardef\partial="0\\B6
-%
- |\mathchardef\div="2\\B8
- |\mathchardef\neq="3\\B9 \let\ne=\neq
- |\mathchardef\equiv="3\\BA
- |\mathchardef\approx="3\\BB
- |\mathchardef\ldots="6\\BC
- |\edef\arrowvert{\delimiter"0\\BD33C }
- |\mathchardef\relbar"3\\BE
- |\edef\crlf{\noexpand\mathexbox\\BF}
-\smallbreak
- |\mathchardef\aleph="0\\C0
- |\mathchardef\Im="0\\C1
- |\mathchardef\Re="0\\C2
- |\mathchardef\wp="0\\C3
- |\mathchardef\otimes="2\\C4
- |\mathchardef\oplus="2\\C5
- |\mathchardef\emptyset="0\\C6
- |\mathchardef\cap="2\\C7
- |\mathchardef\cup="2\\C8
- |\mathchardef\supset="3\\C9
- |\mathchardef\supseteq="3\\CA
- |\mathchardef\nsubset="3\\CB
- |\mathchardef\subset="3\\CC
- |\mathchardef\subseteq="3\\CD
- |\mathchardef\in="3\\CE
- |\mathchardef\nin="3\\CF
-\smallbreak
- |\mathchardef\angle="0\\D0
- |\mathchardef\nabla="0\\D1
- |\edef\registered{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D2}
- |\edef\copyright{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D3}
- |\edef\trademark{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D4}
- |\mathchardef\prod="1\\D5
- |\edef\sqrt{\radical"\\D6370 }
- |\mathchardef\cdot="2\\D7
- |\mathchardef\neg="0\\D8 \let\lnot=\neg
- |\mathchardef\wedge="3\\D9 \let\land=\wedge
- |\mathchardef\vee="3\\DA \let\lor=\vee
- |\mathchardef\Leftrightarrow="3\\DB
- |\mathchardef\Leftarrow="3\\DC
- |\mathchardef\Uparrow="3\\DD
- |\mathchardef\Rightarrow="3\\DE
- |\mathchardef\Downarrow="3\\DF
-\smallbreak
- |\mathchardef\diamond="3\\E0
- |\edef\langle{\delimiter"4\\E130A }
- |\mathchardef\sum="1\\E5
- |\edef\rangle{\delimiter"5\\F130B }
-\endcode
- (I haven't bothered redefining those delimiters based on parts of
- large delimiters.)
-
-%}}} adobe sy
-%{{{ ISO 8859-1 support
-\section{ISO 8859--1 input}
-
- ISO~8859--1 (Latin-1) is the de facto standard character
- encoding in a large numebr of countries, and so we shall try to
- make a reasonable number of Latin-1 characters available.
-
-\subsec{Symbols}
-
- Those characters whose code is the same as the code of the
- corresponding glyph are left alone (with catcode~12). For
- example, |^^a3| (pounds sterling) is left alone.
-
- Those that have an equivalent |\chardef| (or |\mathchardef|)
- name are defined with |\let| (for example, |^^a4| is |\let| to
- |\currency|). Those with an equivalent standard ligature use
- that ligature. These conventions hopefully insulate these
- definitions against changes in the encoding.
-
- The characters that represent marks for composite
- letters\footnote*{This phrase is used on the grounds that the
- word {\it accent} tends to provoke lectures on ways in which
- many composite letters do {\it not} represent accents in the
- languages in which they are used.} will form ligatures with the
- following letter---one may write `{\tt\char"7F u\char"18 c}' to
- get `\"u\c c'.
-
- I don't use |\declareactivechar| on these because they would not
- work properly in verbatim text with catcode~12. (Extending
- verbatim text to include Latin-1 will take a few definitions
- along the same lines as |\ttlq| etc.).
-\code
- |\catcode`^^a0\active \let^^a0=~
- |\catcode`^^a1\active \def^^a1{!`}
-% A2
-% A3
- |\catcode`^^a4\active \let^^a4=\currency
-% A5
-% A6 XXX
-% A7
- |\catcode`^^a8\active \let^^a8=\twodotsglyph
- |\catcode`^^a9\active \let^^a9=\copyright
- |\catcode`^^aa\active \let^^aa=\orda
-% AB
- |\catcode`^^ac\active \let^^ac=\lnot
- |\catcode`^^ad\active \let^^ad=\-
- |\catcode`^^ae\active \let^^ae=\registered
- |\catcode`^^af\active \let^^af=\macronglyph
-\smallbreak
- |\catcode`^^b0\active \let^^b0=\degrees
- |\catcode`^^b1\active \let^^b1=\pm
- |\catcode`^^b2\active \def^^b2{^2}
- |\catcode`^^b3\active \def^^b3{^3}
- |\catcode`^^b4\active \let^^b4=\acuteglyph
- |\catcode`^^b5\active \let^^b5=\mu
-% B6
- |\catcode`^^b7\active \let^^b7=\gbdecimal
- |\catcode`^^b8\active \let^^b8=\cedillaglyph
- |\catcode`^^b9\active \def^^b9{^1}
- |\catcode`^^ba\active \let^^ba=\ordo
-% BB
- |\catcode`^^bc\active \def^^bc{\frac14}
- |\catcode`^^bd\active \def^^bd{\frac12}
- |\catcode`^^be\active \def^^be{\frac34}
- |\catcode`^^bf\active \def^^bf{?`}
-\smallbreak
- |\catcode`^^d7\active \let^^d7=\times
- |\catcode`^^f7\active \let^^f7=\div
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Composite letters}
-
- The composite letters acer accessed via ligatures so that they
- are immune to some possible changes in encoding.
-\code
- |\catcode`^^c0\active \def^^c0{\graveglyph A}
- |\catcode`^^c1\active \def^^c1{\acuteglyph A}
- |\catcode`^^c2\active \def^^c2{\circumglyph A}
- |\catcode`^^c3\active \def^^c3{\tildeglyph A}
- |\catcode`^^c4\active \def^^c4{\twodotsglyph A}
- |\catcode`^^c5\active \def^^c5{\ringglyph A}
- |\catcode`^^c6\active \let^^c6=\AE
- |\catcode`^^c7\active \def^^c7{\cedillaglyph C}
- |\catcode`^^c8\active \def^^c8{\graveglyph E}
- |\catcode`^^c9\active \def^^c9{\acuteglyph E}
- |\catcode`^^ca\active \def^^ca{\circumglyph E}
- |\catcode`^^cb\active \def^^cb{\twodotsglyph E}
- |\catcode`^^cc\active \def^^cc{\graveglyph I}
- |\catcode`^^cd\active \def^^cd{\acuteglyph I}
- |\catcode`^^ce\active \def^^ce{\circumglyph I}
- |\catcode`^^cf\active \def^^cf{\twodotsglyph I}
-\smallbreak
-% |\catcode`^^d0\active \chardef^^d0="?? % DH
- |\catcode`^^d1\active \def^^d1{\tildeglyph N}
- |\catcode`^^d2\active \def^^d2{\graveglyph O}
- |\catcode`^^d3\active \def^^d3{\acuteglyph O}
- |\catcode`^^d4\active \def^^d4{\circumglyph O}
- |\catcode`^^d5\active \def^^d5{\tildeglyph O}
- |\catcode`^^d6\active \def^^d6{\twodotsglyph O}
- |\catcode`^^d8\active \let^^d8=\O
- |\catcode`^^d9\active \def^^d9{\graveglyph U}
- |\catcode`^^da\active \def^^da{\acuteglyph U}
- |\catcode`^^db\active \def^^db{\circumglyph U}
- |\catcode`^^dc\active \def^^dc{\twodotsglyph U}
- |\catcode`^^dd\active \def^^dd{\acuteglyph Y}
-% |\catcode`^^de\active \def^^de{TH}
- |\catcode`^^df\active \let^^df=\ss
-\smallbreak
- |\catcode`^^e0\active \def^^e0{\acuteglyph a}
- |\catcode`^^e1\active \def^^e1{\graveglyph a}
- |\catcode`^^e2\active \def^^e2{\circumglyph a}
- |\catcode`^^e3\active \def^^e3{\tildeglyph a}
- |\catcode`^^e4\active \def^^e4{\twodotsglyph a}
- |\catcode`^^e5\active \def^^e5{\ringglyph a}
- |\catcode`^^e6\active \let^^e6=\ae
- |\catcode`^^e7\active \def^^e7{\cedillaglyph c}
- |\catcode`^^e8\active \def^^e8{\graveglyph e}
- |\catcode`^^e9\active \def^^e9{\acuteglyph e}
- |\catcode`^^ea\active \def^^ea{\circumglyph e}
- |\catcode`^^eb\active \def^^eb{\twodotsglyph e}
- |\catcode`^^ec\active \def^^ec{\graveglyph i}
- |\catcode`^^ed\active \def^^ed{\acuteglyph i}
- |\catcode`^^ee\active \def^^ee{\circumglyph i}
- |\catcode`^^ef\active \def^^ef{\twodotsglyph i}
-\smallbreak
-% |\catcode`^^f0\active \def^^f0{dh}
- |\catcode`^^f1\active \def^^f1{\tildeglyph n}
- |\catcode`^^f2\active \def^^f2{\graveglyph o}
- |\catcode`^^f3\active \def^^f3{\acuteglyph o}
- |\catcode`^^f4\active \def^^f4{\circumglyph o}
- |\catcode`^^f5\active \def^^f5{\tildeglyph o}
- |\catcode`^^f6\active \def^^f6{\twodotsglyph o}
- |\catcode`^^f8\active \let^^f8=\o
- |\catcode`^^f9\active \def^^f9{\graveglyph u}
- |\catcode`^^fa\active \def^^fa{\acuteglyph u}
- |\catcode`^^fb\active \def^^fb{\circumglyph u}
- |\catcode`^^fc\active \def^^fc{\twodotsglyph u}
- |\catcode`^^fd\active \def^^fd{\acuteglyph y}
-% |\catcode`^^fe\active \def^^fe{th}
- |\catcode`^^ff\active \def^^ff{\twodotsglyph y}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} ISO 8859-1 support
-%{{{ other hacks
-\section{Modifications to other PDCMAC macros}
-
-
- For typewriter text, less drastic revision of the string is
- necessary.
-\code
- |\def\ttminus{--{}}
- |\let\ttcircum=\asciicircum
- |\let\tttilde=\asciitilde
-\endcode
- Note that ASCII quote and backquote characters are still got
- from accents because a `neutral' quotation mark is not adequate
- for computer listings where both sorts of `quote mark' might be
- appear, with different meanings.
-
-
-%}}} other hacks
-\endcodefile
-\enddocument
-\bye
-%}}} pdcadobe.dtx
-
-%Local variables:
-%fill-prefix: "\t"
-%fold-folded-p: t
-%End:
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 909cec7dfd2..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,300 +0,0 @@
-% pdcadobe.tex 1.3 1995/03/30 -- macros for Adobe style fonts
-
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex",
-%%% version = "1.3",
-%%% date = "1995/03/30",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "Formatting macros for Adobe-style fonts.
-%%% This file was generated by running
-%%% plain TeX on pdcadobe.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcadobe.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "",
-%%% }
-
-\message{1.3 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
-
-\chardef\quotesingle="0D
-\chardef\quotedouble="22
-\chardef\_="5F
-\chardef\asciicircum="80
-\chardef\asciitilde="81
-\chardef\cents="A2
-\chardef\pounds="A3
-\chardef\fractionslash="A4
-\chardef\yen="A5
-\chardef\florin="A6
-\chardef\S="A7
-\chardef\currency="A8
-\chardef\lguillemet="AB
-\chardef\dag="B2
-\chardef\ddag="B3
-\chardef\gbdecimal="B4
-\chardef\P="B6
-\chardef\bullet="B7
-\chardef\quotesinglebase="B8
-\chardef\quotedblbase="B9
-\chardef\rguillemet="BB
-\chardef\ellipsis="BC \def\dots{\ellipsis\thinspace}
-\chardef\permille="BD
-\chardef\orda="E3
-\chardef\ordo="EB
-\mathchardef\backslash="205C
-\edef\lbrace{\delimiter"407B308} \let\{=\lbrace \mathcode`\{="407B
-\mathcode`\|="707C \mathchardef\mid="307C
-\edef\rbrace{\delimiter"507D309} \let\}=\rbrace \mathcode`\}="507D
-\mathchardef\sim="3081
-\mathchardef\cdot="20B4
-\mathchardef\bullet="20B7
-\mathchardef\ldots="60BC
-\chardef\graveglyph="12
-\chardef\acuteglyph="13
-\chardef\hookglyph="14
-\chardef\breveglyph="15
-\chardef\macronglyph="16
-\chardef\ringglyph="17
-\chardef\cedillaglyph="18
-\chardef\circumglyph="5E
-\chardef\tildeglyph="7E
-\chardef\twodotsglyph="7F
-\chardef\dotglyph="C7
-\chardef\hungarianglyph="CD
-\chardef\ogonekglyph="CE
-\chardef\AA="C8 \chardef\aa="98
-\chardef\L="E8 \chardef\l="F8
-\def\.#1{\accent\dotglyph #1}
-\def\H#1{\accent\hungarianglyph"CD #1}
-\ifx\asyfam\UNDEFINED
- \newfam\asyfam
-\fi
-\edef\\{\ifcase\asyfam 0\or 1\or 2\or 3\or 4\or 5\or 6\or 7\or
- 8\or 9\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\fi
-}
-\mathchardef\forall="0\\22
-\mathchardef\exists="0\\24
-\mathchardef\suchthat="0\\27
-\mathcode`*="2\\2A
-\mathcode`,="6\\2C
-\mathcode`-="2\\2D
-\mathcode`.="2\\2E
-\mathcode`/="2\\2F
-\mathcode`<="3\\3C
-\mathcode`>="3\\3E
-\mathchardef\cong="3\\40
-\mathchardef\Alpha="0\\41
-\mathchardef\Beta="0\\42
-\mathchardef\Chi="0\\43
-\mathchardef\Delta="0\\44
-\mathchardef\Epsilon="0\\45
-\mathchardef\Phi="0\\46
-\mathchardef\Gamma="0\\47
-\mathchardef\Eta="0\\48
-\mathchardef\Iota="0\\49
-\mathchardef\vartheta="0\\4A
-\mathchardef\Kappa="0\\4B
-\mathchardef\Lambda="0\\4C
-\mathchardef\Mu="0\\4D
-\mathchardef\Ni="0\\4E
-\mathchardef\Omicron="0\\4F
-\mathchardef\Pi="0\\50
-\mathchardef\Theta="0\\51
-\mathchardef\Rho="0\\52
-\mathchardef\Sigma="0\\53
-\mathchardef\Tau="0\\54
-\mathchardef\varUpsilon="0\\55
-\mathchardef\varsigma="0\\56
-\mathchardef\Omega="0\\57
-\mathchardef\Xi="0\\58
-\mathchardef\Psi="0\\59
-\mathchardef\Zeta="0\\5A
-\mathchardef\therefore="3\\5C
-\mathchardef\perp="3\\5E
-\mathchardef\alpha="0\\61
-\mathchardef\beta="0\\62
-\mathchardef\chi="0\\63
-\mathchardef\delta="0\\64
-\mathchardef\epsilon="0\\65
-\mathchardef\phi="0\\66
-\mathchardef\gamma="0\\67
-\mathchardef\eta="0\\68
-\mathchardef\iota="0\\69
-\mathchardef\varphi="0\\6A
-\mathchardef\kappa="0\\6B
-\mathchardef\lambda="0\\6C
-\mathchardef\mu="0\\6D
-\mathchardef\ni="0\\6E
-\mathchardef\omicron="0\\6F
-\mathchardef\pi="0\\70
-\mathchardef\theta="0\\71
-\mathchardef\rho="0\\72
-\mathchardef\sigma="0\\73
-\mathchardef\tau="0\\74
-\mathchardef\upsilon="0\\75
-\mathchardef\varpi="0\\76
-\mathchardef\omega="0\\77
-\mathchardef\xi="0\\78
-\mathchardef\psi="0\\79
-\mathchardef\zeta="0\\7A
-\mathchardef\sim="3\\7E
-\mathchardef\Upsilon="0\\A1
-\mathcode`'="0\\A2 \mathchardef\minutes="0\\A2
-\mathchardef\leq="3\\A3 \let\le=\leq
-\mathchardef\fractionslash="0\\A4
-\mathchardef\infinity="0\\A5
-\mathchardef\clubsuit="0\\A7
-\mathchardef\diamondsuit="0\\A8
-\mathchardef\heartsuit="0\\A9
-\mathchardef\spadesuit="0\\AA
-\mathchardef\leftrightarrow="3\\AB
-\mathchardef\leftarrow="3\\AC \let\gets=\rightarrow
-\mathchardef\uparrow="3\\AD
-\mathchardef\rightarrow="3\\AE \let\to=\rightarrow
-\mathchardef\downarrow="3\\AF
-\mathchardef\degrees="0\\B0
-\mathchardef\pm="2\\B1
-\mathchardef\seconds="0\\B2
-\mathchardef\geq="3\\B3 \let\ge=\geq
-\mathchardef\times="2\\B4
-\mathchardef\propto="3\\B5
-\mathchardef\partial="0\\B6
-\mathchardef\div="2\\B8
-\mathchardef\neq="3\\B9 \let\ne=\neq
-\mathchardef\equiv="3\\BA
-\mathchardef\approx="3\\BB
-\mathchardef\ldots="6\\BC
-\edef\arrowvert{\delimiter"0\\BD33C }
-\mathchardef\relbar"3\\BE
-\edef\crlf{\noexpand\mathexbox\\BF}
-\mathchardef\aleph="0\\C0
-\mathchardef\Im="0\\C1
-\mathchardef\Re="0\\C2
-\mathchardef\wp="0\\C3
-\mathchardef\otimes="2\\C4
-\mathchardef\oplus="2\\C5
-\mathchardef\emptyset="0\\C6
-\mathchardef\cap="2\\C7
-\mathchardef\cup="2\\C8
-\mathchardef\supset="3\\C9
-\mathchardef\supseteq="3\\CA
-\mathchardef\nsubset="3\\CB
-\mathchardef\subset="3\\CC
-\mathchardef\subseteq="3\\CD
-\mathchardef\in="3\\CE
-\mathchardef\nin="3\\CF
-\mathchardef\angle="0\\D0
-\mathchardef\nabla="0\\D1
-\edef\registered{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D2}
-\edef\copyright{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D3}
-\edef\trademark{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D4}
-\mathchardef\prod="1\\D5
-\edef\sqrt{\radical"\\D6370 }
-\mathchardef\cdot="2\\D7
-\mathchardef\neg="0\\D8 \let\lnot=\neg
-\mathchardef\wedge="3\\D9 \let\land=\wedge
-\mathchardef\vee="3\\DA \let\lor=\vee
-\mathchardef\Leftrightarrow="3\\DB
-\mathchardef\Leftarrow="3\\DC
-\mathchardef\Uparrow="3\\DD
-\mathchardef\Rightarrow="3\\DE
-\mathchardef\Downarrow="3\\DF
-\mathchardef\diamond="3\\E0
-\edef\langle{\delimiter"4\\E130A }
-\mathchardef\sum="1\\E5
-\edef\rangle{\delimiter"5\\F130B }
-\catcode`^^a0\active \let^^a0=~
-\catcode`^^a1\active \def^^a1{!`}
-\catcode`^^a4\active \let^^a4=\currency
-\catcode`^^a8\active \let^^a8=\twodotsglyph
-\catcode`^^a9\active \let^^a9=\copyright
-\catcode`^^aa\active \let^^aa=\orda
-\catcode`^^ac\active \let^^ac=\lnot
-\catcode`^^ad\active \let^^ad=\-
-\catcode`^^ae\active \let^^ae=\registered
-\catcode`^^af\active \let^^af=\macronglyph
-\catcode`^^b0\active \let^^b0=\degrees
-\catcode`^^b1\active \let^^b1=\pm
-\catcode`^^b2\active \def^^b2{^2}
-\catcode`^^b3\active \def^^b3{^3}
-\catcode`^^b4\active \let^^b4=\acuteglyph
-\catcode`^^b5\active \let^^b5=\mu
-\catcode`^^b7\active \let^^b7=\gbdecimal
-\catcode`^^b8\active \let^^b8=\cedillaglyph
-\catcode`^^b9\active \def^^b9{^1}
-\catcode`^^ba\active \let^^ba=\ordo
-\catcode`^^bc\active \def^^bc{\frac14}
-\catcode`^^bd\active \def^^bd{\frac12}
-\catcode`^^be\active \def^^be{\frac34}
-\catcode`^^bf\active \def^^bf{?`}
-\catcode`^^d7\active \let^^d7=\times
-\catcode`^^f7\active \let^^f7=\div
-\catcode`^^c0\active \def^^c0{\graveglyph A}
-\catcode`^^c1\active \def^^c1{\acuteglyph A}
-\catcode`^^c2\active \def^^c2{\circumglyph A}
-\catcode`^^c3\active \def^^c3{\tildeglyph A}
-\catcode`^^c4\active \def^^c4{\twodotsglyph A}
-\catcode`^^c5\active \def^^c5{\ringglyph A}
-\catcode`^^c6\active \let^^c6=\AE
-\catcode`^^c7\active \def^^c7{\cedillaglyph C}
-\catcode`^^c8\active \def^^c8{\graveglyph E}
-\catcode`^^c9\active \def^^c9{\acuteglyph E}
-\catcode`^^ca\active \def^^ca{\circumglyph E}
-\catcode`^^cb\active \def^^cb{\twodotsglyph E}
-\catcode`^^cc\active \def^^cc{\graveglyph I}
-\catcode`^^cd\active \def^^cd{\acuteglyph I}
-\catcode`^^ce\active \def^^ce{\circumglyph I}
-\catcode`^^cf\active \def^^cf{\twodotsglyph I}
-\catcode`^^d1\active \def^^d1{\tildeglyph N}
-\catcode`^^d2\active \def^^d2{\graveglyph O}
-\catcode`^^d3\active \def^^d3{\acuteglyph O}
-\catcode`^^d4\active \def^^d4{\circumglyph O}
-\catcode`^^d5\active \def^^d5{\tildeglyph O}
-\catcode`^^d6\active \def^^d6{\twodotsglyph O}
-\catcode`^^d8\active \let^^d8=\O
-\catcode`^^d9\active \def^^d9{\graveglyph U}
-\catcode`^^da\active \def^^da{\acuteglyph U}
-\catcode`^^db\active \def^^db{\circumglyph U}
-\catcode`^^dc\active \def^^dc{\twodotsglyph U}
-\catcode`^^dd\active \def^^dd{\acuteglyph Y}
-\catcode`^^df\active \let^^df=\ss
-\catcode`^^e0\active \def^^e0{\acuteglyph a}
-\catcode`^^e1\active \def^^e1{\graveglyph a}
-\catcode`^^e2\active \def^^e2{\circumglyph a}
-\catcode`^^e3\active \def^^e3{\tildeglyph a}
-\catcode`^^e4\active \def^^e4{\twodotsglyph a}
-\catcode`^^e5\active \def^^e5{\ringglyph a}
-\catcode`^^e6\active \let^^e6=\ae
-\catcode`^^e7\active \def^^e7{\cedillaglyph c}
-\catcode`^^e8\active \def^^e8{\graveglyph e}
-\catcode`^^e9\active \def^^e9{\acuteglyph e}
-\catcode`^^ea\active \def^^ea{\circumglyph e}
-\catcode`^^eb\active \def^^eb{\twodotsglyph e}
-\catcode`^^ec\active \def^^ec{\graveglyph i}
-\catcode`^^ed\active \def^^ed{\acuteglyph i}
-\catcode`^^ee\active \def^^ee{\circumglyph i}
-\catcode`^^ef\active \def^^ef{\twodotsglyph i}
-\catcode`^^f1\active \def^^f1{\tildeglyph n}
-\catcode`^^f2\active \def^^f2{\graveglyph o}
-\catcode`^^f3\active \def^^f3{\acuteglyph o}
-\catcode`^^f4\active \def^^f4{\circumglyph o}
-\catcode`^^f5\active \def^^f5{\tildeglyph o}
-\catcode`^^f6\active \def^^f6{\twodotsglyph o}
-\catcode`^^f8\active \let^^f8=\o
-\catcode`^^f9\active \def^^f9{\graveglyph u}
-\catcode`^^fa\active \def^^fa{\acuteglyph u}
-\catcode`^^fb\active \def^^fb{\circumglyph u}
-\catcode`^^fc\active \def^^fc{\twodotsglyph u}
-\catcode`^^fd\active \def^^fd{\acuteglyph y}
-\catcode`^^ff\active \def^^ff{\twodotsglyph y}
-\def\ttminus{--{}}
-\let\ttcircum=\asciicircum
-\let\tttilde=\asciitilde
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmdoc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmdoc.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 843a8c96361..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmdoc.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
-% pdccmdoc.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "pdccmdoc.tex",
-%%% version = "1.2",
-%%% date = "1995/03/30",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "Top-level macro file for documents set in
-%%% Computer Modern fonts.
-%%% This macro file was generated by running plain
-%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex, pdchyex.tex,
-%%% pdcimth.tex, pdccmsub.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
-%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdcdoc.def",
-%%%}
-
-\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
-
-\input pdcimth
-\input pdcmigr
-\input pdcfmt2
-\input pdchyex
-\input pdcoput5
-\input pdcfsel
-\input pdccmsub
-\autoloadfonts
-\def\STYheadingT{%
- \m{rm}{cmss}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
- \f{it}{cmssi}\f{tt}{cmtt}\f{mf}{logo}\f{mfi}{logosl}%
-}
-\font\headingrm=cmss17 \font\headingit=cmssi17
-\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1200}{14pt}
- {small}{tiny}
-\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1728}{20pt}
- {subheading}{small}
-\def\STYbodyT{\m{rm}{cmr}\m{it}{cmti}%
- \m{bf}{cmbx}\@\f{bi}{cmbxti10}%
- \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
- \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
- \f{tt}{cmtt}\@\f{ttb}{cmsltt10}%
-}
-\font\tinytt=cmtt8 at 7pt
-\font\bodysy=cmsy10 at 12pt
-\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny}
-\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt}
-\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000
-\bodyfonts
-{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 }
-\def\PS{PostScript}
-\input pdcdoc.def
-\inputifexists{pdccmdoc.cfg}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmlft.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmlft.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 905b7d04627..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmlft.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
-% pdccmlft.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "pdccmlft.tex",
-%%% version = "1.2",
-%%% date = "1995/03/30",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "Top-level macro file for documents set in
-%%% Computer Modern fonts.
-%%% This macro file was generated by running plain
-%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex, pdchyex.tex,
-%%% pdcimth.tex, pdccmsub.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
-%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdclft.def",
-%%%}
-
-\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
-
-\input pdcimth
-\input pdcmigr
-\input pdcfmt2
-\input pdchyex
-\input pdcoput5
-\input pdcfsel
-\input pdccmsub
-\autoloadfonts
-\def\STYheadingT{%
- \m{rm}{cmss}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
- \f{it}{cmssi}\f{tt}{cmtt}\f{mf}{logo}\f{mfi}{logosl}%
-}
-\font\headingrm=cmss17 \font\headingit=cmssi17
-\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1200}{14pt}
- {small}{tiny}
-\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1728}{20pt}
- {subheading}{small}
-\def\STYbodyT{\m{rm}{cmr}\m{it}{cmti}%
- \m{bf}{cmbx}\@\f{bi}{cmbxti10}%
- \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
- \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
- \f{tt}{cmtt}\@\f{ttb}{cmsltt10}%
-}
-\font\tinytt=cmtt8 at 7pt
-\font\bodysy=cmsy10 at 12pt
-\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny}
-\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt}
-\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000
-\bodyfonts
-{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 }
-\def\PS{PostScript}
-\input pdclft.def
-\inputifexists{pdccmlft.cfg}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmsub.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmsub.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index a2712d5c445..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmsub.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-% pdcmisc.dtx 1.4 1995/03/30 -- CM subs for PS glyphs
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex",
-%%% version = "1.4",
-%%% date = "1995/03/30",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "Macros for simulating some PostScript characters
-%%% using glyphs form the Computer Modern family.
-%%% This file was generated by running
-%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "",
-%%% }
-
-\message{1.4 1995/03/30}
-
-\dimendef\dimena=0
-\def\pounds{{\it\char36 }}
-\def\yen{{%
- \ooalign{%
- \hfil\raise0.25ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle=$}\hfil\crcr
- \hfil Y\hfil
- }%
-}}
-\def\cents{\leavevmode\hbox{\rm\rlap/c}}
-\def\currency{{%
- \ooalign{%
- \hskip-0.1em
- \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox202}\hskip-0.1em\crcr
- \hfil \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox20E}\hfil
- }%
-}}
-\def\florin{{\it f\/}}
-\def\circledletter#1#2{{%
- \ooalign{%
- \hfil\kern#1\raise0.00ex \hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm #2$}\hfil\crcr
- \mathhexbox20D%
- }%
-}}
-\def\registered{\circledletter{0.02em}R}
-\def\copyright{\circledletter{-0.045em}C}
-\def\lguillemet{%
- \leavevmode
- \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\langle\!\langle$}%
-}
-\def\rguillemet{%
- \leavevmode
- \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rangle\!\rangle$}%
-}
-\def\permille{{%
- \setbox0 \hbox{/}%
- \flushtop{$\scriptstyle0\!$}/%
- \lower\dp0 \hbox{$\!\scriptstyle00$}%
-}}
-\def\gbdecimal{\mathhexbox201}
-\def\orda{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b a}}
-\def\ordo{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b o}}
-\let\sc=\relax
-\let\csc=\relax
-\let\mc=\relax
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 2261d583f4e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,881 +0,0 @@
-% pdccode.dtx -- documentation & source for pdccode.tex -*-tex-*-
-
-%%%@TeX-document-file {
-%%% title = "PDCCODE -- Documented TeX Macros",
-%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.dtx",
-%%% version = "$Revision: 1.6 $",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% date = "$Date: 1995/03/30 16:08:32 $",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for
-%%% the TeX definitions file pdccode.tex.
-%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both a copy of the
-%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute
-%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
-%%% General Public License as published by the Free
-%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
-%%% or (at your option) any later version.",
-%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
-%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
-%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
-%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
-%%% License for more details.",
-%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
-%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write
-%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
-%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
-%%%}
-
-%{{{ pdccode
-%{{{ preamble
-
-\relax
-\input pdccode
-\document
-\rcs$Id: pdccode.dtx,v 1.6 1995/03/30 16:08:32 pdc Exp $\endrcs
-
-\codefile{tmp.tex}
-
-\defverbatim\"
-
-%}}} preamble
-%{{{ introduction
-
-\author{P. Damian Cugley}
-\title{PDCCODE---Documented \TeX\ Macros}
-\section{Introduction}
-
- PDCCODE is a simpler and less featureful system than the
- \LaTeX~2e Docstrip package, but uses the same file suffix
- `|dtx|'. Lines between |\code| and |\endcode| markers are
- written to a file (set with the |\codefile| command), as well as
- being printed `verbatim' in document. Thus one \TeX\ pass
- generates both the macro file(s) and a |dvi| file.
-
- This document---generated from |pdccode.dtx|---is a |dtx| file
- for PDCCODE itself, the file of macros used by my |dtx| files.
- It cannot be used to generate |pdccode.tex| directly (\TeX\
- might choke halfway through overwriting |pdccode.tex| with a new
- version, leaving no |pdccode.tex| to generate |pdccode.tex|
- with). Instead it produces its copy as `|tmp.tex|', and
- `|tmp.tex|' can be compared to the supplied |pdccode.tex|.
-
-\subsec{How to read this document}
-
- The |dtx| files are programs (in \TeX's macro language) that
- generate new programs (the macro files that will be used in
- documents). The macros described in {\it this} file are used
- when generating macro files. So, for example, the |\rcs| and
- |\fileversion| macros used to extract identification information
- from the |dtx| file are not defined in any of the generated
- macro files.
-
-\subsec{Background}
-
- For some time I~have been using a collection of macro files to
- typeset various types of document with \TeX. After using them
- in Malvern\footnote*{Malvern is a sanserif font family
- implemented in METAFONT. The current version is release $1.2$.}
- releases I have discovered that they had been merged with the
- Unix\TeX\ macros directory. Originally I~had never intended
- that these files be used by anyone but me---they were full of
- hacks and messy code and definitions I~don't use anymore. Since
- then I~thought of tidying up the macros enough that I'm not
- embarassed by them, but the task of doing this {\it and}
- documenting their use was daunting.
-
- After installing \LaTeX~2e on my new computer, I~decided to have
- a go at adapting the idea of `documented \TeX\ macros' files to
- plain \TeX. This way I~could clean up the macros and document
- them in a systematic fashion.
-
- The \LaTeX\ Docstrip/Doc-option approach evolved through several
- different models and so is a complex format. Docstrip (a
- program written in \TeX's macro language) was used to strip
- comments from |doc| files making |sty| files, and the \LaTeX\
- Doc-option separately extracted \LaTeX\ code from comments in
- |doc| files to make printed documentation. Both Doc and
- Docstrip required the user to type in file names whenever they
- ran---which made them useless for batch processing. So separate
- driver files (with suffixes |drv| and |ins|) were added to
- distributions. Finally, the |doc| files, which used to be
- usable as |sty| files (just a little slower because of the
- comments) were have been changed to be documents instead (making
- |drv| files redundant, once the |ltxdoc.cfg| configuration file
- was added to the conventions) and given a new suffix |dtx|.
-
- The system I~use---called PDCCODE---is simpler and faster, but
- omits indexes, special change-log commands, and all the features
- that come with \LaTeX\ formatting. It doesn't have Docstrip's
- {\it options}\/ feature, which allows several largely-similar
- files to be generated from the same source.\footnote\dag{I do
- have an experimental version |pdccode2.tex| which does this but
- I~am not particularly happy with it yet.} It doesn't print
- statistics at the end, or do checksums, or even print comforting
- lines of asterisks and percent signs in the log file.
-
- My |dtx| files use a single macro file |pdccode.tex| which
- defines a `code mode' where lines are written to the macro file
- as well as appearing in the printed documentation. One pass
- generates both the macro file and the documentation in |dvi|
- form. The |pdccode.tex| file also includes enough layout
- commands to typeset the comments.
-%}}}
-%{{{ using pdccode
-\section{Summary of using PDCCODE}
-
- These commands are explained in more detail below.
-
-\subsec{A skeleton code file}
-
- A code file using |pdccode.tex| will look something like this:
-$$\it
-\halign{\indent#\hfil\cr
- "%" name "--" one line description\cr
-\noalign{\smallskip}
- "%%%@TeX-document-file {"\cr
- header comments for the document\cr
- "%%%}"\cr
-\noalign{\smallskip}
- "\relax"\cr
- "\input pdccode"\cr
- "\document"\cr
- "\rcs$" RCS identification string "$\endrcs"\cr
- "\codefile{" file name "}"\cr
- "\author{" author name "}"\cr
- "\title{" title for the document "}"\cr
-\noalign{\smallbreak}
- "\section{Introduction}"\cr
- introduction\cr
-\noalign{\smallbreak}
- "\section{File identification}"\cr
- "\code"\cr
- " \|\% " file name "\fileversion~\filedate~--" one line desc\cr
- " |"\cr
- " |%%%@TeX-definition-file {"\cr
- " " header comments for macro file\cr
- " |%%%}"\cr
- " |"\cr
- " \|\\message\{\fileversion~<\fileauthor~\filedate>\}"\cr
- " |"\cr
- "\endcode"\cr
-\noalign{\smallbreak}%
- definitions and commentary\cr
-\noalign{\smallbreak}%
- "\endcodefile"\cr
- "\enddocument"\cr
- "\bye"\cr
-}$$
-
-\subsec{Commands in code sections}
-
- Code sections start with |\code| and end with |\endcode|. Before
- the first |\code| you must do |\codefile{|\<file name>|}| to
- specify the file.
-
- Vertical mode material may be used between lines (e.g.,
- |\smallbreaks|). Unexpanded code lines are introduced with "|",
- expanded lines with "\|". In expanded lines, use "\{", "\}",
- "\\", "\%", "\~" for those characters, "~" for a single space.
-
-\subsec{Commands in commentary}
-
- Most of the commentary will be typeset using the conventions of
- plain \TeX.
-
- |\author{|\<text>|}| (must precede |\title|)
-
- |\title{|\<heading>|}|
-
- |\section{|\<heading>|}|
-
- |\subsec{|\<heading>|}|
-
- |\noindenttrue|
-
- |\footnote|
-
- |\defverbatim|\<one-character control sequence>
-
- |$|\<number>|\mm$| |$|\<number>|\em$| |$|\<number>|\pt$|
- |$|\<number>|\inch$|
-
- |\<|\<name>|>| |\cs{|\<name>|}|
- |\arg{|\<argument name>|}|
-
- |\TeX| |\LaTeX| |\LaTeX~2e|
-
- |\notepar| \<paragraph> |\endnotepar|
-
-
-%}}} using pdccode
-%{{{ file identification
-\section{File identification}
-
- Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the
- file.
-\code \catcode`\"=12
- \|\% pdccode.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- self-documenting TeX macros
- |
- |%%%@TeX-definition-file {
- |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex",
- \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
- \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
- |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
- |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
- |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
- |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
- |%%% codetable = "USASCII",
- |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
- |%%% supported = "Maybe",
- |%%% abstract = "Macros for documented TeX macros (DTX files).
- |%%% This file was generated by running
- \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx",
- |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
- \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the
- |%%% package it came in.",
- |%%% dependencies = "",
- |%%% }
- |
- \|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\}
- |
-\endcode
-%}}} file id
-
-\bigskip\noindent
- We start by making a nickname for a scratch register. This is
- |\toks@| in plain \TeX; this definition gives it a name I~can
- use without catcode hackery.
-\code
- |\toksdef\toksa=0
-\endcode
-
-%{{{ rcs support
-
-\section{RCS Support}
-
- RCS (Revision Control System) is a free source code control
- system which is available from the Free Software Foundation.
- It inserts keyword-value pairs enclosed in dollar signs into the
- source code. This command extracts the file's version, date,
- author and locker (if there is one). It is used like this:
-$$\centerline{\vbox{\tt\def~{\char32 \ignorespaces}
- \halign{#\hfil\cr
- \cs{rcs}\$Id:~\<name>,v~\<version>~\<date>~\<ignored>\quad\cr
- \hfill~\<author>~\<ignored>~{\rm[}\<locker>~{\rm]}\$\cs{endrcs}\cr
-}}} $$
- The \<locker> field is non-empty iff the file is `locked'
- (meaning it has been edited and the changes are not checked in
- yet). The |\filename| macro is defined, even though it will
- almost certainly be identical to |\jobname|.
-\code
- |\def\rcs#1: #2,v #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8$#9\endrcs{
- | \def\filename{#2}
- | \def\fileversion{#3}
- | \def\filedate{#4}
- | \def\fileauthor{#6}
- | \def\filelocker{#8}
- |}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} rcs support
-%{{{ verbatim text
-\section{Verbatim text}
-
- Verbatim text is text that is printed identically to the
- characters in the manuscript file. In the code sections, a
- vertical bar is used to make lines for the code file. In the
- documentation, the vertical bar is used as a self-matching
- verbatim mode character.
-
- These definitions should be the same as the corresponding code
- in |pdcfmt2.dtx|.
-
-\subsec{Lists of active characters}
-
- The verbatim text macros need to know if any characters have
- been made special apart from the usual ones. This command tells
- the verbatim macros that |#1| is an active char; in addition to
- setting its catcode, this makes sure that the character will be
- re-catcoded appropriately when in verbatim mode. |#1| should be
- a something that will work after `|`|'; usually this means a
- one-character control sequence.
-\code
- |\def\declareactivechar#1{%
- | \toksa\expandafter{\verbatimplains\do#1}%
- | \edef\verbatimplains{\the\toksa }%
- | \catcode`#1\active
- |}
-\endcode
-
- Two list macros in the style of |\dospecials| are defined. The
- first is for characters that must be set to catcode~12, such as
- `|\|', `|{|', `|}|', `|_|', `|$|', `|#|', `|&|', and `|%|'. The
- other is for a few characters that are given catcode~13, such as
- `|`|', `|'|', `|~|', `|^|' and SP.
-\code
- |\def\verbatimplains{\do\\\do\{\do\}\do\_\do\$\do\#\do\&\do\%}
- |\def\verbatimactives{\do\`\do\'\do\~\do\^\do\ }
-\smallbreak
- |\chardef\other=12
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Setting up verbatim mode}
-
- This is a macro common to various verbatim text modes. The
- default spacing of whatever font is used, without any
- adjustments of spacefactor for punctuation. The characters
- `|`|', `|'|', `|~|', and `|^|' produce slightly lowered glyphs.
-\code
- |\newtoks\everyverbatim
-\smallbreak
- |\bgroup \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 \toksa={\egroup
- | \def\setupverbatim{%
- | \frenchspacing
- | \spaceskip0pt \xspaceskip0pt % use spacing of font
- | \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##112 }\verbatimplains
- | \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1\active }\verbatimactives
- | \let`\ttlq \let'\ttrq
- | \let~\tttilde \let^\ttcircum
- | \the\everyverbatim
- | }
- |}\the\toksa
-\endcode
-
- Here are the definitions for the munged glyphs. These are only
- necessary in CM-Typewriter-like fonts; using something
- like Courier, these definitions could probably be omitted.
-
- The names `rq' and `lq' are based on the use of |\lq| and |\rq|
- in plain \TeX. An alternative definition for |\ttrq| would be
- |\chardef\ttrq=13|, producing `{\tt\char13 }'.
-\code
- |\def\ttlq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char18 }}
- |\def\ttrq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char19 }}
- |\def\tttilde{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\~ }}
- |\def\ttcircum{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\^ }}
-\endcode
- This makes the difference between |`'^~| and
- {\tt`'\char`\^\char`\~}.\footnote*{It turns out that on some
- \TeX\ systems, the CMTT font has been hacked to have an
- ASCII-style reverse-apostrohe-cum-grave-accent as character~96
- and a matching apostrophe-cum-acute-accent as charcter~39,
- thereby correcting the defects that my definitions of |\ttlq|
- and |\ttrq| address. But such modified fonts are
- nonstandard---they should {\it not} be called CMTT---and should
- be replaced.}
-
-\subsec{Defining a self-matching character for verbatim text}
-
- A macro for defining a self-matching verbatim character (I~got
- the idea of a macro for declaring verbatim characters from the
- \LaTeX~2e documentation macros). |#1| must be a one-character
- control sequence. If it isn't active already, then
- |\declareactivechar| is applied to it first.
-\code
- |\def\defverbatim#1{%
- | \ifcat\noexpand#1\noexpand~\else \declareactivechar#1 \fi
- | \begingroup \uccode`\~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
- | \def~{%
- | \leavevmode
- | \begingroup \tt \setupverbatim
- | \catcode`#1\active \let~\endgroup
- | }%
- | }}\the\toksa
- |}
-\endcode
- Note that there must be a font called |\tt| for it to switch to.
- (The catcode of |#1| is set to 13 after calling |\setupverbatim|
- because |#1| will be included in |\verbatimplains|.)
-
- Finally, we define vertical bar as the conventional
- self-matching verbatim-mode character.
-\code
- |\defverbatim\|
-\smallbreak
- |\hyphenchar\tentt=-1
-\endcode
- Both |\defverbatim| and |\defineactivechar| have local scope.
-
-%}}} verbatim text
-%{{{ code sections
-%{{{ intro
-\section{Code sections}
-
- The markers |\code| \dots |\endcode| mark code to be written to
- the definition file. Each line starts with either "|" or "\|"
- and finishes with the end of the line in the manuscript file.
-
- Lines that start with "|" are written out as-is; no macro
- expansion is allowed. This is how the vast majority of lines
- are done.
-
- Lines starting "\|" are expanded. This is so that things like
- the current version ID (extracted from the RCS identification
- line or set with |\def|) may be included in the code file.
- Within such an expanded line, the following macros are defined:
- $$\halign{\indent#\hfil&&\quad#\hfil\cr
- |\%|& |%|& per cent sign&
- |\{|& |{|& left brace&
- |\}|& |}|& right brace\cr
- |\\|& |\|& backslash&
- |~|& \tt\char32 & space&
- |\~|& |~|& tilde\cr
- }
- $$
- (This list is probably incomplete.)
-%}}} intro
-%{{{ code file name
-
-\subsec{Setting the codefile name}
-
- Before the first code section, the |\codefile{|\<file name>|}|
- command specifies the code file. The last code section should
- be followed by |\endcodefile|. Only one code file may be open
- at a time.
-\code
- |\newwrite\CODEwrite
-\smallbreak
- |\def\codefile#1{
- | \ifeof\CODEwrite\else \endcodefile \fi
- | \def\thecodefile{#1} \openout\CODEwrite=#1
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\endcodefile{
- | \message{Code written on \thecodefile.}
- | \closeout\CODEwrite
- |}
-\endcode
-%}}} code file name
-%{{{ code sections
-
-\subsec{Code sections}
-
- Switching to `code mode' is easy, because most of the work is
- really done by the "|" and "\|" commands.
-
-\code
- |\def\code{
- | \smallskip
- | \begingroup
- | \let|\CODEline \let\|\CODElinex
- | \let\{=\CODElb \let\}=\CODErb \let\\=\CODEbslash
- | \def~{ } \let\~\CODEtilde
- | \the\everycode
- | \obeylines
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\endcode{
- | \smallbreak
- | \endgroup
- |}
-\endcode
-%}}} code sections
-%{{{ code lines
-\subsec{Code lines}
-
- This is the definition for unexpanded code lines.
-\code
- |\def\CODEline{%
- | \begingroup % matched by \CODElinei
- | \setupverbatim \catcode`\|\other
- | \CODElinei
- |}
-\endcode
-
- In |\CODElinei|, We must redefine the characters (such as |`|)
- that are active within verbatim text to expand to their
- catcode-12 equivalents when they are written to the code file
- currectly.
-
- Since one of these is |^|, we temporarily give |@| the meaning
- of |^| so that we may safely change the catcode of |^|.
-\code
- |\begingroup\catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
- | \catcode\lq\@=\catcode\lq\^ \catcode\lq\^=\active
- | \catcode\lq\@@M=\active \toksa={\endgroup %
- | \def\CODElinei#1@@M{%
- | \begingroup\let`\lq \let'\rq %
- | \let^\CODEcircum \let~ \CODEtilde%
- | \edef\tmp{#1}%
- | \write\CODEwrite\expandafter{\tmp}%
- | \endgroup %
- | \indent\the\everycodeline #1\par %
- | \endgroup % matches \CODEline
- | }%
- |}\the\toksa
-\endcode
-
- The definition for |\CODElinex| (expanded code lines) is much
- simpler:
-\code
- |\begingroup\catcode`\^^M=13 \toksa={\endgroup %
- | \def\CODElinex#1^^M{%
- | \edef\tmp{\write\CODEwrite{#1}}\tmp %
- | {\indent\the\everycodeline #1\par}%
- | }%
- |} \the\toksa
-\endcode
-%}}} code lines
-%{{{ catcode hacks
-\subsec{Macros for making category-12 characters}
-
- For characters that are active in verbatim mode (like |`|), or
- which must be specially generated in expanded code lines (such
- as braces generated with {\tt\cs{\char123 }}), we have a
- `|\CODE|-' macro that generates an explicit character token with
- catcode~12.
-
-\code
- |\begingroup\catcode`\/=0 \catcode`\\=\other /toksa={/endgroup
- | /def/CODEbslash{\}
- |}/the/toksa
-\smallbreak
- |\begingroup\catcode`\^=\other \toksa={\endgroup
- | \def\CODEcircum{^}
- |}\the\toksa
-\smallbreak
- |\begingroup\catcode`\~=\other \toksa={\endgroup
- | \def\CODEtilde{~}
- |}\the\toksa
-\smallbreak
- |\begingroup\catcode`\%=\other \toksa={\endgroup
- | \def\%{%}
- |}\the\toksa
-\smallbreak
- |\begingroup\catcode`\~=\other \toksa={\endgroup
- | \def\CODEtilde{~}
- |}\the\toksa
-\smallbreak
- |\begingroup\catcode`\[=1 \catcode`\]=2
- | \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other
- | \toksa=[\endgroup
- | \def\CODElb[{] \def\CODErb[}]
- |]\the\toksa
-\endcode
-%}}} catcode hacks
-%{{{ customization
-\subsec{Customization}
-
- The token list register |\everycode| is expanded at the start of
- every code section, the token list register |\everycodeline| at
- the start of every code line. The default definitions select
- typewriter font for the code listings, with each line numbered.
-\code
- |\newtoks\everycode
- |\newtoks\everycodeline
-\smallbreak
- |\everycode{\tt \baselineskip=0.8\baselineskip \lineskiplimit=0pt }
-\smallbreak
- |\newcount\lineno
- |\everycodeline{\llap{$ \global\advance\lineno1
- | \scriptstyle\the\lineno $\enspace}%
- | \mark\expandafter{\the\lineno}}
-\endcode
-%}}} customization
-%}}} code sections
-%{{{ formating
-%{{{ intro
-\section{Layout}
-
- The PDCCODE macros include enough basic formatting commands to
- make a simple document---since this file needs to be
- self-contained. The formatting is fairly primitive, so that
- |pdccode.tex| will not be excessively long.
-
- The text is set in the default plain \TeX\ fonts: 10-point
- Computer Modern Roman. Titles are in CM Sans Serif Bold
- Extended, headings in CMSS Demibold Condensed, and subheadings
- in CMSS Italic: all of these are standard fonts which should be
- available on all \TeX\ systems.
-
- The line width is wide enough that code lines do not need to be
- printed in a reduced font (which looks silly).
-
- the first tokenm of a document is |\relax| and everything except
- the initial |\input| and final |\bye| in the document is
- enclosed in |\document|\dots|\enddocument|. This is so that
- documents using the PDCCODE conventions can be embedded within a
- another document which by redefining these tokens.
-\code
- |\let\document\relax \let\enddocument\relax
-\endcode
-
- I have to set some \TeX~3 parameters because we don't seem to
- have definitions for them in the local version of |plain.tex|.
-\code
- |\lefthyphenmin=3 \righthyphenmin=2 \errorcontextlines10000
-\endcode
-
-%}}} intro
-%{{{ layout
-\subsec{Layout}
-
- The text width is wide enough for 72-character code lines.
-\code
- |\parindent=2em \hsize=36\fontdimen6\tentt \advance\hsize\parindent
-\endcode
- A largish left margin is used set---perhaps readers will find it
- useful for writing comments.
-\code
- |\hoffset=210mm \advance\hoffset-\hsize \advance\hoffset-25mm
- |\newdimen\leftmargin \leftmargin=\hoffset \advance\leftmargin-25mm
- |\advance\hoffset-1in
-\endcode
-
- The vertical margins are set so that if the file is formatted
- for A4 ($297\mm$) paper and fed into a driver which thinks it is
- formatted for American Letter ($11\inch$) paper no information
- will be lost. We allow for $7\mm$ unprintable area at the edges
- of paper (this is reasonable for a laser printer), and for the
- headline being $24\pt + 6\pt - 10\pt = 20\pt$ above the top of
- the text. (The $6\pt$ allows for the height of the headline,
- which is in 7-pt type.)
-\code
- |\voffset=297mm \advance\voffset-11in
- |\advance\voffset7mm \advance\voffset20pt
- |\vsize=297mm \advance\vsize-2\voffset \advance\vsize-2\baselineskip
- |\advance\voffset-1in
-\endcode
-
- We use ragged-right (ranged-left) printing. (Readability
- studies have indicated that ragged-right printing is, if
- anything, easier to read than with both sides aligned.) To do
- this we remove the stretch and shrink components of the font we
- use, and make the right margin stretchable.
-\code
- |\def\do#1{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt }
- |\do\tenrm \do\tenit \do\tenbf
-\smallbreak
- |\rightskip=0pt plus 2em minus 2pt \adjdemerits=0 \tolerance=500
- |\parfillskip=0pt plus 0.8\hsize
-\endcode
-%}}} layout
-%{{{ title and headline
-\subsec{Title and headline}
-
- The author and title info are printed at the top of the first
- page---in lieu of a separate title page---and the title goes in
- the headline of subsequent pages, followed by the version ID and
- date as extracted from the RCS identification string. If the
- file locker is non-empty (i.e., the file is being edited), an
- `e' is appended to the version ID in the headline.
-\code
- |\def\author#1{\def\theauthor{#1}} \author{P. Damian Cugley}
-\smallbreak
- |\font\titlefont=cmssbx10 scaled \magstep3
-\smallbreak
- |\def\title#1{
- | \vglue2\baselineskip
- | \begingroup \parindent-\leftmargin \hyphenpenalty10000 \titlefont
- | #1\smallskip
- | \endgroup
- | \leftline{Version \fileversion,
- | last changed \fileauthor\space \mungedate\filedate}
- | \ifx\filelocker\empty\else
- | \leftline{Edited by \filelocker\unskip\ \today}
- | \fi
- | \medskip
- | \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule
- | \medskip
- | \rightline{\theauthor}
- | \bigskip
- | \headline{\hfil\global\headline{%
- | \sevenbf \hskip-\leftmargin \themarks \hfil #1
- | \fileversion
- | \ifx\filelocker\empty
- | \space\mungedate\filedate
- | \else
- | e\space\today
- | \fi
- | }}
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\themarks{%
- | \ifx\firstmark\empty\else
- | \firstmark
- | \ifx\firstmark\botmark \else --\botmark \fi
- | \fi
- |}
-\endcode
-
- Some macros for printing the date. The |\mungedate| macro
- converts from RCS's format (using slashes) to ISO format (using
- short dashes).
-\code
- |\def\today{\mungedate{\number\year/\twodigits\month/\twodigits\day}}
- |\def\twodigits#1{\ifnum#1<10 0\fi \number#1}
- |\def\mungedate#1{$ \textfont0=\font \mathcode`/="7B #1 $}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} title and author
-%{{{ sectioning
-\subsec{Sectioning}
-
- The sectioning commands do no more than generate numbered
- headings---there are no tables of contents or marks required.
-\code
- |\font\secfont=cmssdc10 at 12pt
- |\font\subsecfont=cmssi10
-\smallbreak
- |\newcount\seccount
- |\newcount\subseccount
-\smallbreak
- |\def\section#1{%
- | \advance\seccount1 \subseccount=0
- | \bigbreak
- | \begingroup
- | \secfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
- | \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
- | \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.\enspace}#1
- | \medskip
- | \endgroup
- | \noindenttrue
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\subsec#1{%
- | \advance\subseccount1
- | \medbreak
- | \begingroup
- | \subsecfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
- | \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
- | \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.%
- | \number\subseccount.\enspace}#1
- | \nobreak\smallskip
- | \endgroup
- | \noindenttrue
- |}
-\endcode
-
- Here's a simple hack to remove the indentation of the first
- paragraph following a section heading.
-\code
- |\newif\ifnoindent
-\smallbreak
- |\everypar{%
- | \ifnoindent
- | {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse
- | \fi
- |}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} sectioning
-%{{{ footnotes
-\subsec{Footnotes}
-
- Plain \TeX's footnote command is adjusted to use a new parameter
- to specify the value of |\rightskip| in footnotes.\footnote*{The
- default definition sets |\rightskip| to $0\pt$, which is
- moderately disastrous given that spaces cannot stretch or
- shrink.} It was the trickiness involved in changing definitions
- like this that persuaded me to not use `|@|' characters in macro
- files.
-\code
- |\newskip\footnoterightskip \footnoterightskip=\rightskip
-\smallbreak
- |\catcode`@=11
- |\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup
- | \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
- | \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
- | \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM
- | \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\footnoterightskip
- | \spaceskip\z@skip \xspaceskip\z@skip \rm
- | \textindent{#1}\footstrut\futurelet\next\fo@t}
- |\catcode`@=11
-\endcode
- This definition is a drop-in replacement for the one in {\it\TeX
- book} Appendix~B (p.\thinspace363 in my copy).
-
-%}}} footnotes
-%{{{ abbrevs
-\subsec{Miscellaneous abbreviations}
-
- The |\<| macro for writing the names of syntactic entities (as
- \<foo>) is like in {\it\TeX book} Appendix~E. The |\cs| macro
- prints a control sequence name; I use this where the easier
- dodge of writing "|\foo|" won't work (e.g., in the argument to
- another macro). Similarly |\arg| places its argument in
- typewriter-style braces. The |\pt| macro works in maths mode.
-\code
- |\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$}}
- |\def\cs#1{\leavevmode\hbox{\tt\char`\\#1}}
- |\def\arg#1{\leavevmode\hbox{{\tt\char`\{}#1{\tt\char`\}}}}
- |\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}} \def\em{\,{\rm em}} \def\mm{\,{\rm mm}}
- |\def\inch{''}
-\endcode
-
- To make a version of the \LaTeX\ logo that should work
- acceptably with a range of fonts ({\it\LaTeX}, {\bf\LaTeX},
- {\subsecfont\LaTeX}), I~first define a macro for raising letters
- until they are flush with the prevailing cap height. I also
- loosen up the `{\it\TeX}\/' logo (so that it also works with
- sanserif fonts) and make it set the spacefactor to 1000 (to
- override \TeX's assumption that a full stop following a capital
- $X$ isn't the end of a sentence).
-\code
- |\def\flushtop#1{%
- | \leavevmode
- | \begingroup
- | \setbox0=\hbox{#1}\setbox2=\hbox{X}%
- | \dimen0=\ht2 \advance\dimen0-\ht0
- | \raise\dimen0 \box0
- | \endgroup
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em \lower0.5ex \hbox{E}X\spacefactor1000 }
- |\def\LaTeX{L\kern-0.1em \flushtop{a}\TeX}
-\endcode
-
- Occasional paragraphs are written in italics and marked with
- `note'.
-\notepar
- The command says `notepar' not just `note' because in my macro
- files I~use \/|\note| for numbered footnotes (\/{\rm \TeX book},
- Exercise~15.12).\footnote*{Footnotes in |dtx| files are produced
- with the plain |\footnote| command.}
-
- Notes may occasionally be more than one paragraph long.
-\endnotepar
-\code
- |\def\notepar{
- | \smallskip
- | \begingroup
- | \leftskip2\parindent \advance\rightskip\parindent minus \parindent
- | \noindent\kern-\parindent{\bf Note}\quad\it
- | \ignorespaces
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\endnotepar{
- | \smallbreak
- | \endgroup
- |}
-\endcode
-%}}} abbrevs
-%}}} formatting
-
-\bigskip\noindent
- The file is finished with an |\endinput| command; this can be
- used by other prgorams to check that this file hasn't been
- truncated by \TeX\ coming to a halt part-way through processing
- the |dtx| file.
-\code
- |\endinput
-\endcode
-\endcodefile
-\enddocument
-\bye
-%}}} pdccode
-
-%Local variables:
-%fill-prefix: " "
-%fold-folded-p: t
-%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index aaeb25e3ea9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,263 +0,0 @@
-% pdccode.tex 1.6 1995/03/30 -- self-documenting TeX macros
-
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex",
-%%% version = "1.6",
-%%% date = "1995/03/30",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "Macros for documented TeX macros (DTX files).
-%%% This file was generated by running
-%%% plain TeX on pdccode.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdccode.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "",
-%%% }
-
-\message{1.6 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
-
-\toksdef\toksa=0
-\def\rcs#1: #2,v #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8$#9\endrcs{
- \def\filename{#2}
- \def\fileversion{#3}
- \def\filedate{#4}
- \def\fileauthor{#6}
- \def\filelocker{#8}
-}
-\def\declareactivechar#1{%
- \toksa\expandafter{\verbatimplains\do#1}%
- \edef\verbatimplains{\the\toksa }%
- \catcode`#1\active
-}
-\def\verbatimplains{\do\\\do\{\do\}\do\_\do\$\do\#\do\&\do\%}
-\def\verbatimactives{\do\`\do\'\do\~\do\^\do\ }
-\chardef\other=12
-\newtoks\everyverbatim
-\bgroup \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 \toksa={\egroup
- \def\setupverbatim{%
- \frenchspacing
- \spaceskip0pt \xspaceskip0pt % use spacing of font
- \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##112 }\verbatimplains
- \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1\active }\verbatimactives
- \let`\ttlq \let'\ttrq
- \let~\tttilde \let^\ttcircum
- \the\everyverbatim
- }
-}\the\toksa
-\def\ttlq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char18 }}
-\def\ttrq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char19 }}
-\def\tttilde{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\~ }}
-\def\ttcircum{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\^ }}
-\def\defverbatim#1{%
- \ifcat\noexpand#1\noexpand~\else \declareactivechar#1 \fi
- \begingroup \uccode`\~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
- \def~{%
- \leavevmode
- \begingroup \tt \setupverbatim
- \catcode`#1\active \let~\endgroup
- }%
- }}\the\toksa
-}
-\defverbatim\|
-\hyphenchar\tentt=-1
-\newwrite\CODEwrite
-\def\codefile#1{
- \ifeof\CODEwrite\else \endcodefile \fi
- \def\thecodefile{#1} \openout\CODEwrite=#1
-}
-\def\endcodefile{
- \message{Code written on \thecodefile.}
- \closeout\CODEwrite
-}
-\def\code{
- \smallskip
- \begingroup
- \let|\CODEline \let\|\CODElinex
- \let\{=\CODElb \let\}=\CODErb \let\\=\CODEbslash
- \def~{ } \let\~\CODEtilde
- \the\everycode
- \obeylines
-}
-\def\endcode{
- \smallbreak
- \endgroup
-}
-\def\CODEline{%
- \begingroup % matched by \CODElinei
- \setupverbatim \catcode`\|\other
- \CODElinei
-}
-\begingroup\catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
- \catcode\lq\@=\catcode\lq\^ \catcode\lq\^=\active
- \catcode\lq\@@M=\active \toksa={\endgroup %
- \def\CODElinei#1@@M{%
- \begingroup\let`\lq \let'\rq %
- \let^\CODEcircum \let~ \CODEtilde%
- \edef\tmp{#1}%
- \write\CODEwrite\expandafter{\tmp}%
- \endgroup %
- \indent\the\everycodeline #1\par %
- \endgroup % matches \CODEline
- }%
-}\the\toksa
-\begingroup\catcode`\^^M=13 \toksa={\endgroup %
- \def\CODElinex#1^^M{%
- \edef\tmp{\write\CODEwrite{#1}}\tmp %
- {\indent\the\everycodeline #1\par}%
- }%
-} \the\toksa
-\begingroup\catcode`\/=0 \catcode`\\=\other /toksa={/endgroup
- /def/CODEbslash{\}
-}/the/toksa
-\begingroup\catcode`\^=\other \toksa={\endgroup
- \def\CODEcircum{^}
-}\the\toksa
-\begingroup\catcode`\~=\other \toksa={\endgroup
- \def\CODEtilde{~}
-}\the\toksa
-\begingroup\catcode`\%=\other \toksa={\endgroup
- \def\%{%}
-}\the\toksa
-\begingroup\catcode`\~=\other \toksa={\endgroup
- \def\CODEtilde{~}
-}\the\toksa
-\begingroup\catcode`\[=1 \catcode`\]=2
- \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other
- \toksa=[\endgroup
- \def\CODElb[{] \def\CODErb[}]
-]\the\toksa
-\newtoks\everycode
-\newtoks\everycodeline
-\everycode{\tt \baselineskip=0.8\baselineskip \lineskiplimit=0pt }
-\newcount\lineno
-\everycodeline{\llap{$ \global\advance\lineno1
- \scriptstyle\the\lineno $\enspace}%
- \mark\expandafter{\the\lineno}}
-\let\document\relax \let\enddocument\relax
-\lefthyphenmin=3 \righthyphenmin=2 \errorcontextlines10000
-\parindent=2em \hsize=36\fontdimen6\tentt \advance\hsize\parindent
-\hoffset=210mm \advance\hoffset-\hsize \advance\hoffset-25mm
-\newdimen\leftmargin \leftmargin=\hoffset \advance\leftmargin-25mm
-\advance\hoffset-1in
-\voffset=297mm \advance\voffset-11in
-\advance\voffset7mm \advance\voffset20pt
-\vsize=297mm \advance\vsize-2\voffset \advance\vsize-2\baselineskip
-\advance\voffset-1in
-\def\do#1{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt }
-\do\tenrm \do\tenit \do\tenbf
-\rightskip=0pt plus 2em minus 2pt \adjdemerits=0 \tolerance=500
-\parfillskip=0pt plus 0.8\hsize
-\def\author#1{\def\theauthor{#1}} \author{P. Damian Cugley}
-\font\titlefont=cmssbx10 scaled \magstep3
-\def\title#1{
- \vglue2\baselineskip
- \begingroup \parindent-\leftmargin \hyphenpenalty10000 \titlefont
- #1\smallskip
- \endgroup
- \leftline{Version \fileversion,
- last changed \fileauthor\space \mungedate\filedate}
- \ifx\filelocker\empty\else
- \leftline{Edited by \filelocker\unskip\ \today}
- \fi
- \medskip
- \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule
- \medskip
- \rightline{\theauthor}
- \bigskip
- \headline{\hfil\global\headline{%
- \sevenbf \hskip-\leftmargin \themarks \hfil #1
- \fileversion
- \ifx\filelocker\empty
- \space\mungedate\filedate
- \else
- e\space\today
- \fi
- }}
-}
-\def\themarks{%
- \ifx\firstmark\empty\else
- \firstmark
- \ifx\firstmark\botmark \else --\botmark \fi
- \fi
-}
-\def\today{\mungedate{\number\year/\twodigits\month/\twodigits\day}}
-\def\twodigits#1{\ifnum#1<10 0\fi \number#1}
-\def\mungedate#1{$ \textfont0=\font \mathcode`/="7B #1 $}
-\font\secfont=cmssdc10 at 12pt
-\font\subsecfont=cmssi10
-\newcount\seccount
-\newcount\subseccount
-\def\section#1{%
- \advance\seccount1 \subseccount=0
- \bigbreak
- \begingroup
- \secfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
- \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
- \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.\enspace}#1
- \medskip
- \endgroup
- \noindenttrue
-}
-\def\subsec#1{%
- \advance\subseccount1
- \medbreak
- \begingroup
- \subsecfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
- \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
- \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.%
- \number\subseccount.\enspace}#1
- \nobreak\smallskip
- \endgroup
- \noindenttrue
-}
-\newif\ifnoindent
-\everypar{%
- \ifnoindent
- {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse
- \fi
-}
-\newskip\footnoterightskip \footnoterightskip=\rightskip
-\catcode`@=11
-\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup
- \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
- \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
- \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM
- \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\footnoterightskip
- \spaceskip\z@skip \xspaceskip\z@skip \rm
- \textindent{#1}\footstrut\futurelet\next\fo@t}
-\catcode`@=11
-\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$}}
-\def\cs#1{\leavevmode\hbox{\tt\char`\\#1}}
-\def\arg#1{\leavevmode\hbox{{\tt\char`\{}#1{\tt\char`\}}}}
-\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}} \def\em{\,{\rm em}} \def\mm{\,{\rm mm}}
-\def\inch{''}
-\def\flushtop#1{%
- \leavevmode
- \begingroup
- \setbox0=\hbox{#1}\setbox2=\hbox{X}%
- \dimen0=\ht2 \advance\dimen0-\ht0
- \raise\dimen0 \box0
- \endgroup
-}
-\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em \lower0.5ex \hbox{E}X\spacefactor1000 }
-\def\LaTeX{L\kern-0.1em \flushtop{a}\TeX}
-\def\notepar{
- \smallskip
- \begingroup
- \leftskip2\parindent \advance\rightskip\parindent minus \parindent
- \noindent\kern-\parindent{\bf Note}\quad\it
- \ignorespaces
-}
-\def\endnotepar{
- \smallbreak
- \endgroup
-}
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode2.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 62bb283ff3f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode2.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,292 +0,0 @@
-%{{{ pdccode.tex -- used to make self-documenting TeX code
-%{{{ rcs
-
-%%% version: $Revision: 1.2 $
-
-% A simpler and less featureful system than the LaTeX "doc" package is used.
-% Lines between \code and \endcode are printed to a file
-% set with the \codefile{xx} command. They are also listed
-% "verbatim"
-
-\def\rcs#1: #2,v #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endrcs{
- \def\filename{#2}
- \def\fileversion{#3}
- \def\filedate{#4}
- \def\fileauthor{#6}
-}
-
-\rcs$Id: pdccode.tex,v 1.2 1994/12/03 16:26:00 pdc Exp pdc $\endrcs
-\message{\fileversion\space<\fileauthor\space\filedate>}
-%}}} rcs
-%{{{ misc macros
-
-\errorcontextlines10000
-\def\expcs#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname}
-\def\noexpcs{\expcs\noexpand}
-
-%}}} misc macros
-%{{{ verbatim text
-
-%% Define verbatim text using |...|
-% This is used in the commentary
-
-% Tell the verbatim macros that #1 is an active char; this
-% makes sure that the character will be catcoded appropriately
-% when in verbatim mode. #1 should be a somethign that will
-% wortk after "`".
-\def\declareactivechar#1{%
- \toks0=\expandafter{\verbatimplains\do#1}%
- \edef\verbatimplains{\the\toks0 }%
- \catcode`#1=13
-}
-
-\def\verbatimplains{\do\\\do\{\do\}\do\_\do\$\do\#\do\&\do\%} % \{}_$#&%
-\def\verbatimactives{\do\`\do\'\do\~\do\^\do\ } % `'~^<space>
-
-% \setupverbatim -- makes almost all special characters catcode 12
-% except for ` ' ~ ^, which produce slightly lowered glyphs
-\bgroup \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 \toks0={\egroup
- \def\setupverbatim{%
- \frenchspacing
- \spaceskip0pt \xspaceskip0pt % use spacing of font
- \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1=12 }\verbatimplains
- \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1=13 }\verbatimactives
- \let`=\ttlq \let'=\ttrq
- \let~=\tttilde \let^=\ttcircum
- \the\everyverbatim
- \hyphenchar\font=-1
- }
-}\the\toks0
-
-\def\ttlq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char18 }}
-\def\ttrq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char19 }}
-\def\tttilde{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\~ }}
-\def\ttcircum{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\^ }}
-
-\newtoks\everyverbatim % expanded at start of every verbatim text
-
-
-% Define #1 as a self-matching verbatim character.
-% #1 must be a one-char control-sequence
-\def\defverbatim#1{%
- \declareactivechar#1
- \begingroup \uccode`\~=`#1 \uppercase{\toks0={\endgroup
- \def~{%
- \leavevmode
- \begingroup % matched by closing char
- \tt
- \setupverbatim
- \catcode`#1=13 \let~=\endgroup
- }%
- }}\the\toks0
-}
-
-\declareactivechar\| \defverbatim\|
-%}}} verbatim text
-%{{{ writing code sections
-
-% \docodefiles is \do{xx}\do{yy} for a set of file identifiers
-% Each file identifier xx has \ifxx, \xxfalse, \xxtrue, \xxwrite
-% I am greatly hampered by the fact that \newwrite and \newif are \outer!
-\def\docodefiles{}
-
-\def\codefile#1#2{
- \toks0=\expandafter{\docodefiles\do{#1}}
- \edef\docodefiles{\the\toks0 }
- \expcs\CODEnewwrite{#1write}
- \CODEnewif{#1} \csname#1true\endcsname
- \expcs\openout{#1write}=#2
- \expcs\def{filename#1}{#2}
-}
-\catcode`@=11
-\def\CODEnewwrite#1{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n #1}
-\catcode`@=12
-\def\CODEnewif#1{%
- \expcs\edef{#1true}{\let\noexpcs{if#1}\noexpand\iftrue}
- \expcs\edef{#1false}{\let\noexpcs{if#1}\noexpand\iffalse}
- \csname#1false\endcsname
-}
-
-\def\allfilesfalse{\begingroup
- \def\do##1{\global\csname##1false\endcsname}\docodefiles
- \endgroup
-}
-\def\allfilestrue{\begingroup
- \def\do##1{\global\csname##1true\endcsname}\docodefiles
- \endgroup
-}
-
-
-\def\endcodefile#1{
- \expcs\closeout{#1write}
- \csname #1false\endcsname
- \message{Code written to \csname filename#1\endcsname.}
-}
-
-\def\code{
- \smallskip
- \begingroup
- \let|\CODEline % code line without expansion
- \let\|\CODElinex % code line with expansion
- \let\{=\CODElb \let\}=\CODErb \let\\=\CODEbslash \def~{ }
- \the\everycode
- \obeylines
-}
-\def\endcode{
- \smallbreak
- \endgroup
-}
-\def\CODEline{%
- \begingroup
- \setupverbatim
- \catcode`\|=12
- \CODElinei
-}
-
-
-% In \CODFElinei, We must redefine the characters that are active
-% within verbatim text to expand to their catcode-12 equivalents when
-% they are written to the code file. Since one of these is ^, we
-% temporarily give @ the meaning of ^ so that we may safely munge the
-% catcode of ^.
-
-\begingroup \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13
- \catcode\lq\@=\catcode\lq\^ \catcode\lq\^=13
- \catcode\lq\@@M=13 \toks0={\endgroup%
- \def\CODElinei#1@@M{%
- \begingroup\let`\lq \let'\rq \let^\CODEcircum \let~\CODEtilde %
- \edef\tmp{{#1}}%
- \def\do##1{\csname if##1\endcsname %
- \expcs\write{##1write}\tmp \fi %
- }\docodefiles %
- \endgroup
- \indent\the\everycodeline #1\par %
- \endgroup %
- }%
- \def\CODElinex#1@@M{%
- \def\do##1{\csname if##1\endcsname %
- \edef\filename{\csname filename##1\endcsname} %
- \edef\tmp{{#1}} %
- \expcs\write{##1write}\tmp \fi %
- }\docodefiles %
- \def\filename{\<filename>}%
- {\indent\the\everycodeline #1\par}%
- }%
-}\the\toks0
-
-% Make macros which expand to various special characters, with catcode 12:
-\begingroup\catcode`\/=0 \catcode`\\=12 /toks0={/endgroup
- /def/CODEbslash{\}
-}/the/toks0
-\begingroup\catcode`\^=12 \toks0={\endgroup
- \def\CODEcircum{^}
-}\the\toks0
-\begingroup\catcode`\~=12 \toks0={\endgroup
- \def\CODEtilde{~}
-}\the\toks0
-\begingroup\catcode`\%=12 \toks0={\endgroup
- \def\%{%}
-}\the\toks0
-\begingroup\catcode`\[=1 \catcode`\]=2 \catcode`\{=12 \catcode`\}=12 \toks0=[\endgroup
- \def\CODElb[{] \def\CODErb[}]
-]\the\toks0
-\newtoks\everycode
-\newtoks\everycodeline
-
-\def\filenamesanssuffix{\expandafter\CODEsanssuffix\filename.\CODEsanssuffix}
-\def\CODEsanssuffix#1.#2\CODEsanssuffix{#1}
-%}}} writing code sections
-%{{{ layout
-
-
-\newcount\seccount
-\newcount\subseccount
-\font\secfont=cmssdc10 at 12pt
-\font\subsecfont=cmssi10
-
-\def\section#1{%
- \advance\seccount1 \subseccount=0
- \bigbreak
- \begingroup
- \secfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
- \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
- \number\seccount. #1
- \medskip
- \endgroup
-}
-
-\def\subsec#1{%
- \advance\subseccount1
- \medbreak
- \begingroup
- \subsecfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
- \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
- \number\seccount.\number\subseccount. #1
- \nobreak\smallskip
- \endgroup
-}
-
-\def\notepar{
- \smallskip
- \begingroup
- \narrower\noindent\hang
- {\bf Note}\quad\it
- \ignorespaces
-}
-\def\endnotepar{
- \smallbreak
- \endgroup
-}
-
-% Leave a largish right margin; eventually marginalia will go
-% there. Allow enough line length for 80-character code lines. This
-% makes the text lines a bit longer than I'd like but I don't want to
-% have to resort to having code lines in a smaller font.
-\hsize=40em \advance\hsize\parindent
-
-% (297mm-11in) is the strip of paper lost if printed on USA
-% letter paper; allow another bit for some laserprinters that
-% can't print to the edge of the paper.
-\voffset=297mm \advance\voffset by -11in \advance\voffset by 0.25in
-\vsize=297mm \advance\vsize-2\voffset \advance\vsize-2\baselineskip
-\advance\voffset-1in
-
-\def\do#1{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt }
-\do\tenrm \do\tenit \do\tenbf
-
-\rightskip=0pt plus 2em minus 2pt
-\tolerance=500
-\lefthyphenmin=3 \righthyphenmin=2
-
-%}}} layout
-%{{{ abbrevs
-
-\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$}}
-\def\cs#1{\leavevmode\hbox{\tt\char`\\#1}}
-\def\arg#1{\leavevmode\hbox{{\tt\char`\{}#1{\tt\char`\}}}}
-\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}}
-\def\flushtop#1{%
- \leavevmode
- {%
- \setbox0=\hbox{#1}\setbox2=\hbox{X}%
- \dimen0=\ht2 \advance\dimen0-\ht0
- \raise\dimen0 \box0
- }%
-}
-\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}X}
-\def\LaTeX{L\kern-0.167em\flushtop{a}\TeX}
-
-%}}} abbrev
-\newskip\footnoterightskip \footnoterightskip=\rightskip
-\catcode`@=11
-\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup
- \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
- \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
- \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM
- \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\footnoterightskip
- \spaceskip\z@skip \xspaceskip\z@skip \rm
- \textindent{#1}\footstrut\futurelet\next\fo@t}
-\catcode`@=11
-
-
-%}}} pdccode.tex
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcdoc.def b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcdoc.def
deleted file mode 100644
index 0061070fd79..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcdoc.def
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,232 +0,0 @@
-% pdcdoc.def 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "pdcdoc.def",
-%%% version = "1.2",
-%%% date = "1995/03/30",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "Sectioning macros for style files.
-%%% This macro file was generated by running plain
-%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = ""
-%%%}
-
-\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
-
-\topmg=297mm \advance\topmg-11in \advance\topmg7mm
-\botmg=\topmg
-\advance\topmg\ht\strutbox \advance\topmg\headlineskip
-\ifdim \topmg<20mm \topmg=20mm \fi
-\ifdim \botmg<27mm \botmg=27mm \fi
-\setpaper{210mm}{297mm}
-\setnkgrid{4}{3}
-\colrule=0pt
-\leftmargin=\gridwd \advance\leftmargin\colsep
-\everypage={\ifdim\leftmargin>0pt
- \setbox\leftbox=\hbox to \gridwd{}\fi}
-\everyfootnote={\notefonts}
-\everylinenum={\smallfonts}
-\everylinenum={\smallfonts}
-\everytag={\bf}
-\newcount\partno
-\def\thepartno{%
- \ifcase\partno O\or I\or II\or III\or IV\or V\else
- \expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral\partno}%
- \fi
-}
-\newcount\secno \newcount\subsecno \newcount\subsubsecno
-\def\thesecno{%
- \n{%
- \number\secno
- \ifnum\subsecno>0
- .\number\subsecno
- \ifnum\subsubsecno>0
- .\number\subsubsecno
- \fi
- \fi
- }%
-}
-\newtoks\majorheadline
-\expandafter\majorheadline
- \expandafter{\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\jobname}}
-\def\part#1{%
- \global\advance\partno1
- \newpageheading{2\baselineskip}{\headingfonts}
- {}{\thepartno.\quad#1}
- \TOCwrite\TOCentrypart{\thepartno}{#1}
-}
-\newcount\sectionpenalty
-\def\sectionheading#1{
- \par
- \vskip 0pt plus 0.3\vsize
- \penalty\sectionpenalty \sectionpenalty-200
- \vskip 1\bigskipamount plus -0.3\vsize
- \begingroup \advance\leftskip-\leftmargin
- \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt
- \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=500
- \interlinepenalty=100
- \headingfonts \nointerlineskip
- \hbox{\hskip-\leftmargin
- \vrule height 2pt depth 0pt width \leftmargin
- \vrule height 2pt depth 0pt width \hsize}
- #1\par
- \nobreak\smallskip
- \endgroup
- \global\noindenttrue
-}
-\newtoks\sectiontoks
-\newif\ifsecno \secnotrue
-\def\section#1{
- \ifsecno
- \global\advance\secno1 \global\subsecno0 \global\subsubsecno0
- \fi
- \toks0={#1}
- \mark{{\the\sectiontoks}{\ifsecno\S\thesecno\space\fi\the\toks0 }}
- \edef\tmp{\ifsecno\noexpand\S\the\secno\space\fi}
- \global\sectiontoks\expandafter{\tmp#1}
- \sectionheading{\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi #1}
- \mark{{\the\sectiontoks}{\the\sectiontoks}}
- \TOCwrite\TOCentrysection{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1}
-}
-\def\subsec#1{%
- \ifsecno \global\advance\subsecno1 \global\subsubsecno0 \fi
- \doheading\medskipamount{\subheadingfonts}{}
- {\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi#1}
- \TOCwrite\TOCentrysubsec{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1}
-}
-\def\subsubsec#1{%
- \ifsecno \global\advance\subsubsecno+1 \fi
- \doheading\smallskipamount{\rm}{}{\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi#1}
- \TOCwrite\TOCentrysubsubsec{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1}
-}
-\newif\ifnoheadline
-\newif\iftwosided
-\footline={%
- \ifnoheadline
- \global\noheadlinefalse
- \hfil\bodyfonts\n\folio\hfil
- \else
- \hfil
- \fi
-}
-\headline={%
- \ifnoheadline
- \hfil
- \else
- \bodyfonts
- \iftwosided
- \ifodd\pageno
- \hfil
- \expandafter\firstoftwo\botmark\quad
- {\bf\n\folio}%
- \else
- {\bf\n\folio}\quad
- \the\majorheadline
- \hfil
- \fi
- \else
- \the\majorheadline
- \hfil
- \expandafter\secondoftwo\topmark\quad
- {\bf\n\folio}%
- \fi
- \fi
-}
-\def\firstoftwo#1#2{#1}
-\def\secondoftwo#1{}
-\newwrite\TOCfile
-\openout\TOCfile=\jobname.toc
-\def\TOCwrite#1#2#3{%
- \begingroup\def\n{\string\n}
- \def\tmp{#3}%
- \edef\tmp{\string#1{#2}{\expandafter\TOCtrim\meaning\tmp}}
- \write\TOCfile\expandafter{\tmp{\folio}}\endgroup
-}
-\def\TOCtrim#1:->{}
-\def\TOCentrypart#1#2#3{
- \smallskip
- \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0\leftmargin
- \moveleft\leftmargin\hbox to\dimen0{\strut\bf #1. #2\hfil}
- \smallskip
-}
-\def\TOCentrysection#1#2#3{
- \smallskip\noindent\llap{#1\kern1pc}%
- {\bf \ignorespaces #2\quad\rm \n{#3}}\par
-}
-\def\TOCentrysubsec#1#2#3{
- \ifvmode \noindent \else \quad \fi
- {#1}~{\ignorespaces #2}
-}
-\def\TOCentrysubsubsec#1#2#3{}
-\def\frontmatter{
- \write\TOCfile{\string\endinput}
- \write\TOCfile{\folio}
- \closeout\TOCfile
- \vfill\supereject
- \ifvoid\partialpage\else \null\vfill\eject \fi
- \beginthe{frontmatter}
- \pageno=-1 \secnofalse \noheadlinetrue
- \def\TOCwrite##1##2##3{}
-}
-\def\endfrontmatter{
- \section{Contents}
- \input\jobname.toc
- \vfill\supereject
- \endthe{frontmatter}
-}
-\def\titlepage{
- \vfill\eject
- \beginthe{titlepage}
- \noheadlinetrue
- \def\splittitlepage{
- \iftwosided \vfill\eject\null\vfill \else \vfill \fi
- }
-}
-\def\endtitlepage{
- \eject
- \endthe{titlepage}
-}
-\def\abstract{
- \smallskip
- \beginthe{abstract}
- \setbox\parbox\hbox to \gridwd{\subheadingfonts Abstract\hfil}
- \noindenttrue \bodyfonts
-}
-\def\endabstract{
- \smallskip
- \endthe{abstract}
-}
-\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}}
-\def\mm{\,{\rm mm}}
-\def\MF{{\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi META}\-%
- {\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi FONT}}
-\def\MSDOS{\leavevmode\hbox{MS-DOS}}
-\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}X\spacefactor1000 }
-\begingroup\catcode`\|=12 \toks0={\endgroup
- \def\dfn#1{\ifx\index\UNDEFINED\else\index{#1|INDdfn}\fi{\bi #1}}
-} \the\toks0
-\declareactivechar\* \def*#1*{{\it#1\/}}
-\def\|{%
- \relax\ifmmode
- \Vert
- \else
- \begingroup
- \ttb \setupverbatim
- \catcode`\|=13 \let|\endgroup
- \fi
-}
-\def\inputifexists#1{%
- \openin15=#1
- \ifeof15 \else \input #1 \fi
- \closein15
-}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 6d8c5c78af2..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1194 +0,0 @@
-% pdcfmt2.dtx -- documentation & source for pdcfmt2.tex -*-tex-*-
-
-%%%@TeX-document-file {
-%%% title = "PDCFMT2 -- Formatting Macros",
-%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.dtx",
-%%% version = "$Revision: 2.4 $",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% date = "$Date: 1995/04/06 11:55:16 $",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for
-%%% the TeX definitions file pdcfmt2.tex.
-%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
-%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute
-%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
-%%% General Public License as published by the Free
-%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
-%%% or (at your option) any later version.",
-%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
-%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
-%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
-%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
-%%% License for more details.",
-%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
-%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write
-%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
-%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
-%%%}
-
-%{{{ pdcfmt2
-%{{{ preamble
-
-\relax
-\input pdccode
-\document
-\rcs$Id: pdcfmt2.dtx,v 2.4 1995/04/06 11:55:16 pdc Exp $\endrcs
-
-\def\example{
- \smallskip\hrule\nobreak\smallskip
- \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0-1pc \divide\dimen0 2
- \halign to \hsize\bgroup\vtop{\tt\def~{\hfil\break} \def\\{\char`\\\relax} \hsize=\dimen0 ##}\tabskip=0pt plus 1fil&
- \vtop{\hsize=\dimen0 ##}\tabskip=0pt\cr
-}
-\def\endexample{
- \crcr\egroup
- \nobreak\smallskip\hrule\smallskip
-}
-
-\codefile{pdcfmt2.tex}
-%}}} preamble
-%{{{ introduction
-
-\author{P. Damian Cugley}
-\title{PDCFMT2---Formatting Macros}
-\section{Introduction}
-
- This document describes |pdcfmt2.tex|, a collection of
- formatting macros for plain \TeX\ documents. For example, it
- defines commands for making bulleted lists, verbatim text, and
- generic headings. For longer documents, a higher-level `style
- file' like |pdccmdoc.tex| will define commands to start sections
- and generate a table of contents and so on.
-
- The definitions file and the printed documentation are both in
- |pdcfmt2.dtx|, a `documented \TeX\ macros' file\footnote*{The
- \LaTeX~2e distribution uses files with the `|dtx|' suffix for
- similar purposes.} which, when processed by plain \TeX,
- generates a fresh copy of |pdcfmt2.tex| in the current directory
- in addition to the |dvi| file. This ensures that the printed
- documentation and the code it describes are identical. The
- |dtx| file uses the macros in |pdccode.tex|.
-
- The name of the macros file ends in `-|2|' to prevent confusion
- with |pdcfmt.tex| version 1.1.10, with which it is slightly
- incompatible.
-
-%}}} introduction
-%{{{ File identification
-\section{File identification}
-
- Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the
- file.
-
-\code
- \|\% pdcfmt2.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- macros for formatting
- |
- |%%%@TeX-definition-file {
- |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex",
- \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
- \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
- |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
- |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
- |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
- |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
- |%%% codetable = "USASCII",
- |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
- |%%% supported = "Maybe",
- |%%% abstract = "Formatting macros for plain TeX documents.
- |%%% This file was generated by running
- \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx",
- |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
- \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the
- |%%% package it came in.",
- |%%% dependencies = "",
- |%%% }
- |
- \|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\}
- |
-\endcode
-
-%}}} getting started
-%{{{ internal
-
-\section{Internal definitions}
-
- Most internal control sequence names will start with `|FMT|'.
- Here are a few miscellaneous definitions used to save a token
- here or there.
-
- I will often use |\toksa| to create definitions containing
- characters with unusual catcodes. The idiom is
-$$\halign{\indent#\hfil\cr
- |\begingroup| \<assignments> |\toksa={\endgroup|\cr
- \quad\<definitions>\cr
- |} \the\toksa|\cr
-}$$
- When |\toksa| is expanded, it closes the group (undoing the
- \<assignments>) but then scans the \<definition> using the
- catcodes set by \<assignments>. (In extreme cases, the
- definition of |\toksa| might be enclosed in |\uppercase|, to get
- strange characters into a definiton.)
-
- The advantage of this idiom over using |\gdef| in a group is
- that the definitions need not be global. Avoiding global
- assignments makes it more likely that the document will be
- embeddable in other documents.
-
- Using |\toksa| instead of |\toks0| is more robust when using
- |\uppercase|, because digits are be given |\uccode| values by
- |maamac.tex|.
-\code
- |\toksdef\toksa=0
- |\chardef\other=12
-\endcode
-
-%}}} internal
-%{{{ verbatim text
-
-\section{Verbatim text}
-
- `Verbatim' text means text designed to match the ASCII
- characters in the manuscript file as closely as possible. It
- kis most often used in computer manuals, where commands typed to
- a computer or the contents of text files are to be presented.
- Within verbatim text, most of \TeX's special characters are
- temporarily disabled.
-
-\subsec{Lists of active chararcters}
-
- The verbatim text macros need to know if any characters have
- been made special apart from the usual ones. This command tells
- the verbatim macros that |#1| is an active char; in addition to
- setting its catcode, this makes sure that the character will be
- re-catcoded appropriately when in verbatim mode. |#1| should be
- a something that will work after `|`|'; usually this means a
- one-character control sequence.
-\code
- |\def\declareactivechar#1{%
- | \toksa\expandafter{\verbatimplains\do#1}%
- | \edef\verbatimplains{\the\toksa }%
- | \catcode`#1\active
- |}
-\endcode
-
- Two list macros in the style of |\dospecials| are defined. The
- first is for characters that must be set to catcode~12, such as
- `|\|', `|{|', `|}|', `|_|', `|$|', `|#|', `|&|', and `|%|'. The
- other is for a few characters that are given catcode~13, such as
- `|`|', `|'|', `|~|', `|^|' and SP.
-\code
- |\def\verbatimplains{\do\\\do\{\do\}\do\_\do\$\do\#\do\&\do\%}
- |\def\verbatimactives{\do\-\do\`\do\'\do\~\do\^\do\ }
-\smallbreak
- |\chardef\other=12
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Setting up verbatim mode}
-
- This is a macro common to various verbatim text modes. The
- default spacing of whatever font is used, without any
- adjustments of spacefactor for punctuation. The characters
- `|`|', `|'|', `|~|', and `|^|' are produce slightly lowered
- glyphs.
-\code
- |\newtoks\everyverbatim
-\smallbreak
- |\bgroup \catcode`\-=13\catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 \toksa={\egroup
- | \def\setupverbatim{%
- | \frenchspacing
- | \spaceskip0pt \xspaceskip0pt % use spacing of font
- | \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##112 }\verbatimplains
- | \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1\active }\verbatimactives
- | \let`\ttlq \let'\ttrq
- | \let~\tttilde \let^\ttcircum \let-\ttminus
- | \the\everyverbatim
- | }
- |}\the\toksa
-\endcode
-
- Here are the definitions for the munged glyphs. These are only
- necessary in CM Typewriter; when using a PostScript font,
- different definitions would be necessary.
-
- The names `rq' and `lq' are based on the use of |\lq| and |\rq|
- in plain \TeX. An alternative definition for |\ttrq| would be
- |\chardef\ttrq="0D|, producing `{\tt\char"0D }'.
-\code
- |\def\ttlq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char18 }}
- |\def\ttrq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char19 }}
- |\def\tttilde{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\~ }}
- |\def\ttcircum{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\^ }}
- |\def\ttminus{-}
-\endcode
- This makes the difference between |`'^~| and
- {\tt`'\char`\^\char`\~}.
-
- The macro |\ttminus| is included because it is needed for
- PostScript font support.
-
-\subsec{Defining a self-matching character for verbatim text}
-
- A macro for defining a self-matching verbatim character (I~got
- the idea of a macro for declaring verbatim characters from the
- \LaTeX~2e documentation macros). |#1| must be a one-character
- control sequence. If it isn't active already, then
- |\declareactivechar| is applied to it first.
-\code
- |\def\defverbatim#1{%
- | \ifcat\noexpand#1\noexpand~\else \declareactivechar#1 \fi
- | \begingroup \uccode`\~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
- | \def~{%
- | \leavevmode
- | \begingroup \tt \setupverbatim
- | \catcode`#1\active \let~\endgroup
- | }%
- | }}\the\toksa
- |}
-\endcode
- Note that there must be a font called |\tt| for it to switch to.
- (The catcode of |#1| is set to 13 after calling |\setupverbatim|
- because |#1| will be included in |\verbatimplains|.)
-
- Finally, we define vertical bar as the conventional
- self-matching verbatim-mode character.
-\code
- |\defverbatim\|
-\endcode
- Both |\defverbatim| and |\defineactivechar| have local scope.
-
-\subsec{List a file verbatim}
-
- This does something similar to the |lines| environment (see
- below), except here an external file is read in verbatim (see
- {\it\TeX book} Appendix~D, Section~3). The
- |\startlinenumbering| macro may be put in the |\everylisting|
- token register to create a listing with numbered lines.
-\code
- |\newtoks\everylisting
-\smallbreak
- |\def\listfile#1{
- | \medskip
- | \begingroup
- | \parindent=0pt \parskip=0pt
- | \def\par{\null\endgraf}\obeylines
- | \setupverbatim \maketabstab
- | \tt \the\everylisting
- | \input#1
- | \endgroup
- | \medskip\noindent\ignorespaces
- |}
-\endcode
- This macro redefines character |^^I| (horizontal tab) to produce
- the equivalent of eight spaces. This isn't quite the same as
- what HTs are used for with UNIX files, but it works adequately
- if all your tabs are at the start of the line (i.e., if tabs are
- used only for indentation, not to make tables).
-\code
- |{\catcode`\^^I=\active
- | \gdef\maketabstab{\catcode`\^^I\active \def^^I{\hskip 4em}}
- |}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} verbatim text
-%{{{ everypar
-
-\section{Everypar hacks}
-
-\subsec{Parameters}
-
- The following may be set by higher-level macros to change the
- apearance of the next paragraph.
-
- If the flag |\ifnoindent| is set, then the indentation of the
- next paragraph will be removed (by deleting the box added by
- \TeX's |\indent| primitive). Thus |\noindenttrue| works like
- |\noindent|, except that there may be blank lines between
- |\noindenttrue| and the paragraph it affects.
-\code
- |\newif\ifnoindent
-\endcode
- This flag is reset globally once it has had its effect.
-
- If the box |\parbox| is non-void, then its value is typeset in
- the left margin of the next paragraph. (At present this does an
- implicit |\noindenttrue| but later versions may allow the next
- paragraph to be indented.) The righthand edge of the parbox
- will be distance |\parboxsep| from the left edge of the text
- area.
-\code
- |\newbox\parbox
- |\newdimen\parboxsep \parboxsep=1pc
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Setting \cs{everypar}}
-\code
- |\everypar={%
- | \ifvoid\parbox
- | \ifnoindent {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse \fi
- | \else
- | {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse
- | \dp\parbox=0pt
- | \hbox to 0pt{\hss \box\parbox \hskip\parboxsep}%
- | \fi
- |}
-\endcode
-%}}} everypar
-%{{{ environment intrinsics
-
-\section{Environment infrastructure}
-
- An environment is a structure used to typeset textual elements
- consisting of several \TeX\ paragraphs (usually embedded within
- one conceptual paragraph). It is a concept like \LaTeX\
- environments, but with the syntax changed to be more
- plain-\TeX-like.
-
- Since environments have one argument that may span many lines in
- the file we use more verbose brackets than |{|--|}| to make it
- easier to spot where they begin and end. This is a structure in
- a document looking like this:
- $$
-\vbox{\halign{#\hfil\cr
- |\|\<name>\<args>\cr
- \quad\dots\cr
- |\end|\<name>\cr
-}}
- $$
-
- A new environment is defined by defining macros called
- |\|\<name> and |\end|\<name>. Within the |\|\<name> and
- |\end|\<name> macros, calls to |\beginthe| and |\endthe| are
- used to check that environments are nested properly.
-\code
- |\def\beginthe#1{%
- | \begingroup\def\PDCFMTblockname{#1}%
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\endthe#1{%
- | \def\tmp{#1}%
- | \ifx\tmp\PDCFMTblockname
- | \endgroup
- | \else
- | \errmessage{You should have said \string\endthe{\blockname}}%
- | \fi
- |}
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{A generic end-of-environment macro}
-
- This macro does a |\smallskip| (if there is not already a larger
- skip on the current list), and sets the `noindent' flag so that
- the following \TeX\ paragraph is not indented.
-\code
- |\def\PDCFMTendenv#1{
- | \smallskip
- | \endthe{#1}
- | \global\noindenttrue
- |}
-\endcode
-
- Where an environment describes text that should be indented,
- usually |\parindent| should be used (for consistency). If
- |\parindent| is zero we still want to indent the text, and we
- use |\envindent| to describe how much to indent it by.
-\code
- |\newdimen\envindent \envindent=1pc
-\smallskip
- |\def\PDCFMTindent{%
- | \ifdim\parindent>0pt
- | \parindent
- | \else
- | \envindent
- | \fi
- |}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} environment intrinsics
-%{{{ quotations
-
-\section{Quotations}
-
- This is a simple environment, with the left margin indented and
- the first paragraph in the quotetd text not indented.
-\example
- It is ... who said~
- \\quotation~
- \indent Shookum hip rallo dyne.~
- \\endquotation~
- Indeed, it burgle gurgler.
-&
- It is interesting to remember the words of
- Spencone Tipeth, who said
- \smallskip\leftskip\parindent \noindent
- Shookum hip rallo
- dyne.\smallskip\leftskip0pt \noindent Indeed, it burgle gurgler.
-\endexample
-The token
- register |\everyquotation| might be used to arrange for all
- quotations to be in smaller type with
- $$\hbox{|\everyquotation={\smallfonts}|}$$
-\code
- |\newtoks\everyquotation
-\smallbreak
- |\def\quotation{
- | \smallskip
- | \beginthe{quotation}
- | \advance\leftskip\PDCFMTindent
- | \noindenttrue
- | \the\everyquotation
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\endquotation{\PDCFMTendenv{quotation}}
-\endcode
- The differences from using |{\narrower|\dots|\par}| (apart from
- how it looks in the source file) include (a)~the right margin
- isn't indented; (b)~it indents by |\envindent| if there is no
- |\parindent| and (c)~it is preceeded and followed by a
- smallskip.
-%}}} quotations
-%{{{ textlists (bullets + numbered)
-
-\section{Textlists---bulleted or numbered lists}
-
- Here's a generic list-of-items environment, used to implemented
- bulleted and numbered lists. Each item is started with the
- convenient |\\| macro (and so may contain more than one
- paragraph). It is called a `textlist' to distinguish it from
- other meanings of the word `list'. Usually textlists will be
- generated with higher-level macros like |\bullets| and
- |\numbered|.
-
-\subsec{A generic textlist environment}
-
- The token register |\everytextlist| is expanded at the start
- of every textlist. The level of nesting is recorded in
- |\textlistdepth| (a to-level list is depth~0, a list inside
- that is depth~1, and so on). The flag |\ifnumbered| controls
- whether items are numbered (using |\numberfordepth|) or
- bulleted (using |\bulletfordepth|).
-\code
- |\newtoks\everytextlist
- |\newif\ifnumbered
- |\newcount\textlistdepth \textlistdepth=-1
- |\newcount\textlistcount
-\smallbreak
- |\def\textlist{%
- | \par
- | \beginthe{textlist}
- | \advance\textlistdepth 1
- | \textlistcount0
- | \def\\{
- | \smallskip\noindent
- | \advance\textlistcount1
- | \llap{%
- | \ifnumbered
- | \numberfordepth\textlistdepth\textlistcount
- | \else
- | \bulletfordepth\textlistdepth
- | \fi\enspace}%
- | \ignorespaces
- | }
- | \advance\leftskip\PDCFMTindent
- | \the\everytextlist
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\endtextlist{\PDCFMTendenv{textlist}}
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Bulleted lists}
-
- This describes a bulleted list, where each paragraph is indented
- and preceeded by a mark in the margin.
-\example
- I would like to make...~\\bullets~\\\\ this point; and~\\\\ that
- point~\\endbullets~And so on and so forth.
-& I would like to make the following very important and relevant
- itemized points:\smallskip\item{$\bullet$}this point;
- and\smallskip\item{$\bullet$}that
- point\smallskip\noindent And so on and so forth.
-\endexample
-Bullets environments may
- be nested, in which case different marks are used. The sign is
- chosen with |\bulletfordepth|.
-\code
- |\newtoks\everybullets
-\smallbreak
- |\def\bullets{\textlist \numberedfalse \the\everybullets}
- |\let\endbullets=\endtextlist
-\smallbreak
- |\def\bulletfordepth#1{%
- | \ifcase#1 $\bullet$\or --\or $\circ$\else $\cdot$\fi
- |}
-\endcode
-
-
-\subsec{Numbered lists}
-
- The numbered list is similar. The style of numbering changes
- with the listing depth; you can change this by redefining
- |\numberfordepth|.
- $$
-\centerline{\vbox{\halign{#\hfil&\qquad\hfil# &&\hfil# \cr
- Depth 0&1.&2.&3.&\dots\cr
- Depth 1&(1)&(2)&(3)&\dots\cr
- Depth 2&({\it a\/})&({\it b\/})&({\it c\/})&\dots\cr
- Depth 3+&(i)&(ii)&(iii)&\dots\cr
-}}}
- $$
- There is also a token regieter |\everynumbered| for any extra
- customization. This is read after |\everytextlist|.
-\code
- |\newtoks\everynumbered
-\smallbreak
- |\def\numbered{\textlist \numberedtrue \the\everynumbered}
- |\let\endnumbered=\endtextlist
-\smallbreak
- |\def\numberfordepth#1#2{%
- | \ifcase#1 \n{\number#2}.\or (\n{\number#2})\or
- | ({\it\alphabetletter#2\/})\else (\romannumeral#2)\fi
- |}
-\endcode
- It turns out that sometimes it is useful to be able to impose a
- format on numbers generated by formatting macros. For example,
- I~occasionally find it useful to force all numbers to be
- generated in maths mode. To do this, all numbers generated by
- macros are enclosed in |\n{|--|}|. By default, |\n| is
- equivalent to |\relax|.
-\code
- |\let\n\relax
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Picking a letter of the alphabet}
-
- This macro behaves as much like the primitives |\number| and
- |\romannumeral| as it can: it expands entirely within \TeX's
- mouth, and so may be used in |\edef|s and the like. It produces
- |???| or |!!!| if its argument is not in the range 1--26.
- The macro is defined so as to reduce the number of tokesn to be
- skipped when |#1| is less than 6.
-\code
- |\def\alphabetletter#1{%
- | \ifcase#1 ??? \or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\else
- | \xxxalphabetletter#1\fi
- |}
- |\def\xxxalphabetletter#1{%
- | \ifcase#1 \or\or\or\or\or\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or
- | k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or
- | v\or w\or x\or y\or z\else !!!\fi
- |}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} textlists (bullets + numbered)
-%{{{ tagged list
-
-\section{Tagged lists}
-
- In other words, description lists. Each paragraph starts with
- the `tag' set either in the left margin or sticking in to the
- current line if it is too long to fit. The tag for each
- paragraph is introduced with `|\\|\arg{\<text>}'.
-
- The maximum width of tag labels (including the 1\thinspace en
- space that goes between label and text) in is stored in
- |\tagmaxwidth|. If there is not room, then the label is run on
- in to the paragraph and separated from the text by a quad space.
-\code
- |\newdimen\tagmaxwidth
-\endcode
- As well as giving a new definition to the |\\| macro, the
- |\tagged| command mast choose a value for |\tagmaxwidth|. If
- there is a large left margin (signalled by giving |\leftmargin|
- a positive value) then tags will go in there; otherwise the text
- will be indented and the amount of indentation used as the
- maximum label width.
-\code
- |\newtoks\everytagged
-\smallbreak
- |\def\tagged{%
- | \par
- | \beginthe{tagged}
- | \let\\\TAG
- | \ifdim\leftmargin=0pt
- | \tagmaxwidth\PDCFMTindent
- | \else
- | \tagmaxwidth\leftmargin
- | \fi
- | \the\everytagged
- | \ifdim\tagmaxwidth>\leftmargin
- | \leftskip\tagmaxwidth \advance\leftskip-\leftmargin
- | \fi
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\endtagged{\PDCFMTendenv{tagged}}
-\endcode
- The adjustment to |\leftmargin| comes after scanning
- |\everytagged| so that it is possible to adjust |\tagmaxwidth|
- inside |\everytagged|.
-
- Trickery with |\futurelet| and |\aftergroup| (like that used in
- plain \TeX's |\footnote| command) is used to allow catcode
- changes in \<text> to work. This allows macros that generate
- `verbatim' text to work.
-\code
- |\newtoks\everytag
-\smallbreak
- |\def\TAG{%
- | \smallskip\noindent
- | \setbox0=\hbox\bgroup % matched by \TAGfinish
- | \the\everytag\ignorespaces
- | \futurelet\next\TAGtest
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\TAGtest{%
- | \ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next
- | \let\next\TAGgotbrace
- | \else
- | \let\next\TAGnobrace
- | \fi \next
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\TAGgotbrace{%
- | \bgroup\aftergroup\TAGfinish
- | \let\next
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\TAGnobrace#1{%
- | #1\TAGfinish
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\TAGfinish{%
- | \unskip\hskip0.5em\egroup % matches \TAG
- | \ifdim \wd0 < \tagmaxwidth
- | \wd0=\tagmaxwidth
- | \llap{\box0}%
- | \else
- | \hskip-\tagmaxwidth
- | \unhbox0 \unskip\quad
- | \fi
- | \ignorespaces
- |}
-\endcode
- It might be interesting to generalize these macros so that new
- macros with an argument scanned this way may be created more
- easily.
-%}}} tagged list
-%{{{ lines
-
-\section{Lines environment (for program listings etc)}
-
- In the |lines| environment, each line in the manuscript file
- becomes a new paragraph (i.e., a separate line on the printed
- page). A |%| at the end of a line may be used to split a file
- line in to several logical lines. In addition, the |lines|
- environment is bracketed by horizontal rules. The effect is
- similar to that produced by the |\beginlines|--|\endlines|
- macros in {\it\TeX book} Appendix~E.
-
-\code
- |\newtoks\everylines
-\smallbreak
- |\def\lines{
- | \par
- | \beginthe{lines}
- | \nobreak\smallskip\hrule\nobreak\smallskip
- | \obeylines
- | \parindent=0pt \parskip=0pt
- | \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
- | \the\everylines
- | \nobreak
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\endlines{
- | \nobreak\smallskip
- | \endthe{lines}
- | \hrule\smallskip
- | \global\noindenttrue
- |}
-\endcode
-
- For longer listings it may be nice to have the lines numbered
- for later reference. The following two macros may be put in
- |\everylines| to enable line numbering---the first starts from~1
- in each listing environment, the other continues the numbering
- from where it left off.
-
- The line number is kept in |\linenumber| (which may be adjusted
- by the user). Only every 5th line is numbered. The number of
- lines until the next printed one is held in |\PDCFMTcount|.
- Both these are always set globally (which means lines
- environments cannot be nested!).
-\code
- |\newcount\linenumber
- |\newcount\PDCFMTcount
-\smallbreak
- |\def\startlinenumbering{%
- | \global\linenumber=0 \global\PDCFMTcount=5
- | \everypar{\numberthisline}%
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\continuelinenumbering{%
- | \everypar{\numberthisline}%
- |}
-\endcode
-
- The |\numberthisline| macro is invoked at the beginning of every
- paragraph. It increments |\linenumber|, and writes the line
- number of every fifth line in the right margin. By default it
- uses the same font as used in subscripts; this can be changed by
- changing the token register |\everylinenum|.
-\code
- |\newtoks\everylinenum \everylinenum{\the\scriptfont0 }
-\smallbreak
- |\def\numberthisline{%
- | \strut
- | \global\advance\linenumber1 \global\advance\PDCFMTcount-1
- | \ifnum\PDCFMTcount>0 \else
- | \global\advance\PDCFMTcount 5
- | \rlap{\the\everylinenum \kern\hsize\kern1em \the\linenumber}%
- | \fi
- |}%
-\endcode
-
- Within the lines environment it can be useful to indicate where
- lines have been skipped. This macro also adjusts the
- |\linenumber| macro.
-\code
- |\def\linesskipped#1{%
- | \strut \hskip20pt $\vdots$ \hskip20pt
- | {\rm(\it #1 lines omitted\rm)}\par
- | \advance\linenumber#1\relax
- |}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} lines
-%{{{ display, table
-
-\section{Displays, Tables -- wrapper about \cs{halign}}
-
- The |display| environment does a generic (meaning not
- necessarily mathematical) display, in a manner similar to the
- |\begindisplay|--|\enddisplay| macros in {\it\TeX book}
- Appendix~E. As with Knuth's macro, assignments may follow on
- the same line as |\display|, and |\cr| and |&| may be used to
- split the display into rows and columns.
-\code
- |\outer\def\display{\obeylines\startdisplay}
- |\bgroup\obeylines \toksa={\egroup %
- | \def\startdisplay#1^^M{%
- | \catcode`\^^M=5 $$ #1 % matched by \enddisplay
- | \displayindent\PDCFMTindent %
- | \halign\bgroup##\hfil&&\quad##\hfil\cr %
- | } %
- |}\the\toksa %
-\smallbreak
- |\def\enddisplay{\crcr\egroup$$}
-\endcode
-
- The |table| environment is similar, ecept that what follows
- |\table| is an arbitrary |\halign| specification.
-\code
- |\def\table{%
- | $$ % matching $$ is in \endtable
- | \displayindent\PDCFMTindent
- | \halign \bgroup
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\let\endtable=\enddisplay
-\endcode
-
-\notepar
- Both the {\tt table} and {\tt display} environments must go
- within paragraphs. That is, there should not be blank lines
- before |\table|, or after |\endtable| unless the table ends the
- paragraph.
-\endnotepar
-%}}} display, table
-%{{{ ebnf
-
-\section{(E)BNF}
-
- BNF is Bakus-Naur Formalism; EBNF is Extended BNF. The same
- environment does either format. The style I~happen to like, has
- non-terminal sumbols written like \<this>, and terminal symbols
- enclosed in `--'. Optional text is enclosed in brackets (I~like
- to put spaces between the brackets and the enclosed text for
- clarity) and repeatable text in braces.
-
- In the manuscript file, each production is a separate paragraph.
- The macro |\>| goes between the left hand side and right hand
- side of a production; by default, it expands to `$::=$'.
- Alternatives are separated by |\\|; by default this expands to a
- bar `$\mid$'. If the terminal symbols happen to be keyboard
- characters, use the verbatim text character {\tt\char`\|} which
- adds quotation marks around the text it produces. For example,
- the following expression
- $$
- \hbox{\<foo>\enspace$::=$\enspace`|f|' `|o|' `|o|' $\mid$
- \<bar> [ \<mumble> `{\bf munge}' ].}
- $$
- may be produced with
- $$
- \defverbatim\~
- \hbox{~\<foo> \> |f| |o| |o| \\ \<bar> [ \<mumble> `{\bf munge}' ].~}
- $$
- Braces are produced with |\{| and |\}|.
-
-\code
- |\newtoks\everybnf
-\smallbreak
- |\def\bnf{
- | \nobreak\smallskip
- | \beginthe{bnf}
- | \advance\leftskip2\parindent \parindent=-\parindent
- | \parskip0pt plus 1pt
- | \rightskip=1\rightskip plus 3em
- | \def\\{$\mid$}
- | \def\>{\unskip\enspace$::=$\enspace\ignorespaces}
- | \def|{`\begingroup\tt\setupverbatim\catcode`\|=13
- | \def|{\endgroup'}}
- | \def\{{$\lbrace$} \def\}{$\rbrace$}
- | \the\everybnf
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\endbnf{
- | \smallskip
- | \endthe{bnf}
- | \global\noindenttrue
- |}
-\endcode
-
- The macro |\<| is based on the one in Appendix~E of the {\it\TeX
- book}. For example, |\<foo>| produces `\<foo>'.
-\code
- |\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle${\it#1\/}$\rangle$}}
-\endcode
- The difference is that the name is in italics: \<name> not
- $\langle$name$\rangle$.
-
-\notepar
- This macro is not intened for be used to generate character
- names like Return and Tab; I suggest just saying `Return' and
- `Tab' for these.
-
- There is a style of RFC-822 email addresses written in the form
- `\/|Damian Cugley <pdc@alleged.co.uk>|'. I suggest that when
- presenting email addresses in printed documents this be rendered
- as something like `\/{\rm Damian Cugley (|pdc@alleged.co.uk|)}'.
-\endnotepar
-%}}} ebnf
-%{{{ headings
-
-\section{Headings}
-
- Here are some macros for making headings for sections of a
- document. There are two styles of layout supported by these
- heading macros: the usual style~$N$, with headings above the
- first paragraph of the section, and the `tab-indexed' style~$T$,
- with headings in the left margin, aligned with the first line of
- the paragraph.
-
-
-\subsec{The left margin parameter}
- For style~$T$ headings, this is the size of the extra margin at
- the left side of the page (so $({\it hoffset}+1\,{\rm in})-{\it
- leftmargin}$ is the margin between the left edge of headings and
- the edge of the paper). Set this parameter to $0\pt$ for
- style~$N$.
-
-\code
- |\newdimen\leftmargin
-\endcode
-
-
-\subsec{Headings that don't start a new page}
-
- This macro is intended to be used by higher-level macro with
- names like |\section|, which take care of numbering section
- headings and so on.
- $$
- \hbox{\tt\cs{doheading}\arg{\<skip>}\arg{\<style>}%
- \arg{\<coda>}\arg{\<text>}}
- $$
- Where \<skip> is the skip to put before the heading (for
- example, a \<dimendef token> like like |\medskipamount| or
- |\bigskipamount|, or a \<dimen> enclosed in braces); \<style> is
- tokens to insert before the \<text> (such as assignments that
- select the font); \<coda> is tokens that follow the \<text>
- (which might produce a rule under the heading, for example;
- usually this is empty); and \<text> is the text of the heading
- supplied by the user.
-\code
- |\newskip\headingtemp
- |\def\doheading#1#2#3#4{
- | \ifdim\lastskip<#1\relax \removelastskip \vskip#1\relax \fi
- | \ifdim \leftmargin>0pt
-\endcode
- If the left margin is greater than zero then we generaten a
- style~$T$ heading. This is done by putting the text in
- |\parbox|, which will be used by the |\everypar|.
-\code
- | \global\setbox\parbox=\vtop{%
- | \hsize=\leftmargin \advance\hsize-\parboxsep
- | \parindent=0pt
- | \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus 3em
- | \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000
- | \strut#2#4#3
- | }
- | \else
-\endcode
- Otherwise we typeset the heading as a separate paragraph.
-\code
- | \begingroup
- | \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
- | \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus0.25\hsize
- | \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000
- | \strut#2#4#3
- | \global\headingtemp=\baselineskip
- | \par
- | \endgroup
-\endcode
- The vertical space between the heading and the following text is
- calculated from the difference in baselineskips between the
- fonts used in the heading and those used in body text, plus $\it
- smallskipamount$.
-\code
- | \advance\headingtemp-\baselineskip
- | \ifdim\headingtemp>0pt \nobreak \vskip 1.0\headingtemp \fi
- | \smallskip
- | \noindenttrue
- | \fi
- |}
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Headings that start a new page}
-
- Major divisions of a book start on a nw page. The parameters to
- the macro are similar to those for |\doheading|:
- $$
- \hbox{\tt\cs{newpageheading}\arg{\<skip>}\arg{\<style>}%
- \arg{\<coda>}\arg{\<text>}}
- $$
- Where here the \<skip> is the extra space at the top of the page.
-
-\code
- |\def\newpageheading#1#2#3#4{
- | \vfill\supereject % ensure no insertions still floating
- | \null\vskip#1\relax
- | \moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{
- | \advance\hsize\leftmargin
- | \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
- | \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus0.25\hsize
- | \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000
- | #2\strut#4#3
- | \global\headingtemp=\baselineskip
- | \par
- | }
- | \advance\headingtemp-\baselineskip
- | \advance\headingtemp\smallskipamount
- | \vskip \headingtemp
- | \noindenttrue
- | \def\tmp{#4}
- | \message{*\expandafter\TOCtrim\meaning\tmp. }
- |}
-\endcode
-%}}} headings
-%{{{ footnotes
-\section{Footnotes}
-
- We define a new command |\note| that replaces use of the
- |\footnote| command. This takes one parameter---the text of the
- footnote---and supplies automatically-numbered footnote markers.
-
- The |\newcount| command implicitly sets the counter to~0.
-
-\code
- |\newcount\notecount
-\smallskip
- |\def\note{%
- | \global\advance\notecount+1
- | \footnote{\number\notecount}%
- |}
-\endcode
-
- We add a parameter for the indentation of footnote paragraphs.
-\code
- |\newdimen\footnoteparindent
- |\footnoteparindent=\parindent
-\endcode
-
- Now we modify the definition of |\footnote| in plain~\TeX\ (see
- TeXbook p.\thinspace363). It has the same function as
- plain~\TeX's |\footnote|, but uses extra parameters
- (|\everyfootnote|, |\footnotetextmark|), and handles the case
- ${\it parindent}=0\pt$.
-\code
- |\newtoks\everyfootnote
-\smallbreak
- |\catcode`\@=11
- |\def\footnote#1{\let\@sf\empty
- | \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
- | \footnotetextmark{#1}\@sf\vfootnote{#1}}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup % matched by \@foot
- | \interlinepenalty=\interfootnotelinepenalty
- | \parindent=\footnoteparindent
- | \leftskip=0pt
- | \the\everyfootnote
- | \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox \splitmaxdepth=\dp\strutbox
- | \floatingpenalty=20000
- | \indent\footstrut
- | \ifdim\parindent>1em
- | \llap{\footnotenotemark{#1}\enspace}%
- | \else
- | \footnotenotemark{#1}\enspace
- | \fi
- | \futurelet\next\fo@t
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\@foot{\smallskip\egroup}
-\smallskip
- |\catcode`\@=12
-\endcode
- These two parameters control the formatting of the footnote
- marker in the text and in the note itself. They take one
- parameter, a \<number>. The default definitions simply use a
- superscript in maths mode.
-\code
- |\def\footnotetextmark#1{$^{#1}$}
- |\def\footnotenotemark#1{$^{#1}$}
-\endcode
-%}}} footnotes
-%{{{ in-paragraph commands
-
-\section{Miscellaneous in-paragraph commands}
-
-
-\subsec{Writing the current date}
-
-\let\n=\relax
-\def\today{\n{\number\day} \monthname\month\ \n{\number\year}}
-\def\monthname#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or
- January\or February\or March\or April\or
- May\or June\or July\or August\or
- September\or October\or November\or December%
- \fi
-}
-
- We define a macro |\today| that prints today's date. I used to
- have the option of the abbreviated date but decided this was an
- unnecessary complication. The format `\today' is usual
- in non-American countries, and is recommended by {\it Hart's
- Rules}\footnote*{Horace Hart, {\it Hart's Rules for Compositors
- and Readers at the University Press, Oxford}, 39th~ed.,
- completely revised (Oxford University Press, 1990),
- p.\thinspace19.} and Strunk \&
- White.\footnote\dag{William Strunk jun., and E.~B. White, {\it
- The Elements of Style}, 3rd~ed.\ (Macmillan, 1979),
- p.\thinspace3. The American format is given first but followed
- by the observation that the day--month--year format is `an
- excellent way to write that date; the figures are separated by a
- word, and are, for that reason, quickly grasped'.}
-\code
- |\def\today{\n{\number\day} \monthname\month\ \n{\number\year}}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\monthname#1{%
- | \ifcase#1\or
- | January\or February\or March\or April\or
- | May\or June\or July\or August\or
- | September\or October\or November\or December%
- | \fi
- |}
-\endcode
- Redefine the |\monthname| macro if you want different names for
- the months.
-
-
-\def\isodate{\n{\number\year}--\twodigits\month--\twodigits\day}
-\def\twodigits#1{%
- \ifnum#1<10 0\fi \number#1%
-}
-
- Here's a definition for the date in ISO~8601/BS~4795
- format,\footnote\ddag{{\it The Oxford Writers' Dictionary}
- (Oxford University Press, 1990), under `date'. I~have not read
- the relevant standards.} which puts the year first, giving
- `\isodate':
-\code
- |\def\isodate{\n{\number\year}--\twodigits\month--\twodigits\day}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\twodigits#1{%
- | \ifnum#1<10 0\fi \number#1%
- |}
-\endcode
-
-
-\subsec{Raising things}
-
- The |\flushtop| macro prints its argument in a box raised so
- that the its top is aligned with the top of a letter X in the
- current font.
-\code
- |\def\flushtop#1{%
- | \leavevmode
- | \begingroup
- | \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox2\hbox{X}%
- | \dimen0\ht2 \advance\dimen0-\ht0
- | \raise\dimen0\box0
- | \endgroup
- |}
-\endcode
- This allows us to define a fairly generic version of the \LaTeX\
- logo:
-\code
- |\def\La{L\negthinspace\flushtop{a}}
- |\def\LaTeX{\La\TeX}
-\endcode
- I have not given a definition for the \LaTeX~2e logo, since
- I~think that `|\LaTeX~2e|' (or `|\LaTeX2e|' if you prefer) is
- adequate, whereas Addison--Wesley think it should be `|\LaTeX|
- |\kern0.05em| |2$| |_{\textstyle| |\varepsilon}| |$|' in regular
- text and something involving bold maths in boldface. SImilarly,
- I do not include macros for Bib\TeX, Sli\TeX, AMS-\TeX, and so
- on; the |texlogos.sty| file from the Eplain package has
- definitions for these.
-
-\def\superiorletter#1{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam
- \vphantom{t}\smash{#1}}}
-
- Here's a variation which raises a scriptstyle letter so that
- its {\it x}-height matches the cap-height of the body text,
- thus making `M\superiorletter{\b c\kern0.1ex }Donald' and
- `1\superiorletter{\b a}', `1\superiorletter{\b o}',
- `1\superiorletter{er}', `2\superiorletter{\`eme}',
- `1\superiorletter{st}', `2\superiorletter{nd}',
- `3\superiorletter{rd}' and `659\superiorletter{th}' (which I
- prefer to $659^{\rm th}$).
-\code
- |\def\superiorletter#1{%
- | \flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam \vphantom{x}\smash{#1}}%
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\Mc{M\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam \b{c}}}
-\endcode
-
-
-%}}} in-paragraph commands
-\endcodefile
-\enddocument
-\bye
-%}}} pdcfmt2
-
-%Local variables:
-%fill-prefix: " "
-%fold-folded-p: t
-%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index a7d81d4b601..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,398 +0,0 @@
-% pdcfmt2.tex 2.4 1995/04/06 -- macros for formatting
-
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex",
-%%% version = "2.4",
-%%% date = "1995/04/06",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "Formatting macros for plain TeX documents.
-%%% This file was generated by running
-%%% plain TeX on pdcfmt2.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcfmt2.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "",
-%%% }
-
-\message{2.4 <pdc 1995/04/06>}
-
-\toksdef\toksa=0
-\chardef\other=12
-\def\declareactivechar#1{%
- \toksa\expandafter{\verbatimplains\do#1}%
- \edef\verbatimplains{\the\toksa }%
- \catcode`#1\active
-}
-\def\verbatimplains{\do\\\do\{\do\}\do\_\do\$\do\#\do\&\do\%}
-\def\verbatimactives{\do\-\do\`\do\'\do\~\do\^\do\ }
-\chardef\other=12
-\newtoks\everyverbatim
-\bgroup \catcode`\-=13\catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 \toksa={\egroup
- \def\setupverbatim{%
- \frenchspacing
- \spaceskip0pt \xspaceskip0pt % use spacing of font
- \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##112 }\verbatimplains
- \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1\active }\verbatimactives
- \let`\ttlq \let'\ttrq
- \let~\tttilde \let^\ttcircum \let-\ttminus
- \the\everyverbatim
- }
-}\the\toksa
-\def\ttlq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char18 }}
-\def\ttrq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char19 }}
-\def\tttilde{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\~ }}
-\def\ttcircum{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\^ }}
-\def\ttminus{-}
-\def\defverbatim#1{%
- \ifcat\noexpand#1\noexpand~\else \declareactivechar#1 \fi
- \begingroup \uccode`\~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
- \def~{%
- \leavevmode
- \begingroup \tt \setupverbatim
- \catcode`#1\active \let~\endgroup
- }%
- }}\the\toksa
-}
-\defverbatim\|
-\newtoks\everylisting
-\def\listfile#1{
- \medskip
- \begingroup
- \parindent=0pt \parskip=0pt
- \def\par{\null\endgraf}\obeylines
- \setupverbatim \maketabstab
- \tt \the\everylisting
- \input#1
- \endgroup
- \medskip\noindent\ignorespaces
-}
-{\catcode`\^^I=\active
- \gdef\maketabstab{\catcode`\^^I\active \def^^I{\hskip 4em}}
-}
-\newif\ifnoindent
-\newbox\parbox
-\newdimen\parboxsep \parboxsep=1pc
-\everypar={%
- \ifvoid\parbox
- \ifnoindent {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse \fi
- \else
- {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse
- \dp\parbox=0pt
- \hbox to 0pt{\hss \box\parbox \hskip\parboxsep}%
- \fi
-}
-\def\beginthe#1{%
- \begingroup\def\PDCFMTblockname{#1}%
-}
-\def\endthe#1{%
- \def\tmp{#1}%
- \ifx\tmp\PDCFMTblockname
- \endgroup
- \else
- \errmessage{You should have said \string\endthe{\blockname}}%
- \fi
-}
-\def\PDCFMTendenv#1{
- \smallskip
- \endthe{#1}
- \global\noindenttrue
-}
-\newdimen\envindent \envindent=1pc
-\def\PDCFMTindent{%
- \ifdim\parindent>0pt
- \parindent
- \else
- \envindent
- \fi
-}
-\newtoks\everyquotation
-\def\quotation{
- \smallskip
- \beginthe{quotation}
- \advance\leftskip\PDCFMTindent
- \noindenttrue
- \the\everyquotation
-}
-\def\endquotation{\PDCFMTendenv{quotation}}
-\newtoks\everytextlist
-\newif\ifnumbered
-\newcount\textlistdepth \textlistdepth=-1
-\newcount\textlistcount
-\def\textlist{%
- \par
- \beginthe{textlist}
- \advance\textlistdepth 1
- \textlistcount0
- \def\\{
- \smallskip\noindent
- \advance\textlistcount1
- \llap{%
- \ifnumbered
- \numberfordepth\textlistdepth\textlistcount
- \else
- \bulletfordepth\textlistdepth
- \fi\enspace}%
- \ignorespaces
- }
- \advance\leftskip\PDCFMTindent
- \the\everytextlist
-}
-\def\endtextlist{\PDCFMTendenv{textlist}}
-\newtoks\everybullets
-\def\bullets{\textlist \numberedfalse \the\everybullets}
-\let\endbullets=\endtextlist
-\def\bulletfordepth#1{%
- \ifcase#1 $\bullet$\or --\or $\circ$\else $\cdot$\fi
-}
-\newtoks\everynumbered
-\def\numbered{\textlist \numberedtrue \the\everynumbered}
-\let\endnumbered=\endtextlist
-\def\numberfordepth#1#2{%
- \ifcase#1 \n{\number#2}.\or (\n{\number#2})\or
- ({\it\alphabetletter#2\/})\else (\romannumeral#2)\fi
-}
-\let\n\relax
-\def\alphabetletter#1{%
- \ifcase#1 ??? \or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\else
- \xxxalphabetletter#1\fi
-}
-\def\xxxalphabetletter#1{%
- \ifcase#1 \or\or\or\or\or\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or
- k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or
- v\or w\or x\or y\or z\else !!!\fi
-}
-\newdimen\tagmaxwidth
-\newtoks\everytagged
-\def\tagged{%
- \par
- \beginthe{tagged}
- \let\\\TAG
- \ifdim\leftmargin=0pt
- \tagmaxwidth\PDCFMTindent
- \else
- \tagmaxwidth\leftmargin
- \fi
- \the\everytagged
- \ifdim\tagmaxwidth>\leftmargin
- \leftskip\tagmaxwidth \advance\leftskip-\leftmargin
- \fi
-}
-\def\endtagged{\PDCFMTendenv{tagged}}
-\newtoks\everytag
-\def\TAG{%
- \smallskip\noindent
- \setbox0=\hbox\bgroup % matched by \TAGfinish
- \the\everytag\ignorespaces
- \futurelet\next\TAGtest
-}
-\def\TAGtest{%
- \ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next
- \let\next\TAGgotbrace
- \else
- \let\next\TAGnobrace
- \fi \next
-}
-\def\TAGgotbrace{%
- \bgroup\aftergroup\TAGfinish
- \let\next
-}
-\def\TAGnobrace#1{%
- #1\TAGfinish
-}
-\def\TAGfinish{%
- \unskip\hskip0.5em\egroup % matches \TAG
- \ifdim \wd0 < \tagmaxwidth
- \wd0=\tagmaxwidth
- \llap{\box0}%
- \else
- \hskip-\tagmaxwidth
- \unhbox0 \unskip\quad
- \fi
- \ignorespaces
-}
-\newtoks\everylines
-\def\lines{
- \par
- \beginthe{lines}
- \nobreak\smallskip\hrule\nobreak\smallskip
- \obeylines
- \parindent=0pt \parskip=0pt
- \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
- \the\everylines
- \nobreak
-}
-\def\endlines{
- \nobreak\smallskip
- \endthe{lines}
- \hrule\smallskip
- \global\noindenttrue
-}
-\newcount\linenumber
-\newcount\PDCFMTcount
-\def\startlinenumbering{%
- \global\linenumber=0 \global\PDCFMTcount=5
- \everypar{\numberthisline}%
-}
-\def\continuelinenumbering{%
- \everypar{\numberthisline}%
-}
-\newtoks\everylinenum \everylinenum{\the\scriptfont0 }
-\def\numberthisline{%
- \strut
- \global\advance\linenumber1 \global\advance\PDCFMTcount-1
- \ifnum\PDCFMTcount>0 \else
- \global\advance\PDCFMTcount 5
- \rlap{\the\everylinenum \kern\hsize\kern1em \the\linenumber}%
- \fi
-}%
-\def\linesskipped#1{%
- \strut \hskip20pt $\vdots$ \hskip20pt
- {\rm(\it #1 lines omitted\rm)}\par
- \advance\linenumber#1\relax
-}
-\outer\def\display{\obeylines\startdisplay}
-\bgroup\obeylines \toksa={\egroup %
- \def\startdisplay#1^^M{%
- \catcode`\^^M=5 $$ #1 % matched by \enddisplay
- \displayindent\PDCFMTindent %
- \halign\bgroup##\hfil&&\quad##\hfil\cr %
- } %
-}\the\toksa %
-\def\enddisplay{\crcr\egroup$$}
-\def\table{%
- $$ % matching $$ is in \endtable
- \displayindent\PDCFMTindent
- \halign \bgroup
-}
-\let\endtable=\enddisplay
-\newtoks\everybnf
-\def\bnf{
- \nobreak\smallskip
- \beginthe{bnf}
- \advance\leftskip2\parindent \parindent=-\parindent
- \parskip0pt plus 1pt
- \rightskip=1\rightskip plus 3em
- \def\\{$\mid$}
- \def\>{\unskip\enspace$::=$\enspace\ignorespaces}
- \def|{`\begingroup\tt\setupverbatim\catcode`\|=13
- \def|{\endgroup'}}
- \def\{{$\lbrace$} \def\}{$\rbrace$}
- \the\everybnf
-}
-\def\endbnf{
- \smallskip
- \endthe{bnf}
- \global\noindenttrue
-}
-\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle${\it#1\/}$\rangle$}}
-\newdimen\leftmargin
-\newskip\headingtemp
-\def\doheading#1#2#3#4{
- \ifdim\lastskip<#1\relax \removelastskip \vskip#1\relax \fi
- \ifdim \leftmargin>0pt
- \global\setbox\parbox=\vtop{%
- \hsize=\leftmargin \advance\hsize-\parboxsep
- \parindent=0pt
- \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus 3em
- \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000
- \strut#2#4#3
- }
- \else
- \begingroup
- \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
- \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus0.25\hsize
- \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000
- \strut#2#4#3
- \global\headingtemp=\baselineskip
- \par
- \endgroup
- \advance\headingtemp-\baselineskip
- \ifdim\headingtemp>0pt \nobreak \vskip 1.0\headingtemp \fi
- \smallskip
- \noindenttrue
- \fi
-}
-\def\newpageheading#1#2#3#4{
- \vfill\supereject % ensure no insertions still floating
- \null\vskip#1\relax
- \moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{
- \advance\hsize\leftmargin
- \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
- \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus0.25\hsize
- \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000
- #2\strut#4#3
- \global\headingtemp=\baselineskip
- \par
- }
- \advance\headingtemp-\baselineskip
- \advance\headingtemp\smallskipamount
- \vskip \headingtemp
- \noindenttrue
- \def\tmp{#4}
- \message{*\expandafter\TOCtrim\meaning\tmp. }
-}
-\newcount\notecount
-\def\note{%
- \global\advance\notecount+1
- \footnote{\number\notecount}%
-}
-\newdimen\footnoteparindent
-\footnoteparindent=\parindent
-\newtoks\everyfootnote
-\catcode`\@=11
-\def\footnote#1{\let\@sf\empty
- \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
- \footnotetextmark{#1}\@sf\vfootnote{#1}}
-\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup % matched by \@foot
- \interlinepenalty=\interfootnotelinepenalty
- \parindent=\footnoteparindent
- \leftskip=0pt
- \the\everyfootnote
- \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox \splitmaxdepth=\dp\strutbox
- \floatingpenalty=20000
- \indent\footstrut
- \ifdim\parindent>1em
- \llap{\footnotenotemark{#1}\enspace}%
- \else
- \footnotenotemark{#1}\enspace
- \fi
- \futurelet\next\fo@t
-}
-\def\@foot{\smallskip\egroup}
-\catcode`\@=12
-\def\footnotetextmark#1{$^{#1}$}
-\def\footnotenotemark#1{$^{#1}$}
-\def\today{\n{\number\day} \monthname\month\ \n{\number\year}}
-\def\monthname#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or
- January\or February\or March\or April\or
- May\or June\or July\or August\or
- September\or October\or November\or December%
- \fi
-}
-\def\isodate{\n{\number\year}--\twodigits\month--\twodigits\day}
-\def\twodigits#1{%
- \ifnum#1<10 0\fi \number#1%
-}
-\def\flushtop#1{%
- \leavevmode
- \begingroup
- \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox2\hbox{X}%
- \dimen0\ht2 \advance\dimen0-\ht0
- \raise\dimen0\box0
- \endgroup
-}
-\def\La{L\negthinspace\flushtop{a}}
-\def\LaTeX{\La\TeX}
-\def\superiorletter#1{%
- \flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam \vphantom{x}\smash{#1}}%
-}
-\def\Mc{M\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam \b{c}}}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index a7010f20a09..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,607 +0,0 @@
-% pdcfsel.dtx -- documentation & source for pdcfsel.tex -*-tex-*-
-
-%%%@TeX-document-file {
-%%% title = "PDCFSEL, a font selection scheme for TeX",
-%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.dtx",
-%%% version = "$Revision: 3.5 $",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% date = "$Date: 1995/03/28 19:05:54 $",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% abstract = "This document describes and defines pdcfsel.tex,
-%%% a file of definitions for managing font selection in
-%%% documents based on the plain TeX macros.
-%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
-%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute
-%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
-%%% General Public License as published by the Free
-%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
-%%% or (at your option) any later version.",
-%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
-%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
-%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
-%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
-%%% License for more details.",
-%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
-%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write
-%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
-%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
-%%%}
-
-%{{{ pdcfsel
-%{{{ premable
-
-\relax
-\input pdccode
-
-\document
-\rcs$Id: pdcfsel.dtx,v 3.5 1995/03/28 19:05:54 pdc Exp $\endrcs
-
-\codefile{pdcfsel.tex}
-
-%}}} premable
-%{{{ intro
-
-\author{P. Damian Cugley}
-\title{PDCFSEL, a font-selection scheme for \TeX}
-\section{Introduction}
-
- This document describes PDCFSEL, a file of font selection macros
- designed to be used with documents using the plain \TeX\ format
- (rather than \LaTeX, for example).
-
- The PDCFSEL macros perform a similar function to the so-called
- New Font Selection Scheme~2 (used in \LaTeX~2e). PDCFSEL uses a
- simpler model of font selection, and so is a smaller
- package---about 110~lines of code---which is just as well as a
- copy of it will probably need to be included with documents
- using it. The description of which fonts are used in a document
- can be relatively compact, despite not using any special
- database files.
-
-\subsec{Organizing fonts into fontsets}
-
- We can arrange the fonts used in an imaginary \TeX\ document in
- a table like so (with an asterisk marking fonts that have to be
- scaled to fit):
- $$\def\*{{\rm*}}
-\vbox{\halign{\strut#\hfil&\quad\vrule#&&\quad\tt#\hfil\cr
- && |\rm|&|\it|&|\bf|&|\bi|&|\mi|&|\sy|\cr
-\noalign{\nointerlineskip}\omit& height \jot\cr
-\noalign{\hrule}\omit& height 1\jot\cr
-\noalign{\nointerlineskip}%
- body text&& cmr10& cmti10& cmbx10& cmbxti10& cmmi10& cmsy10\cr
- footnotes&& cmr8& cmti8& cmbx8& cmbxti10\*& cmmi8& cmsy8\cr
- script&& cmr7& cmti7& cmbx7& cmbxti10\*& cmmi7& cmsy7\cr
- scriptscript&& cmr5& cmti7\*& cmbx5& cmbxti10\*& cmmi5& cmsy5\cr
-\noalign{\nointerlineskip}\omit& height\jot depth\jot&\multispan6\dotfill\cr
-\noalign{\nointerlineskip}%
- heading&& cmss12& cmssi12& -&-&-&-\cr
- subheading&& cmss10& cmssi10& -&-&-&-\cr
-}}
- $$
- The column headings are {\it font nicknames}. These nicknames
- are used as described in the {\it\TeX book} to switch between
- fonts in the same row. Each has a corresponding {\it fam}
- used in maths mode, with symbolic names like |\itfam| and
- |\bffam| (we define $\hbox{|\rmfam|}=0 $ for consistency).
- I~have added nicknames |\mi| and |\sy| for maths italic and
- maths symbol respectively.
-
- Each row of the table is a {\it fontset}. Plain \TeX\ defines a
- single fontset (which is like the `body text' row of this
- table); in Appendix~E, Knuth discusses formats that switch
- between different fontsets with macros like |\ninepoint| and
- |\eightpoint|. \LaTeX~2.09 uses many fontsets, called
- |\normalsize|, |\large|, and so on. (NFSS~2 uses a more complex
- system, where size, weight, and slant may be changed
- independently of each other.)
-
- In this table, subheadings and body text have different fontsets
- in the above, even though the fonts are the same size. Also,
- there are no |\sf| fonts; the headings are printed in sanserif
- by using a fontset with |\rm| mapped on to a sanserif font.
- This is more logical and flexible than the \LaTeX\ approach.
-
- We can call font families which allow this table to work tidily
- `regular', and families (like Computer Modern) that require
- exceptions `irregular'. The above table has one exception
- (|\it| in scriptscript must use a scaled font); the CM Bold
- Extended Text Italic fonts can be described as regular if we
- think of the `body text' entry as being `|cmbxti10 at 10pt|', so
- that the fonts in that column are scaled fonts without
- exception. To make font specification compact, we want to take
- advantage of regular families as much as possible, while not
- making it difficult to include exceptions.
-
-\subsec{Introduction to using PCDFSEL}
-
- PDCFSEL uses no databases of font families, and loads no fonts
- by default. This makes it more flexible, but also requires
- document designers to write a `mini-database' of those fonts
- used in the document. The above scheme might be defined as
- follows:
-\smallskip
-\halign{\indent#\hfil\cr
- |\input pdcfsel|\cr
-\noalign{\smallbreak}%
- |\newfam\bifam|\cr
-\noalign{\smallbreak}%
- |\def\texttemplate{%|\cr
- | \m{rm}{cmr}\m{it}{cmti}\m{bf}{cmbx}\@\m{bi}{cmbxti10}%|\cr
- | \M{mi}{cmmi}\M{sy}{cmsy}%|\cr
- |}|\cr
- |\loadfont\scriptscriptit{cmti7 at 5pt }|\cr
- |\xfontset{scriptscript}\texttemplate{5}|\cr
- |\xfontset{script}\texttemplate{7}|\cr
- |\fontset{note}\texttemplate{8}{10pt}{scriptscript}{scriptscript}|\cr
- |\fontset{body}\texttemplate{10}{12pt}{script}{scriptscript}|\cr
-\noalign{\smallbreak}%
- |\def\headingtemplate{%|\cr
- | \f{rm}{cmss}\f{it}{cmssi}%|\cr
- |}|\cr
- |\fontset{subheading}\headingtemplate{10}{12pt}{subheading}{subheading}|\cr
- |\fontset{heading}\headingtemplate{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading}|\cr
-\noalign{\smallbreak}%
- |\bodyfonts|\cr
-}
-\smallbreak
-\noindent
- This defines commands |\bodyfonts|, |\notefonts|,
- |\headingfonts| and |\subheadingfonts| which switch between
- fontsets. (The {\it script} and {\it scriptscript} fontsets,
- which are defined with |\xfontset|, are used only in maths
- mode and don't need `-|fonts|' commands.) These -|fonts|
- commands are not usually used directly in documents;
- |\notefonts| will be used in some |\footnote| command,
- |\headingfonts| in some heading-generating command, and so on.
-
- Changes of fontset are accompanied by changes in parameters like
- |\baselineskip| and pseudo-parameters like |\smallskipamount|,
- and give definitions to the {\it maths font tables}
- |\textfont\rmfam|, \dots, |\scriptscriptfont\syfam| (for those
- fonts that will be used in maths mode).
-
- We want font nickname commands to be efficient, because they
- are expected to be more common than changes between rows in
- the table. In this implementation, after an invocation of
- |\bodyfonts|, the macro |\rm| expands to exactly `|\fam\rmfam
- \bodyrm|'.
-
-\subsec{How the rest of this document is organized}
-
- The remainder of this document is a description of all of
- |pdcfsel.tex|, including more details of how the commands it
- defines are used.
-
- Running this document (|pdcfsel.dtx|) through plain \TeX\
- creates the definitions file (|pdcfsel.tex|) in addition to
- the usual |dvi| and |log| files. This way the macros and
- their documentation may be kept together in one file. The
- definition lines are numbered.
-
- The definitions start with macros for loading individual
- fonts, followed by the macros used to group fonts into
- fontsets.
-%}}} intro
-%{{{ getting started
-
-\section{Getting started}
-
-\subsec{File identification}
-
- We start with some comments indentifying the file.
-\code
- |% pdcfsel.tex -- macros for loading fonts -*-tex-*-
- |
- |%%%@TeX-document-file {
- |%%% title = "PDC Font Selection Scheme",
- |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex",
- \|\%\%\% version \space\space\space= "\fileversion",
- \|\%\%\% Date \space\space\space\space\space\space= "\filedate",
- \|\%\%\% creator\space\space\space\space= "\filename",
- |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
- |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
- |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
- |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
- |%%% abstract = "A file of definitions for managing font
- |%%% selection in documents based on the plain
- |%%% TeX macros.
- |%%% This file was generated by running
- |%%% plain TeX on pdcfsel.dtx.",
- |%%% dependencies = ""
- |%%%}
- |
- \|\string\message\{\fileversion\space\string<%
- \fileauthor\space\filedate\string>\}
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Private names}
-
- Macros internal to FSEL all have names starting `|\FSEL|'.
-
-\subsec{Macros for edefs}
-
- These save typing |\expandafter| a lot. The expression
- `|\expcs|\<token>\arg{\<tokens>}', creates a csname from
- \<tokens> and applies \<token> to the result. In the body of an
- |\edef|, The expression `|\noexpcs|\arg{\<tokens>}' converts
- \<tokens> to a csname without expanding the result.
-\code
- |\def\expcs#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname}
- |\def\noexpcs{\expcs\noexpand}
-\endcode
-%}}} getting started
-%{{{ selecting demand-loading
-
-\section{Selecting auto-loading mode}
-
- The flag |\ifFSELautoload| is true, fonts are auto-loaded when
- they first used instead of all at the start. This is useful
- when not all the fonts described by the fontsets will be
- needed. The flag is set with the user command
- |\autoloadfonts|.
-
- When demand-loading, the fonts used
- are written to a file named after the document with a |.fnt|
- suffix. This checklist might
- be used to decide which fonts need to be sent with the
- document if it is being sent to someone to compile on a
- different \TeX\ system.
-\code
- |\newif\ifFSELautoload
- |\def\autoloadfonts{
- | \FSELautoloadtrue
- | \csname newwrite\endcsname \FSELfile
- | \immediate\openout\FSELfile=\jobname.fnt
- |}
-\endcode
-%}}} selecting demand-loading
-%{{{ making csname for one font
-
-\section{How to set up the csname for one font}
-
- The macro |\loadfont| is used to load individual fonts, defining
- a control sequence name (csname) which may be used later to
- switch to that font. When not demand-loading fonts, this is
- just like |\global\font| followed by expanding the
- |\everyloadfont| macro.
-
- If the csname is already defined, then this command does
- nothing. This is so that irregularities in the font scheme for
- the document can be allowed for. Parameter |#1| is the csname,
- for example `|\bodyrm|', and |#2| is the external name, for
- example `|cmr10|' or `|cmr10 at 12pt|'.
-\code
- |\def\loadfont#1#2{%
- | \ifx#1\relax
- | \FSELloadfont#1{#2}%
- | \else\ifx#1\UNDEFINED
- | \FSELloadfont#1{#2}%
- | \fi\fi
- |}
-\endcode
- (We have to compare |#1| against both |\relax|, which is
- produced by |\csname|--|\endcsname|, and a completely undefined
- csname.) The macro |\FSELloadfont| doesa the actual work of
- loading the font.
-\code
- |\def\FSELloadfont#1#2{%
- | \ifFSELautoload
-\endcode
-\begingroup \leftskip=\parindent \advance\leftskip4\fontdimen6\tentt
-\noindent{\it Demand-loading}. We don't load the font, instead we
- define a csname as a macro. When expanded this new macro will
- (a)~write the font name to the |fnt| file; (b)~define the macro
- |\subfont| to load |cmr10| instead (in case \TeX\ stops with a
- `font not loadable' message); (c)~load the font for real (this
- overwrites the macro); (d)~call |\everyloadfont| for per-font
- customization and (e)~switch to the new font.
-\par\endgroup
-\code
- | \edef#1{%
- | \write\FSELfile{#2}%
- | \def\noexpand\subfont{\global\font\noexpand#1cmr10 }%
- | \global\font\noexpand#1#2\relax
- | \noexpand\everyloadfont\noexpand#1{#2}%
- | \noexpand#1%
- | }%
- | \else
-\endcode
-\leftline{\hskip4\fontdimen6\tentt \indent{\it Immediate loading}.}
-\code
- | \global\font#1#2\relax \everyloadfont#1{#2}%
- | \fi
- |}
-\endcode
-
- The macro |\everyloadfont| is expanded immediately after
- actually loading a font. (The definition used is that one
- current when the font is actually loaded, not the one current
- when |\loadfont| was executed.) Its |#1| parameter is always a
- \<fontdef token>, i.e., it can be to used as a parameter to
- |\fontdimen1|. The |#2| parameter is the external name of the
- font.
-\code
- |\def\everyloadfont#1#2{}
-\endcode
- For example, in a document with a ragged-right margin, this
- might be used to suppress the stretch and
- shrink of interword spaces by being defined as follows
- $$
-\vbox{\halign{#\hfil\cr
- |\def\everyloadfont#1#2{%|\cr
- | \fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt|\cr
- |}|\cr
-}}
- $$
-%}}} making csname for one font
-%{{{ making a fontset
-
-\section{How to set up a fontset}
-
- Now that we know how to define individual font csnames, we
- need the mechanism for grouping them in to fontsets. A
- fontset is defined by a template macro which says what font
- nicknames are defined and gives part of the external font
- name. The template macro takes no parameters and expands to
- a list each of whose elements are of the form
- $$
-\vbox{\halign{$#$\hfil&\quad#\hfil\cr
- \<type> \arg{\<nickname>} \arg{\<partial name>}&
- or\cr
- \cs{@} \<type> \arg{\<nickname>} \arg{\<external name>}&
- for a scaled font.\cr
-}}
- $$
- where a \<type> is one of the control sequences |\f|, |\m| or
- |\M|, and \<nickname> is the two- or three-letter nickname
- used for the font (without any leading backslash), for example
- |rm|, |it|, |bf|. There must be a font fam called
- |\|\<nickname>|fam| (|\rmfam|, |\itfam| etc.\ are already
- defined).
-
- If there is no |\@|, then the \<partial name> is a font name
- sans the size specification, such as |cmr|. The size in
- points will be appended to this (|cmr| + $10\pt$ = |cmr10|).
- If |\@| is included then the \<external name> is the complete
- font name, such as |cmr10| or |ptmr|. This will be followed
- by `{\tt\char32 at\char32 10pt\char32 }', say.
-
- The \<type> specifies how much support for mathematics this font
- requires. This is because maths mode requires that all fonts
- that might be used in a formula be loaded (because the font
- tables |\textfont|, |\scriptfont| and |\scriptscriptfont| must
- be set). The code |\f| means that the font is not used in
- maths, |\m| means that |\textfont| and |\scriptfont| will be set
- correctly for this fam, and |\M| means that |\scriptscriptfont|
- will also be set. In these cases there must be a corresponding
- token ending in `-|fam|' that expands to the fam number.
-
- The fontset name is a sequence of \<letter>s, like `|body|',
- `|note|', `|script|', `|heading|'. This is turned into a
- fontset selection macro by adding `|\|' to the front and
- `|fonts|' to the end (e.g., |\bodyfonts|). The csnames for
- loaded fonts are formed from the fontset name + the nickname
- (e.g., |\bodyrm|).
-
-\subsec{Defining the csnames for a fontset}
-
- The macro |\xfontset| defines all the csnames for the fonts in a
- fontset, without defining a `-|fonts|' macro. This is used to
- define a fontset that is never selected in its own right (e.g.,
- its fonts are used only as subscripts and superscripts), and
- also used internally by the |\fontset| command. Its arguments
- are |#1| the fontset name, |#2| the csname of a template macro,
- and |#3| a \<number> that specifies the font size (sans the
- `|pt|').
-\code
- |\def\xfontset#1#2#3{
- | \def\f##1##2{\expcs\loadfont{#1##1}{##2#3}}
- | \let\m=\f \let\M=\f
- | \def\@##1##2##3{\expcs\loadfont{#1##2}{##3 at #3pt }}
- | #2
- |}
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Defining a complete fontset}
-
- The user command |\fontset| is used to define a complete
- fontset. Its parameters are
- |#1| (a string of letters) is the fontset name,
- |#2| (a csname) is a template macro,
- |#3| (a \<number>) is size in points,
- |#4| (a \<skip>) is baseline skip,
- |#5| (a fontset name) is the scriptstyle fontset, and
- |#6| (a fontset name) is the scriptscriptstyle fontset.
-\code
- |% Set up a fontset -- define \#1fonts
- |\def\fontset#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
- | \xfontset{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-\endcode
-\begingroup\leftskip=\parindent \advance\leftskip2\fontdimen6\tentt
-\noindent
- Now to define the |\#1fonts| macro. When demand-loading, this
- macro will call |\#1mathfonts| (to ensure the fonts needed for
- maths are loaded). Then it will call |\FSELnicknames| to
- define |\rm|, |\it|, etc., and to define |\textfont\rmfam|, etc.
- Finally it will set the baseline skip and related parameters and
- switch to the new |\rm| font.
-\par\endgroup
-\code
- | \expcs\edef{#1fonts}{%
- | \ifFSELautoload \noexpcs{#1mathsfonts}\fi
- | \noexpand\FSELnicknames{#1}{#5}{#6}\noexpand#2%
- | \noexpand\setbaselineskip{#4}%
- | \noexpand\rm
- | }%
-\endcode
-\begingroup\leftskip=\parindent \advance\leftskip2\fontdimen6\tentt
-\noindent
- If we are demand-loading, we must define |\#1mathsfonts| as well.
-\par\endgroup
-\code
- | \ifFSELautoload
- | \expcs\def{#1mathsfonts}{\FSELloadmaths{#1}{#5}{#6}#2}%
- | \fi
- |}
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Setting font nicknames}
-
- |\FSELnicknames|
- gives definitions to |\f|, |\m| and |\M| so that expanding the
- template macro defines |\rm| and the like. If the fontset name
- is |ffff|, and a nickname |xx| is introduced with |\f|, the
- macro |\xx| is defined to |\ffffxx|. If it is introduced with
- |\m|, then the font table entries |\textfont\xxfam| and |\scriptfont\xxfam| are also
- set, and |\xx| expands to `|\fam\xxfam \ffffxx|'. If it is
- introduced with |\M| then |\scriptscriptfont\xxfam| is also set.
-
- The parameters are |#1| the fontset name, |#2| the fontset name
- for scriptstyle, and |#3| the fontset name for
- scriptscriptstyle. The implicit fourth parameter is the
- template macro.
-\code
- |\def\FSELnicknames#1#2#3{%
- | \let\@\relax
- | \def\f##1##2{%
- | \expcs\edef{##1}{\noexpcs{#1##1}}%
- | }%
- | \def\m##1##2{%
- | \expcs\textfont{##1fam}\csname#1##1\endcsname
- | \expcs\scriptfont{##1fam}\csname#2##1\endcsname
- | \expcs\edef{##1}{%
- | \fam\expcs\noexpand{##1fam}%
- | \expcs\noexpand{#1##1}%
- | }%
- | }%
- | \def\M##1{%
- | \expcs\scriptscriptfont{##1fam}\csname#3##1\endcsname
- | \m{##1}%
- | }%
- |}
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Setting the baseline skip}
- The second helper macro, |\setbaselineskip|, sets
- |\baselineskip| and a bunch of related paramaters and
- pseudo-parameters like |\smallskipamount|. It takes one
- parameter, a \<skip>.
-\notepar
- My definitions for the skips that go before and after displays
- put less white\-space around displays than is set in plain \TeX.
- This can be changed by redefining this macro in a style file.
-\endnotepar
-\code
- |\def\setbaselineskip#1{%
- | \baselineskip#1\relax \normalbaselineskip\baselineskip
- | \jot0.25\baselineskip
- | \smallskipamount 0.25\baselineskip plus 0.083\baselineskip
- | minus 0.083\baselineskip
- | \medskipamount 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.167\baselineskip
- | minus 0.167\baselineskip
- | \bigskipamount 1\baselineskip plus 0.333\baselineskip
- | minus 0.333\baselineskip
- | \abovedisplayskip\medskipamount
- | \abovedisplayshortskip\abovedisplayskip
- | \advance\abovedisplayshortskip-1\abovedisplayskip
- | \belowdisplayskip\medskipamount
- | \belowdisplayshortskip\smallskipamount
- |}
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Loading maths fonts}
- Finally, we need to force the fonts used in maths at a given
- size to be loaded. for |\f| fonts this does nothing; for |\m|
- fonts it loads the text and script fonts; for |\M| fonts it also
- loads the scriptscript font.
-
- This is done the first time this fontset is selected, even if no
- formulas are used (rather than trying to do something
- complicated like use |\everymath|\dots). Because this macro
- only needs to be used once for each fontset, it finishes by
- redefining |\#1mathfonts| to be the same as |\relax|.
-
- Its parameters are |#1| the fontset name, |#2| the fontset name
- for scriptstyle, and |#3| the fontset name for scriptscriptstyle.
-\code
- |\def\FSELloadmaths#1#2#3{%
- | \let\@\relax \def\f##1##2{}%
- | \def\m##1##2{\csname#1##1\endcsname \csname#2##1\endcsname}%
- | \def\M##1{\csname#3##1\endcsname \m{##1}}%
- | \global\expcs\let{#1mathsfonts}\relax
- |}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} making a fontset
-%{{{ finishing up
-
-\section{Finishing up}
-
- We define |\rmfam|, |\mifam| and |\syfam| as aliases for the
- numbers $0$, $1$ and $2$. This is so that the maths fonts may
- be included in the font templates without any special
- arrangements. The names |\itfam|, |\bffam|, |\ttfam|, and |\slfam| are set in |plain.tex|.
-\code
- |\chardef\rmfam=0 \chardef\mifam=1 \chardef\syfam=2
-\endcode
- Note that we do not include an alias for the the maths
- extension font's fam number. This is because there is only
- one maths extension font---|cmex10|---used for all sizes, so it
- does not belong in any fontset.
-
-\section{Summary of user commands}
-
- The following lists the user commands provided by FSEL. A
- \<fontset name> is a sequence of letters like |note|;
- \<points> is a \TeX\ \<number> representing size in points
- (without any final |pt|); an \<external name> is the external
- name for a font (e.g., `|cmr12|').
-
-\medskip\hrule\medskip
-
-\begingroup \parindent=0pt
-
- |\autoloadfonts|
-
- |\loadfont|\<csname>\arg{\<external name>}
-
- |\xfontset|\arg{\<fontset name>}\<csname>\arg{\<points>}
-
- |\fontset|\arg{\<fontset
- name>}\<csname>\arg{\<points>}\arg{\<skip>}\arg{\<fontset
- name>}\arg{\<fontset name>}
-
- |\def\everyloadfont#1#2{| \dots\ |}|
-
- |\def\setbaselineskip#1{| \dots\ |}|
-
-\medskip\hrule\medskip
-
-\endgroup
-
-%}}} finishing up
-%{{{ bugs
-
-\section{Bugs}
-
- FSEL clobbers the macros |\f|, |\m|, |\M| and |\@|.
-%}}} bugs
-\endcodefile
-\enddocument
-\bye
-
-%}}} pdcfsel
-
-%Local variables:
-%fold-folded-p: t
-%fill-prefix: " "
-%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 3b68aada1ab..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,110 +0,0 @@
-% pdcfsel.tex -- macros for loading fonts -*-tex-*-
-
-%%%@TeX-document-file {
-%%% title = "PDC Font Selection Scheme",
-%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex",
-%%% version = "3.5",
-%%% Date = "1995/03/28",
-%%% creator = "pdcfsel.dtx",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% abstract = "A file of definitions for managing font
-%%% selection in documents based on the plain
-%%% TeX macros.
-%%% This file was generated by running
-%%% plain TeX on pdcfsel.dtx.",
-%%% dependencies = ""
-%%%}
-
-\message{3.5 <pdc 1995/03/28>}
-\def\expcs#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname}
-\def\noexpcs{\expcs\noexpand}
-\newif\ifFSELautoload
-\def\autoloadfonts{
- \FSELautoloadtrue
- \csname newwrite\endcsname \FSELfile
- \immediate\openout\FSELfile=\jobname.fnt
-}
-\def\loadfont#1#2{%
- \ifx#1\relax
- \FSELloadfont#1{#2}%
- \else\ifx#1\UNDEFINED
- \FSELloadfont#1{#2}%
- \fi\fi
-}
-\def\FSELloadfont#1#2{%
- \ifFSELautoload
- \edef#1{%
- \write\FSELfile{#2}%
- \def\noexpand\subfont{\global\font\noexpand#1cmr10 }%
- \global\font\noexpand#1#2\relax
- \noexpand\everyloadfont\noexpand#1{#2}%
- \noexpand#1%
- }%
- \else
- \global\font#1#2\relax \everyloadfont#1{#2}%
- \fi
-}
-\def\everyloadfont#1#2{}
-\def\xfontset#1#2#3{
- \def\f##1##2{\expcs\loadfont{#1##1}{##2#3}}
- \let\m=\f \let\M=\f
- \def\@##1##2##3{\expcs\loadfont{#1##2}{##3 at #3pt }}
- #2
-}
-% Set up a fontset -- define \#1fonts
-\def\fontset#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
- \xfontset{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \expcs\edef{#1fonts}{%
- \ifFSELautoload \noexpcs{#1mathsfonts}\fi
- \noexpand\FSELnicknames{#1}{#5}{#6}\noexpand#2%
- \noexpand\setbaselineskip{#4}%
- \noexpand\rm
- }%
- \ifFSELautoload
- \expcs\def{#1mathsfonts}{\FSELloadmaths{#1}{#5}{#6}#2}%
- \fi
-}
-\def\FSELnicknames#1#2#3{%
- \let\@\relax
- \def\f##1##2{%
- \expcs\edef{##1}{\noexpcs{#1##1}}%
- }%
- \def\m##1##2{%
- \expcs\textfont{##1fam}\csname#1##1\endcsname
- \expcs\scriptfont{##1fam}\csname#2##1\endcsname
- \expcs\edef{##1}{%
- \fam\expcs\noexpand{##1fam}%
- \expcs\noexpand{#1##1}%
- }%
- }%
- \def\M##1{%
- \expcs\scriptscriptfont{##1fam}\csname#3##1\endcsname
- \m{##1}%
- }%
-}
-\def\setbaselineskip#1{%
- \baselineskip#1\relax \normalbaselineskip\baselineskip
- \jot0.25\baselineskip
- \smallskipamount 0.25\baselineskip plus 0.083\baselineskip
- minus 0.083\baselineskip
- \medskipamount 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.167\baselineskip
- minus 0.167\baselineskip
- \bigskipamount 1\baselineskip plus 0.333\baselineskip
- minus 0.333\baselineskip
- \abovedisplayskip\medskipamount
- \abovedisplayshortskip\abovedisplayskip
- \advance\abovedisplayshortskip-1\abovedisplayskip
- \belowdisplayskip\medskipamount
- \belowdisplayshortskip\smallskipamount
-}
-\def\FSELloadmaths#1#2#3{%
- \let\@\relax \def\f##1##2{}%
- \def\m##1##2{\csname#1##1\endcsname \csname#2##1\endcsname}%
- \def\M##1{\csname#3##1\endcsname \m{##1}}%
- \global\expcs\let{#1mathsfonts}\relax
-}
-\chardef\rmfam=0 \chardef\mifam=1 \chardef\syfam=2
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.fnt b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.fnt
deleted file mode 100644
index ac5aae10e59..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.fnt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-cmr12
-cmr9
-cmti12
-cmti9
-cmbx12
-cmbx9
-cmmi12
-cmmi9
-cmsy9
-cmtt12
-cmss10 scaled 1200
-cmmi10 scaled 1728
-cmmi10 scaled 1200
-cmsy10 scaled 1728
-cmsy10 scaled 1200
-cmr10
-cmr7
-cmti10
-cmti7
-cmbx10
-cmbx7
-cmmi10
-cmmi7
-cmsy10
-cmsy7
-cmtt10
-cmtt10 scaled 1200
-cmbxti10 at 12pt
-cmbxti10 at 10pt
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index f2304296a7e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,942 +0,0 @@
-% pdcguide.dtx -- user guide for PDCMAC -- Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-04-06>
-
-%%%@TeX-document-file {
-%%% title = "The PDCMAC Package",
-%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.dtx",
-%%% version = "$Revision$",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% date = "$Date$",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% abstract = "A brief user guide for the PDCMAC package.",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% dependencies = "pdccmlft.tex, pdcmacvn.tex, ..."
-%%%}
-
-%{{{ pdcguide
-%{{{ preamble
-
-\errorcontextlines10000
-
-\ifx\usepsfonts!
- \def\bodyfontname{pplr} \def\bodyttfontname{phvr}
- \def\headingttfontname{phvro}
- \input pdcpsdoc
- \mathcode`.=\gbdecimal \mathcode`/="202F
-\else
- \input pdccmdoc \mathcode`.="0201 \mathcode`/="213D
-\fi
-
-\input pdcmacvn
-\majorheadline{PDCMAC Release $\pdcmacversion$} \twosidedtrue
-\noheadlinetrue
-
-\def\n#1{$ \textfont0=\font \mathcode`i=`i \mathcode`v=`v \mathcode`x=`x #1 $}
-
-\def\plainslash{/} \declareactivechar\/ \let/\plainslash
-\def\texmf#1#2{{\tt\let/=\slash% $ for matching
- \$texmf/#1%
- \def\tmp{#2}\ifx\tmp\empty \plainslash \else /#2\fi}}
-\def\url#1#2#3{{\tt#1:\penalty\exhyphenpenalty
- \plainslash\plainslash \let/=\slash #2%
- \def\tmp{#3}\ifx\tmp\empty \plainslash \else /#3\fi}}
-
-\newcount\tablecount \tablecount2
-\def\newtableid{\global\advance\tablecount1 \number\tablecount}
-
-%}}} preamble
-%{{{ intro
-\section{What is this thing you Earth people call PDCMAC?}
-%{{{ intro
-\subsec{Introduction}
-
- PDCMAC is collection of \TeX\ definition files (macro files)
- which may be useful for setting documents using plain \TeX\
- (`plain' here meaning \TeX\ formats following similar
- conventions to those of Appendix~B of the {\it\TeX book}, as
- opposed to more complex formats like \LaTeX). This package is
- much less powerful than \LaTeX~2e; it is intended to be a
- simpler solution to simpler requirements. Because it is less
- complex, the macro code should be more readily adapted by other
- \TeX\ hackers.
-
- The package includes a font-selection system, an output routine,
- general formatting macros, and `style files' which input the
- other files and set the format for documents.
-
- The name `PDCMAC' is pronounced `{\it p-d-c}-mac'. In file
- names where case matters it is always written in all-lower-case.
- The fairly consistent use of a `|pdc|-' or `|ma|-' prefix in
- this and other names is intended to prevent these files clashing
- with files from other packages. (The `|ma|-' files are part of
- the Malvern package.)
-%}}} intro
-%{{{ conventions
-\subsec{Conventions in this guide}
-
- Contents and names of computer files, and commands to be typed
- literally are printed in {\tt this distinctive font}.
- Placeholders to be filled in with real file names etc.~are
- written in {\it this italic font}.
-
-%}}} conventions
-%{{{ copying
-
-\subsec{Copying}
- The PDCMAC files are copyright \copyright\ 1990--1995 P. Damian
- Cugley. They may be used in documents, and distributed as a
- complete package as per the GNU General Public Licence
- (reproduced at the end of this document).
-
- The |tex| files generated by the |dtx| files are like `object
- files'; you should not distribute them without their source
- files (the |dtx| files).
-
- Do not modify the generated |tex| files; if you must modify the
- macros, do this by editing the |dtx| files and running them
- through \TeX\ again. If you must distribute modified versions
- (instead of persuading me to modify my copies), help reduce the
- proliferation of incompatible versions by doing the following:
-\bullets
- \\describe the modifications clearly in the printed
- documentation;
-
- \\say who modifed them in the header comments in the definition
- files, and change the version identifier;
-
- \\use a different name for the modifed definition files.
-\endbullets
- The last point is so that documents using the unmodified
- versions can coexist with the ones using modified ones.
-
-
-
-%}}} copying
-%{{{ feedback
-
-\subsec{Feedback}
- I am very interested to hear from people who find a use for this
- package. Please send comments and suggestions, or reports of
- bugs, to the address above. If you find PDCMAC useful or
- amusing, please send me a pretty postcard. Thanks.
-
-%}}} feedback
-%}}} intro
-%{{{ unpack install
-\section{Unpacking and installing the files}
-%{{{ unpack
-
-\subsec{Unpacking}
-
- Two common formats for archives are
-\bullets
-\\ (on Unix)
- |tar| files, compressed using GNU |zip| (|gzip|), and
-\\ (on MS-DOS) PKZIP-style archives.
-\endbullets
- Compressed tarfiles will have names like |pdcmac-1.0.tar.gz| or
- |pdcmac10.tgz| (the latter form is required by ISO-9660\note{ISO
- 9660 is the standard for CD-ROM file systems. Its file names
- are like MS-DOS file names: a sequence of 8-letter components
- followed by a `|.|' and three-letter suffix. ISO~9660 names use
- capital letters, but on case-sensitive operating systems these
- are usually transliterated to lower-case.} file systems).
- Unpack the package with something like
-\display \defverbatim\"
- "zcat pdcmac10.tgz | tar -xf -"
-\enddisplay
- This generates a new directory called |pdcmac-1.0|.
-
- PKZIP archives unpack files into the current directory, so they
- are unpacked like this:
-\display
- |md pdcmac|\cr
- |cd pdcmac|\cr
- |unzip a:\pdcmac10.zip|\cr
-\enddisplay
- assuming the zipfile is so named.
-
- There is a list of the files in the release in the appendix.
-%}}} unpack
-%{{{ compile
-
-\subsec{Generating the macro files}
-
- The macro files are packaged with their documentation in
- |dtx|\note{The \LaTeX~2e distribution uses the file name suffix
- |dtx| for files with a similar function. Unlike the \LaTeX\
- system, the |dtx| files for PDCMAC produce the printed
- documentation and unpack the macro files themselves using a
- single macro file |pdccode.tex| and a single run through plain
- \TeX; there are no |drv| or |ins| files.} files; run plain
- \TeX\ on each of the |dtx| files in turn to generate the macro
- files and the printed documentation. The resulting definition
- files have almost no comments in them; instead you must read the
- |dtx| files or the printed documentation.
-
- The macro files are written in the current working directory.
- They are identical to the code lines in the printed
- documentation (they are generated from the same text in the
- |dtx| files).
-
- There is a file |pdcmondo.tex| which reads all of the |dtx|
- files in turn except |pdcsty.dtx| and produces one large (70+
- pages) document as well as all their macro files. This is most
- useful if you want to make a printed listing rather than keeping
- |dvi| files for reading online.
-
-%}}} compile
-%{{{ install
-\subsec{Installing the files}
-
- The definition (|tex|) files belong in a directory where \TeX\
- can find them. In the new soon-to-be-standardized file name
- conventions TWG-TDS~$0.61$\note{The TUG Working Group on a \TeX\
- Directory Structure, {\it A Directory Structure for
- Implementation-Independent \TeX\ Files} Version~$0.61$
- (\url{ftp}{ftp.th-darmstadt.de/pub/tex/TDS-compliant/draft}{twg-tds.dvi},
- 10~February 1995).} this is the directory
- \texmf{tex/plain/pdcmac}{}. On older systems, the files go with
- all the other macro files.
-
- With TWG-TDS~$0.61$ the documentation goes in
- \texmf{doc/plain/pdcmac}{}. If you do not have a directory for
- documentation, the documentation files might as well go in the
- \TeX\ inputs directory as well.
-%}}} install
-%{{{ configure
-
-\subsec{Configuration on Unix systems}
-
- There is a |configure| script and makefile template included,
- which allows the process of unpacking to be run automatically on
- Unix systems.\note{The configuration system is based on the GNU
- Coding Standards, but was written by hand rather than using
- Autoconf.} The remainder of this section assumes you are
- installing PDCMAC on a Unix system.
-
-\subsec{Run\-ning |configure|}
-
- Start by running a Bourne Shell on the |configure| script, by
- typing `|sh configure|'. This examines your file system and
- attempts to guess suitable directories in which to put macro and
- documentation files. The |configure| script understands options
- listed in Table~1.
-
-\midinsert
-\noindent{\bf Table 1}\quad Options for |configure|. Other
- options are ignored.\smallskip
-\moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{
- \def\,{{\rm,}}
- \def\\#1\, #2&{\vbox to \ht\strutbox{\hbox{$
- \left.
- \vcenter{\ialign{\strut##\hfil\cr#1 \cr#2 \cr}}
- \right\rbrace
- $}\vss}&}
- \halign to \bodywd{\tt#\hfil\tabskip=0pt plus 1fil&
- \vtop{\noindent#\smallskip}\tabskip=0pt\cr
-\noalign{\hrule height 1pt \vskip1.5\jot}%
-\it Option&\omit\it Meaning\hfil\cr
-\noalign{\vskip1\jot \hrule \vskip1.5\jot}%
- \ttminus h\, \ttminus \ttminus help&
- Print a summary of options\cr
- \ttminus n\, \ttminus \ttminus no\ttminus create&
- Create |config.status| but don't run it to make |makefile|.\cr
- \\\ttminus t$dir$\, \ttminus \ttminus texmf=$dir$&
- Says where to find a \TeX\ directory hierarchy. For example,
- `|-t|\allowbreak|/usr/texmf|' or `|-t|\allowbreak|/usr/local/lib/tex3.14/tex|'. The
- |configure| script will often guess correctly without this
- option.\cr
- \\\ttminus p$dir$\, \ttminus \ttminus prefix=$dir$&
- Specifies the parent of the \TeX\ directory, for example,
- `|-p/usr|' or `|-p/usr/local/lib|'. This is for compatability
- with the GNU coding standards.\cr
- \\\ttminus wtds\, \ttminus \ttminus with\ttminus tds& Specify that the \TeX\ directory uses some
- approximation to the TWG-TDS $0.61$ file name
- conventions. This should not be necessary as
- |configure| will usually guess correctly.
- \cr
-\noalign{\vskip\jot \hrule height 1pt}%
-} }
-\endinsert
-
- The configuration process creates a script |config.status| which
- records the configuration; running |config.status| generates a
- file |makefile|\note{Usually a makefile is called |Makefile|,
- but I~wanted to make the package proof against file name munging
- from being copied onto MS-DOS discs.} from the template
- |makefile.in|.
-
- The |config.status| script has one option |-r| (or |--recheck|),
- which re-runs |configure| with the same arguments as were used
- to generate |config.status|; any options following |-r| are
- passed to |configure|.
-
-%}}} configure
-%{{{ make
-
-\subsec{Running |make|}
-
- Now you can use the |make| command to unpack and install all the
- files. Do `|make|' to generate all the definition files and
- documentation. Then `|make install|' to copy the macros into
- \TeX's macros directory and the documentation into \TeX's
- documentation area (assuming there is one). The standard
- targets which the makefile understands are listed in Table~2.
-
-\midinsert
-\noindent{\bf Table 2}\quad Conventional targets defined in |makefile|.\smallskip
-\moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{
- \def\,{{\rm,}}
- \def\\#1\, #2&{\vbox to \ht\strutbox{\hbox{$
- \left.
- \vcenter{\ialign{\strut##\hfil\cr#1 \cr#2 \cr}}
- \right\rbrace
- $}\vss}&}
- \halign to \bodywd{\tt make #\hfil\tabskip=0pt plus 1fil&
- \vtop{\noindent\strut#\strut\smallskip}\tabskip=0pt\cr
-\noalign{\hrule height 1pt \vskip1.5\jot}%
-\omit\it Command&\omit\it Meaning\hfil\cr
-\noalign{\vskip1\jot \hrule \vskip1.5\jot}%
- all&
- Generate all the definitions files and |dvi| files\cr
- install&
- Generate the definition files and copy them in to \TeX's
- macro area. Also copy the |dvi| files into \TeX's documentation
- area, if possible.\cr
- uninstall&
- Delete all the files that `|make install|' would install.\cr
- mostlyclean& Delete some files but not as many as `|make clean|'.\cr
- clean& Delete files from the current directory that are normally
- created by `|make all|'. Don't delete files that could be built
- using the makefile but which come with the distribution.\cr
- distclean& Delete some more files, including those made by
- configuration. If you have unpacked the files and generated the
- macro files without creating any other files, this should leave
- only the files in the distribution.\cr
- realclean& Delete files deleted `|make distclean|' and any others
- that can be rebuilt using the makefile.\cr
- TAGS& Generate a tags table file for Emacs.\cr
- dist& Make a tarfile and zipfile for the package.\cr
-\noalign{\vskip\jot \hrule height 1pt}%
-} }
-\endinsert
-%}}} make
-%}}} unpack install
-%{{{ using
-
-\section{Using PDCMAC style files for your documents}
-
- Normally a document will start by reading one of the style
- files, which in turn load the various definition files. The
- style files are intended to be more-or-less compatible with each
- other. I have arbitrarily divided the style files into
- `leaflets' and `docs'.
-%{{{ leaflets
-
-\subsec{Leaflet styles}
-
- A leaflet is only a few pages, so does not need a table of
- contents or division into large units. There is still a
- |\section| command, but it is designed for smaller divisions
- than the |\section| command used in `docs' (in a leaflet,
- |\section| produces a heading with prominence similar to that
- produced by |\subsec| in a doc).
-
- A leaflet-style document has no front matter, and so should
- start with some sort of heading for the title.
-\lines \it
- |\input pdccmlft|
- |\majorheadline{| title |} \noheadlinetrue|
- \quad commands to generate the title at the top of the first page
-\smallskip
- \quad text of the document, perhaps using |\section| commands
-\smallskip
- |\bye|
-\endlines
-%}}} leaflets
-%{{{ docs
-
-\subsec{Doc styles}
-
- A doc is something larger than a leaflet but smaller than a
- book. It has a table of contents and numbered sections and
- subsections, with section titles being reproduced in the
- headline. There is no provision for cross-references and
- automatic bibliography (which require an |aux| file and at least
- two passes through \TeX).
-
- Sections may be grouped into larger divisions I have called
- \dfn{part}s. Parts are numbered independently of sections, in
- upper-case roman numerals. (There is no special reason for not
- numbering sections within parts; I~just prefer to have fewer
- levels of numbering, so we get `\S$12.6$' instead of
- `Subsection~$4.1.6$'.)
-
-\lines\it
- |\input pdccmdoc|
- |\part{| title |}| ---or--- |\majorheadline{| title |}|
- |\section{| title |}|
- \quad contents of section
-\smallbreak
- more sections
-\smallbreak
- |\frontmatter|
- \quad front matter
- |\endfrontmatter|
- |\bye|
-\endlines
-
-\subsec{Front matter}
-
- The front matter of the document---the title page, preface,
- forword, etc.---must be printed {\it last}, with the table of
- contents at the end of the front matter; this is so that the
- table of contents may be accumulated during the \TeX ing of the
- file.\note{It has a benefit for people reading the document with
- a browser: page~1 of the document is the first page of the DVI
- file, which makes selecting a given page easy, and the table of
- contents is at the very end, so the browser's `go to last page'
- command can be used to find the table of contents quickly.}
- The front matter starts with |\frontmatter| and may contain
- |\section| commands. Such sections will be unnumbered and will
- not appear in the table of contents.
-
- For a short document, a separate title page is probably
- excessive, and an abstract may be preferable to a preface. In
- this case the first page after |\frontmatter| could have the
- title of the document (with author etc.)\ followed by an
- abstract, any copyright information (or other small print), and
- the contents (generated by |\endfrontmatter|). In other words,
- something like this:
-\lines\it
- |\frontmatter|
- \quad commands to print the title, etc.
- \quad|\abstract|
- \qquad the text of the abstract
- \quad|\endabstract|
- \quad copyright information, etc.
- |\endfrontmatter|
-\endlines
- For a longer document, there will be a separate title page and
- perhaps a preface.
-\lines\it
- |\frontmatter|
- \quad|\titlepage|
- \qquad commands to print the title, etc.
- \quad|\splittitlepage|
- \qquad print copyright information, etc.
- \quad|\endtitlepage|
- \quad|\section{Preface}|
- \qquad text of preface, etc.
- |\endfrontmatter|
-\endlines
- The macro |\splittitlepage| marks the division between the title
- page (title recto, page~i) and the back of the title page (title
- verso, page~ii), which is where copyright information goes.
- When formatting for one-sided printing, the copyright
- information belongs on the title recto, because the title verso
- will be blank, so |\splittitle| instead does |\vfill|.
-%}}} docs
-%{{{ new syms
-\subsec{New symbols}
-
- Several new symbols common to Malvern~A and PostScript fonts are
- added (listed in Table~3). Approximations built from other
- glyphs are available in Computer Modern documents.
-
-
-\def\chartable#1{%
- \midinsert
- \leftline{{\bf Table \newtableid}\quad #1}\smallskip
- \def\cs##1{\hbox to \gridwd{\hbox to2em{\csname##1\endcsname\hfil}
- {\tt\char`\\##1}\hfil}}
- \def\mcs##1{\hbox to \gridwd{\hbox to2em{$\csname##1\endcsname$\hfil}
- {\tt\char`\\##1}\hfil}}
- \def\mch##1{\hbox to \gridwd{\hbox to2em{$##1$\hfil}
- {\tt##1}\hfil}}
- \moveleft\leftmargin\vbox\bgroup
- \hrule\medskip
- \halign\bgroup ##\hfil&& \hskip\colsep##\hfil\cr
-}
-\def\endchartable{
- \egroup
- \smallskip\hrule
- \egroup
- \endinsert
-}
-
-\chartable{New symbols}
- \cs{cents}& \cs{pounds}& \cs{yen}& \cs{florin}\cr
- \cs{currency}& \cs{lguillemet}& \cs{rguillemet}& \cs{gbdecimal}\cr
- \cs{permille}& \cs{registered}& \cs{orda}& \cs{ordo}\cr
- \cs{S}& \cs{P}& \cs{dag}& \cs{ddag}\cr
-\endchartable
-
- The symbols in the last row are `new' in the sense that they
- will change according to the current font when using Malvern or
- PostScript fonts.
-
-
- The maths symbols in Table~4 will be in the current |\rm| font
- (fam~0) in PostScript documents.
-\begingroup\catcode`_=12 \catcode`\|=12
-\chartable{Maths symbols taken from Adobe's latin character set}
- \mch{<}& \mch{>}& \mcs{_}& \mch{|}\cr
- \mcs{backslash}& \mcs{setminus}& \mcs{sim}& \mcs{mid}\cr
- \mcs{bullet} &\mcs{lbrace}& \mcs{rbrace}\cr
-\endchartable
-\endgroup
-
-%}}} new syms
-%}}} using
-
-\section{Appendix}
-%{{{ tagged-table intrinsics
-
-\def\taggedtable#1#2#3{
- \medskip
- \noindent{\bf Table \newtableid}\quad#1
- \medskip
- \moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{\hsize=\bodywd
- \hrule height 1pt \medskip
- \line{\it\strut\hbox to \leftmargin{#2\hfil}{\it #3}\hfil}
- \smallskip \hrule
- }
- \tagged \everytag{\tt}
-}
-\def\endtaggedtable{
- \endtagged
- \removelastskip \medskip \hrule height 1pt \bigskip
-}
-
-%}}} tagged-table intrisnics
-%{{{ file types
-\subsec{File suffixes}
-
- In this document, `a |foo| file' refers to a file of the type
- conventionally given a name ending in `-|.foo|' (using lower
- case because \TeX\ file names are always given in lower case).
- This table lists some conventional file name suffixes used for
- files in this package.
-
-\taggedtable{File suffixes used in this package}{\hbox to
- \gridwd{Suffix\hfil Origin}}{Meaning}
-\def\\#1#2{\TAG{\hbox to \gridwd{\tt#1\hfil\rm#2}}}
-\\{1}{Unix}
- Manual page for a program, in |nroff| format.
-\\{def}{\LaTeX~2e}
- Definitions used by macro files but not expected to be referred
- to directly in user documents.
-\\{dtx}{\LaTeX~2e}
- Documented \TeX\ macros---a file which combines macro
- definitions with their printed documentation.
-\\{eps}{Adobe}
- An EPSF (Encapsulated PostScript Format) file.
-\\{fig}{Fig}
- A picture file in Fig's undocumented format.
-\\{fnt}{PDCMAC}
- Font list---a list of fonts used in a document, generated by the
- PDCFSEL macros.
-%\\{idx}{\LaTeX~$2.09$}
-% Unsorted index file. (The lamentable convention of using |idx|
-% and |ind|, both standing for `index' but representing different
-% stages in the index-generation process, is for compatibility
-% with \LaTeX.)
-\\{in}{GNU}
- Template for a configuration file---when using the |configure|
- script, the file |foo| is generated from the template |foo.in|.
-\\{tex}{\TeX}
- (1)~A plain \TeX\ document. (2)~A plain \TeX\ definition file.
-\\{tgz}{GNU}
- A Unix |tar| archive, compressed with GNU |zip|. (Same as
- |tar.gz|.)
-\\{txt}{traditional}
- Plain ASCII text, readable on the terminal.
-\\{zip}{?PKZIP}
- An MS-DOS PKZIP archive.
-\endtaggedtable
-
-%}}} file types
-%{{{ file list
-
-\subsec{List of files}
-
- Here is a list of files supplied with the package. A list of
- the files generated from these---the definition files, used in
- documents---form the next section.
-
- All the names are chosen so that they may be copied onto, say,
- an ISO~9660\note{See note~1 on page 2.} or MS-DOS file system and
- back to a sensible file system without the names being changed.
-
-\taggedtable{Files supplied in the package.}{File}{Contents}
-\\{00readme.txt}
- Brief description of the package.
-
-\\{configure}
- A shell script used to automatically configure the makefile for
- Unix systems. (This is an unavoidable exception to the rule
- that names are ISO-9660-compatible.)
-
-\\{copying.tex}
- A copy of the GNU General Public Licence, in \TeX able form.
-
-\\{copying.txt}
- A copy of the GNU General Public Licence.
-
-\\{dtxtags}
- Shellscript for making tag files in |etags|(1) format.
-
-\\{dtxtags.1}
- A Unix manual entry for |dtxtags|.\note{This (and three more
- shellscripts used in the makefile) are not intended to be
- installed anywhere, but I~included manual pages just in case
- they are---or in case the installer is curious as to what these
- scripts do.}
-
-\\{fig2epsf}
- A Unix shellscript that converts figures from Fig's format into
- Encapsulated PostScript Format (EPSF) version~$3.0$ files. It
- uses |fig2dev| (from the TransFig package) to do most of the
- work. (It munges the PostScript code produced by |fig2dev|
- 2.1.4.1 so that it will print and will work with Ghostview.)
-
-\\{fig2epsf.1}
- A Unix manual page for |fig2epsf|.
-
-\\{install.txt}
- Installation hints.
-
-\\{makefile.in}
- Template from which the configuration process generates a
- makefile, used by Unix's |make| command to automate compilation
- and installation. Should be called |Makefile.in| but that's not
- ISO-9660-compliant.
-
-\\{magrmac.dtx}
- Documentation for Malvern Greek macros. This replaces the file
- |magrmac.tex| included in Malvern release~$1.2$.
-
-\\{magrman.tex}
- Brief user manual for |magrmac.tex|. This replaces the version
- distributed with Malvern~$1.2$. It requires some Malvern~G
- fonts.
-
-\\{oput01.eps oput02.eps}
- Diagrams for |pdcoput5.dtx|.\note{The second edition of the {\it
- PostScript Language Reference Manual} says these should be called
- `-|.epsf|', but such names are not ISO-9660-compliant, so I~have
- switched to `-|.eps|'.}
-
-\\{oput01.fig oput02.fig}
- Source code for the above figures (Fig format).
-
-\\{pdcadobe.dtx}
- Source code and documentation for |pdcadobe.tex|.
-
-\\{pdccode.dtx}
- Source code and documentation for |pdccode.tex|.
-
-\\{pdccode.tex}
- Macros used by |dtx| files. This file has to be included
- because |pdccode.dtx| can't be \TeX ed without it.
-
-\\{pdccode2.tex}
- An experimental variation allowing multiple simultaneous
- code files.
-
-\\{pdcfmt2.dtx}
- Source code and documentation for formatting macros.
-
-\\{pdcfsel.dtx}
- Source code and documentation for font selection macros.
-
-\\{pdcguide.dvi}
- A copy of the user guide, already run through \TeX.
-
-\\{pdcguide.tex}
- This user guide for PDCMAC.
-
-\\{pdcl1maa.dtx}
- Source code and documentation for |pdcl1maa.tex|.
-
-\\{pdcmacvn.tex}
- Version number for the whole package.
-
-\\{pdcmisc.dtx}
- Source code and documentation for some small macro files.
-
-\\{pdcmondo.tex}
- Makes a combined listing of all the |dtx| files (except
- |pdcsty.dtx|).
-
-\\{pdcoput5.dtx}
- Source code and documentation for an output routine.
-
-\\{pdcsty.dtx}
- Source code and documentation for style files (|pdccmdoc.tex|,
- |ma55doc.tex|, etc.).
-
-\\{pinstall}
- A Unix shellscript that substitutes for the |install| command on
- systems which don't have GNU |install|.\note{I am not going to
- bother trying to make a makefile that will work with all the
- different versions of |install|, since there is no easy way to
- tell them apart and they are mutually incompatible.}
-
-\\{pinstall.1}
- A Unix manual page for |pinstall|.
-
-\\{pmkdir}
- A Unix shellscript used to create a directory. Unlike plain
- |mkdir|, it creates parent directories of the specified
- directory if they do not exist. This would be called
- |pmkdirhier| but that name is not ISO-9660-compliant.
-
-\\{pmkdir.1}
- A Unix manual page for |pmkdir|.
-
-\\{version.txt}
- List of the version identifiers of the |dtx| files and the
- shellscripts that come with the package.
-\endtaggedtable
-
-%}}} file list
-%{{{ macro files
-
-\subsec{List of definition files}
-
- The following files are the ones that are intended to go in the
- \TeX\ inputs area and to be used in documents. Here a
- \dfn{macro file} is simply a file of \TeX\ definitions; a
- \dfn{style file} is a higher-level definition file that
- specifies most of the things that affect the style of a document
- (layout, fonts, macros, etc.). Style files start by reading a
- bunch of macro files.
-
-\taggedtable{Files generated from the |dtx| files.}{File}{Contents}
-\\{ma55doc.tex}
- Style file for short documents with Malvern~55 as the text font.
- A table of contents and page headlines are generated
- automatically.
-
-\\{ma55lft.tex}
- Style file for very short documents with Malvern~55 as the text
- font. `Leaflet'-class documents have no table of contents.
-
-\\{magrmac.tex}
- Macros for typesetting in Greek with Malvern fonts (or any font
- with the Malvern~G encoding). There is a brief user's guide in
- |magrman.tex|.
-
-\\{pdcadobe.tex}
- Support for fonts with the Adobe Standard Roman and Adobe Symbol
- repertoires\note{The \dfn{repertoire} of an encoding scheme is
- the set of characters/glyphs it includes. Since PostScript
- fonts may be easily re-encoded, repertoire is more significant
- then the actual encoding.} in the |dvi| file, and ISO~8859--1
- (Latin-1) conventions in the manuscript file. The output
- encoding actually used is that variation on \TeX\ Text generated
- by the |afm2tfm| that comes with DVIPS. Newer \TeX\ systems
- should instead use PostScript fonts with (a subset of) the 1990
- Cork encoding.\note{Variously called `DC', `EC', `T1', and
- `\TeX\ Extended Text---Latin', and described in {\it TUGboat}
- 10\#4.} This file actually combines two functions: (1)~making
- the various symbols availabe via commands like |\pounds| and
- (2)~making Latin-1 characters in the manuscript produce
- corresponding characters in the output. Described in
- |pdcadobe.dtx|.
-
-
-\\{pdccmdoc.tex}
- Style file for short documents with Computer Modern Roman as the
- text font. A table of contents and page headlines are generated
- automatically.
-
-\\{pdccmlft.tex}
- Style file for very short documents with Computer Modern Roman
- as the text font. `Leaflet'-class documents have no table of
- contents.
-
-\\{pdcfmt2.tex}
- Macros for formatting text---bulleted and numbered lists, syntax
- descriptions, verbatim text, headings, etc. Most of
- the facilities used by the style files come from this file.
-
-\\{pdcfsel.tex}
- Macros for selecting fonts. Fonts are organized into
- \dfn{fontset}s (selected with macros with names like
- |\bodyfonts|) in which fonts are selected with nicknames like
- |\it|, |\bf| (specified at the start of the document using
- template macros).
-
-\\{pdchyex.tex}
- Some random British English hyphenation exceptions (developed
- while I~was using American English hyphenation paterns). You
- may not want to use this. Described in |pdcmisc.dtx|.
-
-\\{pdcimth.tex}
- Make letters in maths formulas come out in text italic instead
- of math italic. Useful if the body font isn't CMR, or if
- multiple-letter identifiers are used. Described in
- |pdcmisc.dtx|.
-
-\\{pdcl1maa.tex}
- Support for documents with using the ISO~8859--1 (Latin-1)
- character set in the manuscript file and fonts with Malvern~A
- encoding in the |dvi| file. Described in |pdcl1maa.dtx|.
-
-\\{pdccmsub.tex}
- Define some Malvern~A and PostScript glyphs (like \yen,
- \registered) by overprinting CM glyphs. Described in
- |pdcmisc.dtx|.
-
-\\{pdcmigr.tex}
- Make Greek capitals in maths mode use math italic (fam~1)
- letters instead of letters from the roman font. Especially
- useful when there are no Greek caps in the roman font.
- Described in |pdcmisc.dtx|.
-\endtaggedtable
-%}}} macro files
-%{{{ old files
-\subsec{Obselete files}
-
- The following macro files were included with the Malvern~$1.0$
- distribution, but were not intended to be installed.
- Nevertheless they appear to have been copied into some older
- versions of the Unix\TeX\ distribution. They are obselete, and
- their successors have new names (intended to reduce the chance
- of accidental clashes). I'd appreciate people removing them
- from their \TeX\ systems.
-\display
- |formac.tex|&
- |parmac.tex|&
- |utils.tex|&
- |ssoutput.tex|\cr
- |ldfonts.tex|&
- |malvern.tex|&
- |cmdoc.tex|\cr
-\enddisplay
- The following documents are similarly obselete and should not be
- in the macros directory anyway.
-\display
- |aboutmalvern.tex|&
- |latexfmv.tex|\cr
-\enddisplay
- The following macro files have the new-style names, but are
- superseded by PDCMAC~$1.0$ files. You are not required to
- remove then if you have documents using them. Fortunately, they
- appear not to have been absorbed by the Unix\TeX\ distribution
- anyway.
-\display
- |pdcfmt.tex|&
- |pdcpars.tex|&
- |pdcutil.tex|&
- |pdcoput.tex|\cr
-\enddisplay
- The new versions will have the major number of their version ID
- appended to their names (e.g., |pdcfmt2.tex|), and this way new
- and old versions may coexist, allowing older documents to still
- be processed by \TeX. The functionality of |pdcpars.tex| and
- |pdcfmt.tex| have been taken over by |pdcfmt2.tex|.
-
-
-%}}} old files
-%{{{ gpl
-
-\rigidbalancepartialpage{\bigskip}
-
-\begingroup \notefonts \setncolumns2 \everypage{} \leftmargin=0pt
- \advance\textlistdepth2 \let\section=\subsec
- \input copying.tex
- \rigidbalancepartialpage{\bigskip}
-\endgroup
-
-
-%}}} gpl
-
-\frontmatter
-%{{{ an absurd logo
-
-\ifx\asyfam\UNDEFINED
-%{{{ CMSSDC logo
-
-\moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{
-
-\font\titlefont=cmssdc10 at 24pt
-
-\leftline{\titlefont P D C M A C\quad User Guide}
-
-\bigskip
-} % end of vbox
-%}}}
-\else
-%{{{ PostScript logo
-
-\moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{\hsize=\bodywd
- \font\thefont=pplr at 120pt
- \input rotate
-
- \line{\thefont
- \setbox0=\hbox{\lower0.975ex\hbox{pd}}\dp0=1ex \ht0=0pt \rotu0%
- c%
- \setbox0=\hbox{\lower0.95ex\hbox{vw}}\dp0=1ex \ht0=0pt \rotu0%
- c\hfil
- }
-}
-\medskip
-\leftline{\font\thotherfont=pplri at 60pt \thotherfont
- \kern-0.1em USER GUIDE}
-\bigskip
-
-%}}} PostScript logo
-\fi
-%}}} an absurd logo
-%{{{ titlepage
-
-\halign{#\hfil\cr
- \headingfonts Edition 1 for Release
- $\textfont0=\font \pdcmacversion$\cr
-\noalign{\medskip}%
- P. Damian Cugley\cr
-\noalign{\smallskip}%
- Oxford University Computing Laboratory\cr
- Parks Road\cr
- Oxford \sc{OX2~7HN}\cr
- UK\cr
-\noalign{\smallskip}%
- |damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk|\cr
-}
-
-\bigskip
-\abstract
- PDCMAC is a collection of macro files intended to be useful with
- \TeX\ formats with similar conventions to those described in the
- {\it\TeX book}. This document describes how to unpack the files
- and use them in \TeX\ documents.
-\endabstract
-
-\bigskip
-
-\global\setbox\botbox\vbox{\hsize=\bodywd \prevdepth=0pt
-\noindent
- {\it PDCMAC User Guide}. \copyright~1995 P. Damian Cugley. All
- rights reserved. Verbatim copies of this document (including
- this copyright message) may be freely distributed. This edition
- first published March 1995.
-}
-
-\let\section=\subsec
-%}}} title page
-\endfrontmatter
-
-\bye
-%}}}
-%Local Variables:
-%fill-prefix: " "
-%fold-folded-p: t
-%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index a83c61b95e6..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
-% pdchyex.tex 1.4 1995/03/30 -- some British hyphenations
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex",
-%%% version = "1.4",
-%%% date = "1995/03/30",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "A non-exhaustive set of hyphenation exceptions
-%%% designed to make TeX with American hyphenation
-%%% tables produce some British hyphenations.
-%%% This file was generated by running
-%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "",
-%%%}
-
-\message{1.4 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
-
-\lefthyphenmin=2 \righthyphenmin=3 \uchyph=0
-\hyphenation{
- le-gend le-gends re-adjust re-appear exact-ing
- abs-cess abs-cess-es abs-cessed ana-lyse ana-lyses
- ana-lysis ana-lyses appear-ance appear-ances bio-graphy
- celeb-rate celeb-rates celeb-rations cor-respond-ence
- depend-ent des-pise des-pises dis-pised dimin-ish
- dimin-ish-es dimin-ish-ed dis-connect dis-connect-ed
- dis-connects forget-ting gener-ally haemor-rhage
- illus-trate immedi-ate immedi-ately immport-ance
- inexplic-able inter-pret inter-est inter-ested
- inter-est-ing minis-ter origin-ally philo-sophy
- philo-sophic philo-sophic-ally prim-ary prob-ably
- semb-lance
- calm-est debt-ors fea-ther fea-thers post-humous lamb-like
- poingn-ant tough-ish ach-ing archaeo-logy etymo-logy
- philo-logist psycho-logist tauto-logy zoolo-gist
- art-iest cig-ar-ette bio-logy bio-chem-is-try boy-friend
- brit-ain brit-ish com-ic com-ics cug-ley dogs-body
- dor-mouse gai-man graph-ic immedie-ate immedi-ate
- immedi-ately issue mckean mis-hap mis-haps news-letter
- news-paper night-crawler origin-ally origin-ator phys-ique
- phys-iques porn-o-graphy porn-o-graphic rec-om-mend-ation
- Ser-geant ser-geant Sien-kie-wicz spon-tan-e-ous
- spon-tan-e-ously stop-ped strip-ped teen-ager teen-agers
- tem-per-men-tal Thatch-er-ism Thatch-er-ite under-ground
- under-grounds var-i-able venge-ance warp-smith warp-smiths
- whirl-pool
-}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index fc42eb8365a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-% pdcimth.tex 1.4 1995/03/30 - maths letters in text italic
-\message{1.4 1995/03/30}
-
-\begingroup
- \count0="7400 \count1=\count0
- \advance\count0 by`A \advance\count1 by`a
- \count2=`A \count3=`a \count4=26
- \loop\ifnum\count4>0
- \advance\count4 by-1
- \global\mathcode\count2=\count0
- \global\mathcode\count3=\count1
- \advance\count0 by1 \advance\count1 by1
- \advance\count2 by1 \advance\count3 by1
- \repeat
-\endgroup
-\endinput
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex",
-%%% version = "1.4",
-%%% date = "1995/03/30",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "A definition file for TeX, which redefines
-%%% mathcodes to use letters from the
-%%% text italic font instead of math italic.
-%%% This file was generated by running
-%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "",
-%%% }
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index b7ec2dbe81a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,248 +0,0 @@
-% pdcl1maa.dtx -- documentation & source for pdcl1maa.tex -*-tex-*-
-
-%%%@TeX-document-file {
-%%% title = "PDCL1MAA -- Formatting Macros",
-%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.dtx",
-%%% version = "$Revision: 1.3 $",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% date = "$Date: 1995/03/30 16:09:52 $",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for
-%%% the TeX definitions file pdcl1maa.tex.
-%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
-%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute
-%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
-%%% General Public License as published by the Free
-%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
-%%% or (at your option) any later version.",
-%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
-%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
-%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
-%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
-%%% License for more details.",
-%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
-%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write
-%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
-%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
-%%%}
-
-%{{{ pdcl1maa
-%{{{ preamble
-
-\relax
-\input pdccode
-
-\document
-\rcs$Id: pdcl1maa.dtx,v 1.3 1995/03/30 16:09:52 pdc Exp $\endrcs
-\codefile{pdcl1maa.tex}
-%}}} preamble
-%{{{ introduction
-
-\author{P. Damian Cugley}
-\title{PDCL1MAA---Macros for using Latin-1 characters with Malvern~A}
-\section{Introduction}
-
- This document describes |pdcl1maa.tex|, a collection of
- definitions designed to make Malvern~A characters available
- using the ISO~8859--1 input encoding (Latin-1).
-
-
-\subsec{About this document}
-
- The definitions file and the printed documentation are both in
- |pdcl1maa.dtx|, a `documented \TeX\ macros' file\footnote*{The
- \LaTeX~2e distribution uses files with the `|dtx|' suffix for
- similar purposes.} which, when processed by plain \TeX,
- generates a fresh copy of |pdcl1maa.tex| in the current directory
- in addition to the |dvi| file. This ensures that the printed
- documentation and the code it describes are identical. The
- |dtx| file uses the macros in |pdccode.tex|.
-
-%}}} introduction
-%{{{ File identification
-\section{File identification}
-
- Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the
- file.
-
-\code
- \|\% pdcl1maa.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- Latin-1 chars in Malvern-A
- |
- |%%%@TeX-definition-file {
- |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex",
- \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
- \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
- |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
- |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
- |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
- |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
- |%%% codetable = "USASCII",
- |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
- |%%% supported = "Maybe",
- |%%% abstract = "ISO 8859-1 characters using Malvern-A fonts.
- |%%% This file was generated by running
- \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx",
- |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
- \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the
- |%%% package it came in.",
- |%%% dependencies = "",
- |%%% }
- |
- \|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\}
- |
-\endcode
-%}}} file id
-%{{{ ISO 8859-1 support
-\section{ISO 8859--1 input}
-
-\subsec{Symbols}
-
- Those characters whose code is the same as the code of the
- corresponding glyph are left alone (with catcode~12). For
- example, |^^a3| (pounds sterling) is left alone.
-
- Those that have an equivalent |\chardef| (or |\mathchardef|)
- name are defined with |\let|. Those with an equivalent standard
- ligature use that ligature.
-
- I don't use |\declareactivechar| on these because they would not
- work properly in verbatim text with catcode~12. (Extending
- verbatim text to include Latin-1 will take a few definitions
- along the same lines as |\ttlq| etc.)
-\code
- |\catcode`^^a0\active \let^^a0=~
-% A1
-% A2
-% A3
-% A4
- |\catcode`^^a5\active \let^^a5=\yen
-% A6
- |\catcode`^^a7\active \let^^a7=\S
- |\catcode`^^a8\active \let^^a8=\"
- |\catcode`^^a9\active \let^^a9=\copyright
- |\catcode`^^aa\active \let^^aa=\orda
- |\catcode`^^ab\active \def^^ab{<<}
- |\catcode`^^ac\active \let^^ac=\lnot
- |\catcode`^^ad\active \let^^ad=\-
- |\catcode`^^ae\active \let^^ae=\registered
- |\catcode`^^af\active \let^^af=\=
-\smallbreak
- |\catcode`^^b0\active \let^^b0=\degrees
- |\catcode`^^b1\active \let^^b1=\pm
- |\catcode`^^b2\active \def^^b2{^2}
- |\catcode`^^b3\active \def^^b3{^3}
- |\catcode`^^b4\active \let^^b4=\'
- |\catcode`^^b5\active \let^^b5=\mu
- |\catcode`^^b6\active \let^^b6=\P
- |\catcode`^^b7\active \let^^b7=\gbdecimal
- |\catcode`^^b8\active \let^^b8=\c
- |\catcode`^^b9\active \def^^b9{^1}
- |\catcode`^^ba\active \let^^ba=\ordo
- |\catcode`^^bb\active \def^^bb{>>}
- |\catcode`^^bc\active \def^^bc{\frac14}
- |\catcode`^^bd\active \def^^bd{\frac12}
- |\catcode`^^be\active \def^^be{\frac34}
- |\catcode`^^bf\active \def^^bf{?`}
-\smallbreak
- |\catcode`^^d7\active \let^^d7=\times
- |\catcode`^^f7\active \let^^f7=\div
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Composite letters}
-
-
- The characters that represent marks for composite
- letters\footnote*{This phrase is used on the grounds that the
- word {\it accent} tends to provoke lectures on ways in which
- many composite letters do {\it not} represent accents in the
- languages in which they are used.} are |\let| to the
- corresponding composite-letter-making command---one may write
- `{\tt\char"7F u\char"18 c}' to get `\"u\c c'.
-\code
- |\catcode`^^c0\active \def^^c0{\`A}
- |\catcode`^^c1\active \def^^c1{\'A}
- |\catcode`^^c2\active \def^^c2{\^A}
- |\catcode`^^c3\active \def^^c3{\~A}
- |\catcode`^^c4\active \def^^c4{\"A}
- |\catcode`^^c5\active \let^^c5=\AA
- |\catcode`^^c6\active \let^^c6=\AE
- |\catcode`^^c7\active \def^^c7{\c C}
- |\catcode`^^c8\active \def^^c8{\`E}
- |\catcode`^^c9\active \def^^c9{\'E}
- |\catcode`^^ca\active \def^^ca{\^E}
- |\catcode`^^cb\active \def^^cb{\"E}
- |\catcode`^^cc\active \def^^cc{\`I}
- |\catcode`^^cd\active \def^^cd{\'I}
- |\catcode`^^ce\active \def^^ce{\^I}
- |\catcode`^^cf\active \def^^cf{\"I}
-\smallbreak
- |\catcode`^^d0\active \let^^d0=\DH
- |\catcode`^^d1\active \def^^d1{\~N}
- |\catcode`^^d2\active \def^^d2{\`O}
- |\catcode`^^d3\active \def^^d3{\'O}
- |\catcode`^^d4\active \def^^d4{\^O}
- |\catcode`^^d5\active \def^^d5{\~O}
- |\catcode`^^d6\active \def^^d6{\"O}
- |\catcode`^^d8\active \let^^d8=\O
- |\catcode`^^d9\active \def^^d9{\`U}
- |\catcode`^^da\active \def^^da{\'U}
- |\catcode`^^db\active \def^^db{\^U}
- |\catcode`^^dc\active \def^^dc{\"U}
- |\catcode`^^dd\active \def^^dd{\'Y}
- |\catcode`^^de\active \let^^de=\TH
- |\catcode`^^df\active \let^^df=\ss
-\smallbreak
- |\catcode`^^e0\active \def^^e0{\'a}
- |\catcode`^^e1\active \def^^e1{\`a}
- |\catcode`^^e2\active \def^^e2{\^a}
- |\catcode`^^e3\active \def^^e3{\~a}
- |\catcode`^^e4\active \def^^e4{\"a}
- |\catcode`^^e5\active \let^^e5=\aa
- |\catcode`^^e6\active \let^^e6=\ae
- |\catcode`^^e7\active \def^^e7{\c c}
- |\catcode`^^e8\active \def^^e8{\`e}
- |\catcode`^^e9\active \def^^e9{\'e}
- |\catcode`^^ea\active \def^^ea{\^e}
- |\catcode`^^eb\active \def^^eb{\"e}
- |\catcode`^^ec\active \def^^ec{\`i}
- |\catcode`^^ed\active \def^^ed{\'i}
- |\catcode`^^ee\active \def^^ee{\^i}
- |\catcode`^^ef\active \def^^ef{\"i}
-\smallbreak
- |\catcode`^^f0\active \let^^f0=\dh
- |\catcode`^^f1\active \def^^f1{\~n}
- |\catcode`^^f2\active \def^^f2{\`o}
- |\catcode`^^f3\active \def^^f3{\'o}
- |\catcode`^^f4\active \def^^f4{\^o}
- |\catcode`^^f5\active \def^^f5{\~o}
- |\catcode`^^f6\active \def^^f6{\"o}
- |\catcode`^^f8\active \let^^f8=\o
- |\catcode`^^f9\active \def^^f9{\`u}
- |\catcode`^^fa\active \def^^fa{\'u}
- |\catcode`^^fb\active \def^^fb{\^u}
- |\catcode`^^fc\active \def^^fc{\"u}
- |\catcode`^^fd\active \def^^fd{\'y}
- |\catcode`^^fe\active \let^^fe=\th
- |\catcode`^^ff\active \def^^ff{\"y}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} ISO 8859-1 support
-\endcodefile
-\enddocument
-\bye
-%}}} pdcl1maa.dtx
-
-%Local variables:
-%fill-prefix: "\t"
-%fold-folded-p: t
-%End:
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 17f690c48d5..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,117 +0,0 @@
-% pdcl1maa.tex 1.3 1995/03/30 -- Latin-1 chars in Malvern-A
-
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex",
-%%% version = "1.3",
-%%% date = "1995/03/30",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "ISO 8859-1 characters using Malvern-A fonts.
-%%% This file was generated by running
-%%% plain TeX on pdcl1maa.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcl1maa.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "",
-%%% }
-
-\message{1.3 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
-
-\catcode`^^a0\active \let^^a0=~
-\catcode`^^a5\active \let^^a5=\yen
-\catcode`^^a7\active \let^^a7=\S
-\catcode`^^a8\active \let^^a8=\"
-\catcode`^^a9\active \let^^a9=\copyright
-\catcode`^^aa\active \let^^aa=\orda
-\catcode`^^ab\active \def^^ab{<<}
-\catcode`^^ac\active \let^^ac=\lnot
-\catcode`^^ad\active \let^^ad=\-
-\catcode`^^ae\active \let^^ae=\registered
-\catcode`^^af\active \let^^af=\=
-\catcode`^^b0\active \let^^b0=\degrees
-\catcode`^^b1\active \let^^b1=\pm
-\catcode`^^b2\active \def^^b2{^2}
-\catcode`^^b3\active \def^^b3{^3}
-\catcode`^^b4\active \let^^b4=\'
-\catcode`^^b5\active \let^^b5=\mu
-\catcode`^^b6\active \let^^b6=\P
-\catcode`^^b7\active \let^^b7=\gbdecimal
-\catcode`^^b8\active \let^^b8=\c
-\catcode`^^b9\active \def^^b9{^1}
-\catcode`^^ba\active \let^^ba=\ordo
-\catcode`^^bb\active \def^^bb{>>}
-\catcode`^^bc\active \def^^bc{\frac14}
-\catcode`^^bd\active \def^^bd{\frac12}
-\catcode`^^be\active \def^^be{\frac34}
-\catcode`^^bf\active \def^^bf{?`}
-\catcode`^^d7\active \let^^d7=\times
-\catcode`^^f7\active \let^^f7=\div
-\catcode`^^c0\active \def^^c0{\`A}
-\catcode`^^c1\active \def^^c1{\'A}
-\catcode`^^c2\active \def^^c2{\^A}
-\catcode`^^c3\active \def^^c3{\~A}
-\catcode`^^c4\active \def^^c4{\"A}
-\catcode`^^c5\active \let^^c5=\AA
-\catcode`^^c6\active \let^^c6=\AE
-\catcode`^^c7\active \def^^c7{\c C}
-\catcode`^^c8\active \def^^c8{\`E}
-\catcode`^^c9\active \def^^c9{\'E}
-\catcode`^^ca\active \def^^ca{\^E}
-\catcode`^^cb\active \def^^cb{\"E}
-\catcode`^^cc\active \def^^cc{\`I}
-\catcode`^^cd\active \def^^cd{\'I}
-\catcode`^^ce\active \def^^ce{\^I}
-\catcode`^^cf\active \def^^cf{\"I}
-\catcode`^^d0\active \let^^d0=\DH
-\catcode`^^d1\active \def^^d1{\~N}
-\catcode`^^d2\active \def^^d2{\`O}
-\catcode`^^d3\active \def^^d3{\'O}
-\catcode`^^d4\active \def^^d4{\^O}
-\catcode`^^d5\active \def^^d5{\~O}
-\catcode`^^d6\active \def^^d6{\"O}
-\catcode`^^d8\active \let^^d8=\O
-\catcode`^^d9\active \def^^d9{\`U}
-\catcode`^^da\active \def^^da{\'U}
-\catcode`^^db\active \def^^db{\^U}
-\catcode`^^dc\active \def^^dc{\"U}
-\catcode`^^dd\active \def^^dd{\'Y}
-\catcode`^^de\active \let^^de=\TH
-\catcode`^^df\active \let^^df=\ss
-\catcode`^^e0\active \def^^e0{\'a}
-\catcode`^^e1\active \def^^e1{\`a}
-\catcode`^^e2\active \def^^e2{\^a}
-\catcode`^^e3\active \def^^e3{\~a}
-\catcode`^^e4\active \def^^e4{\"a}
-\catcode`^^e5\active \let^^e5=\aa
-\catcode`^^e6\active \let^^e6=\ae
-\catcode`^^e7\active \def^^e7{\c c}
-\catcode`^^e8\active \def^^e8{\`e}
-\catcode`^^e9\active \def^^e9{\'e}
-\catcode`^^ea\active \def^^ea{\^e}
-\catcode`^^eb\active \def^^eb{\"e}
-\catcode`^^ec\active \def^^ec{\`i}
-\catcode`^^ed\active \def^^ed{\'i}
-\catcode`^^ee\active \def^^ee{\^i}
-\catcode`^^ef\active \def^^ef{\"i}
-\catcode`^^f0\active \let^^f0=\dh
-\catcode`^^f1\active \def^^f1{\~n}
-\catcode`^^f2\active \def^^f2{\`o}
-\catcode`^^f3\active \def^^f3{\'o}
-\catcode`^^f4\active \def^^f4{\^o}
-\catcode`^^f5\active \def^^f5{\~o}
-\catcode`^^f6\active \def^^f6{\"o}
-\catcode`^^f8\active \let^^f8=\o
-\catcode`^^f9\active \def^^f9{\`u}
-\catcode`^^fa\active \def^^fa{\'u}
-\catcode`^^fb\active \def^^fb{\^u}
-\catcode`^^fc\active \def^^fc{\"u}
-\catcode`^^fd\active \def^^fd{\'y}
-\catcode`^^fe\active \let^^fe=\th
-\catcode`^^ff\active \def^^ff{\"y}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdclft.def b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdclft.def
deleted file mode 100644
index 7ccd9172b55..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdclft.def
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
-% pdclft.def 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "pdclft.def",
-%%% version = "1.2",
-%%% date = "1995/03/30",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "Sectioning macros for style files.
-%%% This macro file was generated by running plain
-%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = ""
-%%%}
-
-\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
-
-\topmg=297mm \advance\topmg-11in \advance\topmg7mm
-\botmg=\topmg
-\advance\topmg\ht\strutbox \advance\topmg\headlineskip
-\ifdim \topmg<20mm \topmg=20mm \fi
-\ifdim \botmg<27mm \botmg=27mm \fi
-\setpaper{210mm}{297mm}
-\setnkgrid{4}{3}
-\colrule=0pt
-\leftmargin=\gridwd \advance\leftmargin\colsep
-\everypage={\ifdim\leftmargin>0pt
- \setbox\leftbox=\hbox to \gridwd{}\fi}
-\everyfootnote={\notefonts}
-\everylinenum={\smallfonts}
-\everylinenum={\smallfonts}
-\everytag={\bf}
-\newcount\secno \newcount\subsecno
-\def\thesecno{%
- \n{%
- \number\secno
- \ifnum\subsecno>0
- .\number\subsecno
- \fi
- }%
-}
-\def\section{
- \global\advance\secno1 \global\subsecno0
- \doheading\medskipamount{\subheadingfonts\thesecno\enspace}{}
-}
-\def\subsec{
- \global\advance\subsecno1
- \doheading\smallskipamount{\bodyfonts\thesecno\enspace}{}
-}
-\newtoks\majorheadline
-\expandafter\majorheadline
- \expandafter{\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\jobname}}
-\newif\ifnoheadline \newif\iftwosided
-\headline{%
- \ifnoheadline
- \hfil
- \else\iftwosided
- \ifodd\pageno
- \hfil \the\majorheadline \quad{\bf\folio}%
- \else
- {\bf\folio}\quad \the\majorheadline\hfil
- \fi
- \else
- \hfil \the\majorheadline \quad{\bf\folio}%
- \fi\fi
-}
-\footline{%
- \ifnoheadline
- \global\noheadlinefalse
- \hfil{\bf\folio}\hfil
- \else
- \hfil
- \fi
-}
-\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}}
-\def\mm{\,{\rm mm}}
-\def\MF{{\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi META}\-%
- {\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi FONT}}
-\def\MSDOS{\leavevmode\hbox{MS-DOS}}
-\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}X\spacefactor1000 }
-\begingroup\catcode`\|=12 \toks0={\endgroup
- \def\dfn#1{\ifx\index\UNDEFINED\else\index{#1|INDdfn}\fi{\bi #1}}
-} \the\toks0
-\declareactivechar\* \def*#1*{{\it#1\/}}
-\def\|{%
- \relax\ifmmode
- \Vert
- \else
- \begingroup
- \ttb \setupverbatim
- \catcode`\|=13 \let|\endgroup
- \fi
-}
-\def\inputifexists#1{%
- \openin15=#1
- \ifeof15 \else \input #1 \fi
- \closein15
-}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmacvn.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmacvn.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index e8a114b16d7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmacvn.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-\def\pdcmacversion{1.0.01}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index a01860a53e3..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-% pdcmigr.tex 1.4 1995/03/30-- see end of file for more info
-\message{1.4 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
-\mathchardef\Gamma = "7100
-\mathchardef\Delta = "7101
-\mathchardef\Theta = "7102
-\mathchardef\Lambda = "7103
-\mathchardef\Xi = "7104
-\mathchardef\Pi = "7105
-\mathchardef\Sigma = "7106
-\mathchardef\Upsilon = "7107
-\mathchardef\Phi = "7108
-\mathchardef\Psi = "7109
-\mathchardef\Omega = "710A
-\endinput
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex",
-%%% version = "1.4",
-%%% date = "1995/03/30",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "A definition file for TeX, which redefines
-%%% \Gamma, ..., \Omega to use letters from the
-%%% maths italic font instead of the roman font.
-%%% This file was generated by running
-%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "",
-%%% }
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmisc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmisc.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e73e2c8eda..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmisc.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,555 +0,0 @@
-% pdcmisc.dtx -- documentation and source code for misc macro files -*-tex-*-
-
-%%%@TeX-document-file {
-%%% title = "Miscellanous macro files",
-%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcmisc.dtx",
-%%% version = "$Revision: 1.4 $",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% date = "$Date: 1995/03/30 16:13:08 $",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for
-%%% the TeX definitions files pdcmigr.tex, pdcimth.tex,
-%%% pdchyex.tex, pdcmasyb.tex.
-%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
-%%% definitions files and the printed documentation.",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute
-%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
-%%% General Public License as published by the Free
-%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
-%%% or (at your option) any later version.",
-%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
-%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
-%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
-%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
-%%% License for more details.",
-%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
-%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write
-%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
-%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
-%%%}
-
-%{{{ pdcmisc.dtx
-%{{{ preamble
-
-\relax
-\input pdccode
-
-\document
-\rcs$Id: pdcmisc.dtx,v 1.4 1995/03/30 16:13:08 pdc Exp $\endrcs
-
-\def\newfile{\lineno=0 }
-%}}} preamble
-%{{{ intro
-\author{P. Damian Cugley}
-\title{Miscellaneous macro files}
-
-%}}} intro
-%{{{ pdcmigr
-
-\newfile
-\section{PDCMIGR: Use math italic Greek capitals}
-
- Knuth notes that it is conventional to use unslanted Greek
- capitals in maths, even though other letters are slanted
- (I~personally think that it looks nicer to use slanted Greek
- caps). Thus \TeX\ takes the Greek capitals from fam~0 by
- default.
-
- If you are using a body text font that does not have the Greek
- capitals---for example, almost any PostScript or Cork-style
- font---then this no longer works. Better then to switch to
- using the Greek capitals from the math italic font (fam~1).
- That's what the file |pdcmigr.tex| does. The characters are
- still in maths class~7, meaning that they will respect changes
- to |\fam| made by font-switching commands.
-
-\codefile{pdcmigr.tex}
-
-\code
- \|\% pdcmigr.tex \fileversion~\filedate -- see end of file %
- for more info
- \|\\message\{\fileversion~<\fileauthor~\filedate>\}
-\smallbreak
- |\mathchardef\Gamma = "7100
- |\mathchardef\Delta = "7101
- |\mathchardef\Theta = "7102
- |\mathchardef\Lambda = "7103
- |\mathchardef\Xi = "7104
- |\mathchardef\Pi = "7105
- |\mathchardef\Sigma = "7106
- |\mathchardef\Upsilon = "7107
- |\mathchardef\Phi = "7108
- |\mathchardef\Psi = "7109
- |\mathchardef\Omega = "710A
-\endcode
-
- This file has more comments than code. Since the code is so
- short I think I'll get away with putting the comments after an
- |\endinput|.
-\code
- |\endinput
-\smallskip
- |%%%@TeX-definition-file {
- |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex",
- \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
- \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
- |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
- |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
- |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
- |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
- |%%% codetable = "USASCII",
- |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
- |%%% supported = "Maybe",
- |%%% abstract = "A definition file for TeX, which redefines
- |%%% \Gamma, ..., \Omega to use letters from the
- |%%% maths italic font instead of the roman font.
- |%%% This file was generated by running
- |%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
- |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
- |%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
- |%%% package it came in.",
- |%%% dependencies = "",
- |%%% }
-\endcode
-
-\endcodefile
-%}}} pdcmigr
-%{{{ pdcimth
-
-\newfile
-\section{PDCIMTH: use text italic letters in maths mode}
-
- Very few existing font families have a separate math-italic font. When
- using these fonts as body fonts, with the Computer Modern fonts as
- maths fonts, it looks wrong to have the maths letters in a completely
- different style form the text italic. Therefore it makes sense to
- redefine maths mode so that the letters come from the text italic font.
-
- This is also useful when multiple-letter identifiers are used in maths
- mode. We c an say |$difference:=height+depth$| and get `$\it
- difference:=height+depth$' instead of `$difference:=height+depth$'.
-
- In the following, the counters |\count0| to |\count4| are used as
- follows:
-$$\centerline{\vbox{\halign{\tt\cs{#}\hfil&&\quad#\hfil\cr
- count0&mathcode for current upper case char\cr
- count1&mathcode for current lower case char\cr
- count2&ASCII code of current upper case char\cr
- count3&ASCII code of current lower case char\cr
- count4&number of characters left to redefine\cr
-}}}$$
- The grouping prevents this temporary use conflicting with \TeX's
- use of these counters.
-
-\codefile{pdcimth.tex}
-\code
- \|\% pdcimth.tex \fileversion~\filedate~- maths letters in text italic
- \|\\message\{\fileversion~\filedate\}
- |
- |\begingroup
-\smallbreak
- | \count0="7400 \count1=\count0
- | \advance\count0 by`A \advance\count1 by`a
- | \count2=`A \count3=`a \count4=26
-\smallbreak
- | \loop\ifnum\count4>0
- | \advance\count4 by-1
- | \global\mathcode\count2=\count0
- | \global\mathcode\count3=\count1
- | \advance\count0 by1 \advance\count1 by1
- | \advance\count2 by1 \advance\count3 by1
- | \repeat
-\smallbreak
- |\endgroup
-\endcode
-\noindent
- The value $\hbox{\H{}\tt 7400} + c$ used above means mathcode~7,
- fam~4 (|\itfam|), character~$c$.
-
- Once again, the code is short enough that I think I can get away
- with putting the comments at the end:
-\code
- |\endinput
-\smallskip
- |%%%@TeX-definition-file {
- |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex",
- \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
- \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
- |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
- |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
- |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
- |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
- |%%% codetable = "USASCII",
- |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
- |%%% supported = "Maybe",
- |%%% abstract = "A definition file for TeX, which redefines
- |%%% mathcodes to use letters from the
- |%%% text italic font instead of math italic.
- |%%% This file was generated by running
- |%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
- |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
- |%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
- |%%% package it came in.",
- |%%% dependencies = "",
- |%%% }
-\endcode
-\endcodefile
-%}}} pdcimth
-%{{{ pdchyex
-
-\newfile
-\section{PDCHYEX: Hyphenation exceptions}
-
- These hyphenation exceptions are ones I~use for must documents.
-
-\notepar
- Of all the macro files in this package, this is the one you
- should be most chary of using. These are written for a \TeX\
- system which uses American English hyphenation patterns, but are
- intended to help it produce hyphenations suitable for British
- English, and this peverse approach will probably lead to all
- sorts of anomalies. Ideally separate hyphenation patterns will
- be used for British English documents.
-\endnotepar
-
-\codefile{pdchyex.tex}
-
-\subsec{File identification}
-
- The list of exceptions is expected to grow, so it seems best to
- have the identification at the top of the file.
-
-\code
- \|\% pdchyex.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- some British hyphenations
-\smallskip
- |%%%@TeX-definition-file {
- |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex",
- \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
- \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
- |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
- |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
- |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
- |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
- |%%% codetable = "USASCII",
- |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
- |%%% supported = "Maybe",
- |%%% abstract = "A non-exhaustive set of hyphenation exceptions
- |%%% designed to make TeX with American hyphenation
- |%%% tables produce some British hyphenations.
- |%%% This file was generated by running
- |%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
- |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
- |%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
- |%%% package it came in.",
- |%%% dependencies = "",
- |%%%}
- |
- \|\\message\{\fileversion~<\fileauthor~\filedate>\}
- |
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Setting parameters}
-
- These settings are from {\it Hart's Rules} p.\thinspace141.
-\code
- |\lefthyphenmin=2 \righthyphenmin=3 \uchyph=0
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{And finally, the hyphenation exceptions}
-
-\code
- |\hyphenation{
-\endcode
- First, some words from {\it Hart's Rules}\/ pp.\thinspace14--15.
- I've taken the list on p.\thinspace14 and included here those
- which were given wrong hyphenation by \TeX's default tables.
-\code
- | le-gend le-gends re-adjust re-appear exact-ing
-\smallbreak
-
- | abs-cess abs-cess-es abs-cessed ana-lyse ana-lyses
- | ana-lysis ana-lyses appear-ance appear-ances bio-graphy
- | celeb-rate celeb-rates celeb-rations cor-respond-ence
- | depend-ent des-pise des-pises dis-pised dimin-ish
- | dimin-ish-es dimin-ish-ed dis-connect dis-connect-ed
- | dis-connects forget-ting gener-ally haemor-rhage
- | illus-trate immedi-ate immedi-ately immport-ance
- | inexplic-able inter-pret inter-est inter-ested
- | inter-est-ing minis-ter origin-ally philo-sophy
- | philo-sophic philo-sophic-ally prim-ary prob-ably
- | semb-lance
-\smallbreak
- | calm-est debt-ors fea-ther fea-thers post-humous lamb-like
- | poingn-ant tough-ish ach-ing archaeo-logy etymo-logy
- | philo-logist psycho-logist tauto-logy zoolo-gist
-\endcode
- Now some random hyphenations I~encountered in my own documents
- at some point. I~haven't checked these in a spelling
- dictionary, so don't use them in documents where your life
- depends on correct hyphenation.
-\code
-
- | art-iest cig-ar-ette bio-logy bio-chem-is-try boy-friend
- | brit-ain brit-ish com-ic com-ics cug-ley dogs-body
- | dor-mouse gai-man graph-ic immedie-ate immedi-ate
- | immedi-ately issue mckean mis-hap mis-haps news-letter
- | news-paper night-crawler origin-ally origin-ator phys-ique
- | phys-iques porn-o-graphy porn-o-graphic rec-om-mend-ation
- | Ser-geant ser-geant Sien-kie-wicz spon-tan-e-ous
- | spon-tan-e-ously stop-ped strip-ped teen-ager teen-agers
- | tem-per-men-tal Thatch-er-ism Thatch-er-ite under-ground
- | under-grounds var-i-able venge-ance warp-smith warp-smiths
- | whirl-pool
-
- |}
-\endcode
-\endcodefile
-
-%}}} pdchyex
-%{{{ pdccmsub
-
-\newfile
-\codefile{pdccmsub.tex}
-\section{PDCCNSUB: Substitutions using Computer Modern glyphs}
-
- The Malvern and PostScript repertoire includes some characters
- not included in the \TeX\ Text fonts used by plain \TeX. I~have
- made macros for some of these that assemble symbols from
- existing characters. This way documents can be switched between
- the different font encoding schemes mroe easily. They won't
- look very pretty though.
-
-\notepar
- These work acceptably with ten-point Computer Modern but might
- need adjustment with other fonts.
-\endnotepar
-
-%{{{ indentification
-\subsec{File dientification}
-
-\code
- \|\% \filename~\fileversion~\filedate~-- CM subs for PS glyphs
-\smallskip
- |%%%@TeX-definition-file {
- |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex",
- \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
- \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
- |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
- |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
- |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
- |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
- |%%% codetable = "USASCII",
- |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
- |%%% supported = "Maybe",
- |%%% abstract = "Macros for simulating some PostScript characters
- |%%% using glyphs form the Computer Modern family.
- |%%% This file was generated by running
- |%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
- |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
- |%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
- |%%% package it came in.",
- |%%% dependencies = "",
- |%%% }
- |
- \|\\message\{\fileversion~\filedate\}
- |
-\endcode
-
-%}}} indentification
-
-
-\code
- |\dimendef\dimena=0
-\endcode
-\dimendef\dimena=0
-
-%{{{ currency
-
-\subsec{Currency signs}
-
-\def\yen{{%
- \ooalign{%
- \hfil\raise0.25ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle=$}\hfil\crcr
- \hfil Y\hfil
- }%
-}}
-\def\currency{{%
- \ooalign{%
- \dimena-0.10em
- \hskip\dimena \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox202}\hskip\dimena\crcr
- \hfil \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox20E}\hfil
- }%
-}}
-
- The Yen sign looks like `50\thinspace000\yen', the cents sign
- like `37\rlap/c'. The pounds-sterling sign is always italic.
-\code
- |\def\pounds{{\it\char36 }}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\yen{{%
- | \ooalign{%
- | \hfil\raise0.25ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle=$}\hfil\crcr
- | \hfil Y\hfil
- | }%
- |}}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\cents{\leavevmode\hbox{\rm\rlap/c}}
-\endcode
-
- The ISO~646 currency sign---originally created to replace the
- dollar sign in the international reference version character
- set---is supposed to be drawn as a circle with four `ears';
- we'll have to fake it rather crudely: `\currency', as in
- `\currency100' or possibly `100\currency'.
-\code
- |\def\currency{{%
- | \ooalign{%
- | \hskip-0.1em
- | \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox202}\hskip-0.1em\crcr
- | \hfil \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox20E}\hfil
- | }%
- |}}
-\endcode
-
- The florin sign `{\it f}' seems to have started life as a way of
- getting an italic {\it f} on dot-matrix printers. In an italic
- context it still has to be in itaics---switching to a roman
- letter does not seem appropriate.
-\code
- |\def\florin{{\it f\/}}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} currency
-%{{{ circled letters
-
-
-\subsec{Things in circles}
-
-\def\circledletter#1#2{{%
- \ooalign{%
- \hfil\kern#1\hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm #2$}\hfil\crcr
- \mathhexbox20D%
- }%
-}}
-\def\registered{\circledletter{0.02em}R}
-\def\copyright{\circledletter{-0.045em}C}
- Here's a general macro for making letters in circles---like
- the registered trade mark sign `\registered', or the signs
- `\circledletter{0.04em}P' and `\circledletter{0.02em}S'
- (I~don't use them so I~haven't given them names) or even `\circledletter{0.05em}1'. A matching
- copyright sing (using a small capital {\it c} instead of a
- lower case {\it c}) looks like `\copyright'. Parameter |#1|
- to the macro is the amount to shift the small letter relative
- to the circle to get it optically centred.
-\code
- |\def\circledletter#1#2{{%
- | \ooalign{%
- | \hfil\kern#1\raise0.00ex \hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm #2$}\hfil\crcr
- | \mathhexbox20D%
- | }%
- |}}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\registered{\circledletter{0.02em}R}
- |\def\copyright{\circledletter{-0.045em}C}
-\endcode
-%}}} circled letters
-%{{{ guillemets
-
-\subsec{Guillemets}
-
-\def\lguillemet{\leavevmode \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\langle\!\langle$}}
-\def\rguillemet{\leavevmode \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rangle\!\rangle$}}
-
- Ersatz guillemets look like \lguillemet this\rguillemet.
-\code
- |\def\lguillemet{%
- | \leavevmode
- | \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\langle\!\langle$}%
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\rguillemet{%
- | \leavevmode
- | \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rangle\!\rangle$}%
- |}
-\endcode
-%}}} guillemets
-%{{{ misc
-\subsec{Miscellaneous}
-
-\def\permille{{%
- \setbox0 \hbox{/}%
- \flushtop{$\scriptstyle0\!$}/%
- \lower\dp0 \hbox{$\!\scriptstyle00$}%
-}}
-\def\orda{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b a}}
-\def\ordo{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b o}}
-
- The per-mille sign `\permille' can't be made from `\%' sign because
- matching the rings is impossible, so we use `0/00':
-\code
- |\def\permille{{%
- | \setbox0 \hbox{/}%
- | \flushtop{$\scriptstyle0\!$}/%
- | \lower\dp0 \hbox{$\!\scriptstyle00$}%
- |}}
-\endcode
-
- The British decimal point is a raised dot: `3\mathhexbox201141'
- instead of `3.141'.
-\code
- |\def\gbdecimal{\mathhexbox201}
-\endcode
- Unfortunately, this symbol has become a casualty of the `DTP
- revolution', and the American use of a full stop as a decimal
- point has become common.
-
- The glyphs `\orda' and `\ordo' are used in to abbreviate Spanish
- ordinal numbers: the feminine {\it primera} becomes 1\orda, and
- the masculine {\it primero} 1\ordo.
-\code
- |\def\orda{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b a}}
- |\def\ordo{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b o}}
-\endcode
-
-
-%}}} misc
-%{{{ sc and csc
-
-\subsec{Substitutions for Malvern's alphabet-switching commands}
-
- The macros used to select small capitals etc.\ in Malvern fonts
- cannot work with Computer Modern, but might appear in documents
- anyway. Instead they are all made equivalent to |\relax|.
-
-\code
- |\let\sc=\relax
- |\let\csc=\relax
- |\let\mc=\relax
-\endcode
-
-%}}} sc and csc
-
-\endcodefile
-
-%}}} pdcmasub
-\enddocument
-\bye
-%}}} pdcmisc.dtx
-%Local Variables:
-%fill-prefix: " "
-%fold-folded-p: t
-%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmondo.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmondo.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 5736cf2cbdc..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmondo.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,189 +0,0 @@
-% Combined listing of the PDCMAC macros
-% hacked together pdc 1995-03-28
-
-\relax
-\input pdccode
-\input epsf
-\errorcontextlines10000
-\document
-
-\input pdcmacvn
-
-% Redefine the PDCCODE macros
-
-%\def\codefile#1{}
-%\def\endcodefile{}
-%\begingroup\obeylines \toksa={\endgroup %
-% \def\CODElinei#1^^M{%
-% \indent\the\everycodeline #1\par %
-% \endgroup % matches \CODEline
-% }%
-% \def\CODElinex#1^^M{%
-% {\indent\the\everycodeline #1\par}%
-% }%
-%} \the\toksa
-
-
-% abbreviated TOC macros taken from pdcsty
-
-\newwrite\TOCfile
-\openout\TOCfile=\jobname.toc
-\def\TOCwrite#1#2#3{%
- \begingroup\def\n{\string\n}
- \def\tmp{#3}%
- \edef\tmp{\string#1{#2}{\expandafter\TOCtrim\meaning\tmp}}
- \write\TOCfile\expandafter{\tmp{\folio}}\endgroup
-}
-\def\TOCtrim#1:->{}
-\def\TOCentryfile#1#2#3{
- \medbreak\noindent{\subsecfont #2}\smallskip
-}
-\def\TOCentrysection#1#2#3{
- \indent \llap{\S#1\enspace}
- \ignorespaces #2\quad#3\par
-}
-\def\TOCentrysubsec#1#2#3{}
-
-
-% Abbreviated fontmatter definitions from pdcsty:
-
-\def\frontmatter{
- \write\TOCfile{\string\endinput}
- \closeout\TOCfile
- \vfill\supereject
- \pageno=-1 \secnofalse \headline{\hfil}
- \def\TOCwrite##1##2##3{}
-}
-\def\endfrontmatter{
- \section{Contents}
- \input\jobname.toc
- \vfill\supereject
-}
-\newif\ifsecno \secnotrue
-
-
-% sectioning taken from pdccode -- adapted to include TOC entries.
-
-\def\section#1{%
- \advance\seccount1 \subseccount=0
- \bigbreak
- \begingroup
- \secfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
- \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
- \ifsecno \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.\enspace}\fi #1
- \TOCwrite\TOCentrysection{\number\seccount}{#1}
- \nobreak\medskip
- \endgroup
- \noindenttrue
-}
-\def\subsec#1{%
- \advance\subseccount1
- \medbreak
- \begingroup
- \subsecfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
- \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
- \ifsecno \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.%
- \number\subseccount.\enspace}\fi #1
- \TOCwrite\TOCentrysubsec{\number\seccount.\number\subseccount}{#1}
- \nobreak\smallskip
- \endgroup
- \noindenttrue
-}
-\def\title#1{
- \vglue2\baselineskip
- \begingroup \titlefont \parindent-\leftmargin \hyphenpenalty10000
- #1\smallskip
- \endgroup
- \leftline{Version \fileversion,
- last changed \fileauthor\space \mungedate\filedate}
- \ifx\filelocker\empty\else
- \leftline{Edited by \filelocker\unskip\ \today}
- \fi
- \medskip
- \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule
- \medskip
- \rightline{\theauthor}
- \bigskip
- \headline{\hfil\global\headline{%
- \hskip-\leftmargin \sevenbf \themarks \hfil #1
- \fileversion
- \ifx\filelocker\empty
- \space\mungedate\filedate
- \else
- e\space\today
- \fi
- }}
- \TOCwrite\TOCentryfile{}{#1}
-}
-
-% A command to include another complete document in this one.
-
-\def\includedocument#1{
- \begingroup
- \let\RELAX\relax
- \def\relax{\let\relax\RELAX \iffalse}
- \let\document=\fi
- \let\enddocument\endinput
- \lineno=0
- \input #1
- \vfil\eject \mark{}
- \endgroup
-}
-
-\includedocument{maamac.dtx}
-\includedocument{magrmac.dtx}
-\includedocument{pdcadobe.dtx}
-\includedocument{pdccode.dtx}
-\includedocument{pdcfsel.dtx}
-\includedocument{pdcfmt2.dtx}
-\includedocument{pdcl1maa.dtx}
-\includedocument{pdcmisc.dtx}
-\includedocument{pdcoput5.dtx}
-
-\headline{\hfil}
-\null
-% need a blank page (unfortunate kludge)
-% This is because each embedded document is followed by a page break
-% but we need the a page break before the TOC to finish writing out
-% the TOC file. Argh.
-\frontmatter
-\vfill
-\leftline{\titlefont PDCMAC Mondo Combined Listing}
-\leftline{\titlefont For release 1\kern-0.07em \raise0.5ex\hbox{.}0}
-
-\section{Preface}
-
- PDCMAC is a package of plain \TeX\ macro files. The macro files
- are generated by running plain \TeX\ on |dtx| files, which
- produces both a copy of the macros and printed documentation
- (see the {\it PDCMAC User Guide}\/ for more information). This
- `combined listing' is a compilation of most of the |dtx| files
- in the PDCMAC distribution (|pdcsty.dtx|, which generates the
- sample style files, is not included).
-
- This compilation document works as follows. First it reads
- |pdcmac.tex| and then redefines some macros to write entries for
- a table of contents, and then reads the |dtx| files one after
- another. The results should be same as running \TeX\ on each of
- the |dtx| files separately, except that the pages are numbered
- continuously and there is a contents list.
-
- This is useful for two different purposes: (1)~to make a printed
- copy of the macros for reference while using them, and (2)~to
- generate all the macro files in one \TeX\ command instead of
- several. This is useful when you cannot use the makefile
- supplied with the package. If you do have the makefile, it will
- probably be the more convenient way to keep the macro files
- up-to-date.
-
- The files are included in alphabetical order. See the PDCCODE
- chapter below for information on the PDCCODE system.
-
-\endfrontmatter
-\enddocument
-\bye
-
-%Local Variables:
-%fill-prefix: " "
-%tex-has-children: t
-%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 59930102a17..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,986 +0,0 @@
-% pdcoput5.dtx -- documentation & source for outpout routine -*-tex-*-
-
-%%%@TeX-document-file {
-%%% title = "PDCOPUT5 -- An output routine for zines",
-%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.dtx",
-%%% version = "$Revision: 5.3 $",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% date = "$Date: 1995/04/06 11:51:03 $",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for
-%%% the TeX definitions file pdcoput5.tex.
-%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
-%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute
-%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
-%%% General Public License as published by the Free
-%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
-%%% or (at your option) any later version.",
-%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
-%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
-%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
-%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
-%%% License for more details.",
-%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
-%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write
-%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
-%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
-%%%}
-
-%{{{ pdcoput5.tex
-%{{{ preamble
-
-\relax
-\input pdccode
-\input epsf
-
-\document
-\rcs$Id: pdcoput5.dtx,v 5.3 1995/04/06 11:51:03 pdc Exp $\endrcs
-
-\codefile{pdcoput5.tex}
-
-\countdef\counta=255 \newcount\countb
-\counta=`a \countb="7461
-\loop \ifnum\counta<"7B
- \mathcode\counta\countb
- \advance\counta1 \advance\countb1
-\repeat
-\counta=`A \countb="7441
-\loop \ifnum\counta<"5B
- \mathcode\counta\countb
- \advance\counta1 \advance\countb1
-\repeat
-
-%}}} preamble
-%{{{ introduction
-
-\title{PDCOPUT5---an output routine for zines}
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
- This document describes |pdcoput5.tex|, a \TeX\ definition file
- that defines an output routine for \TeX\ documents. The
- complete text of the macros is reproduced, with brief
- descriptions of how to exploit them.
-
- In fact, running plain \TeX\ on the file |pdcoput5.dtx|
- generates a copy of the macros in a file called |pdcoput5.tex|
- in the current directory, as well as the printed
- documentation.\footnote*{The \LaTeX~2e distribution uses files
- with the suffix |dtx| for similar purposes.} This should help
- ensure that the printed documentation matches the file it
- describes.
-
- The name ends with `-|5|' to distinguish this file from its
- predecessor (version 4.1.7), so that documents based on the old
- macros can still be printed.
-
-%{{{ output routines
-\subsec{Output routines}
-
- In a \TeX\ document, there is a special sequence of \TeX\
- commands called the {\it output routine} which controls the
- assembly of pages for output to the |dvi| file.
- Plain \TeX\ comes with an output routine that handles simple
- documents (with footnotes and topinserts); \LaTeX\ has a more
- complex output routine that has many extra features (margin
- paragraphs, \LaTeX's floats).
-%}}} output routines
-%{{{ backgorund
-
-\subsec{Background to this output routine}
-
- I have been using \TeX\ to typeset fanzines\footnote\dag{The
- word {\it fanzine} comes from science fiction fans' jargon: {\it
- fan} for amateur (in the sense of unpaid, not necessarily
- amateurish) + {\it magazine}. (They call professional magazines
- {\it prozines}.) Thus a fanzine (or zine for short) is a small
- magazine, often produced by photocopying or cheap printing by
- its editor. The word {\it zine} rhymes with {\it scene} not
- {\it sign}, and isn't spelled with an apostrophe (unless you are
- the sort of person who spells {\it phone}, {\it cello} and {\it
- bus} with an apostrophe).} for some years. Unfortunately, for
- magazine layouts, the `floating' insertions provided by plain
- \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ do exactly the wrong thing---in a magazine,
- the designer wants to lay out the components of the page
- (illustrations, text, headings) exactly where he or she wants
- them, whereas the standard \TeX\ formats are designed to let the
- formatter place components according to its own complex rules.
-
- Originally I~tried browbeating \LaTeX\ into doing the zine
- layouts I~wanted. I realized eventually that by the time I~had
- redefined enough of \LaTeX's kernel to get the effects I~wanted
- I~would more or less have written everything from scratch. The
- sort of typesetting I~wanted is so unlike what \LaTeX\ is
- designed for that \LaTeX\ was getting in the way.
-
- Thus I~developed a set of \TeX\ definition files,\footnote\ddag{We
- can ignore the intermediate stage, which involved writing a
- `user-friendly' format in the style of \LaTeX\ and Texinfo, with
- structures very different from plain \TeX's syntax. In the end
- I realized that a format that requires disguising or renaming
- plain \TeX\ constructs makes using and modifying the macros
- harder, not easier, because the user has to understand the new
- conventions in addition to plain \TeX\ syntax.} with an output
- routine that allowed a page to be peppered with inserts with the
- text flowing in between them (with a more restricted class of
- inserts than, say, a DTP program, but still flexible enough to
- be useful). The output routine also does multi-column text---in
- this respect it is very similar to the |multicol| package in
- \LaTeX~2e. The routine presented here has been rewritten from
- scratch a few times, each time shedding some cruft as I~have a
- better understanding of \TeX.
-%}}} backgorund
-%{{{ layout model
-
-\subsec{The layout model}
-
-\topinsert
- \line{\vbox{\advance\hsize-1pc \hsize=0.333\hsize
- \noindent{\bf Figure 1}\quad Page layout. This shows a
- page without the optional extra boxes. In this example,
- text columns each span two grid cells. The left-hand
- column has an illo (space for an illustration) with caption.
- }%
- \epsfxsize=\hsize \advance\epsfxsize-1pc
- \epsfxsize=0.667\epsfxsize \epsffile{oput01.eps}\hfil
-}
-\medskip\hrule\medskip
-\endinsert
-
-\topinsert
- \line{\epsfxsize=\hsize \advance\epsfxsize-1pc
- \epsfxsize=0.667\epsfxsize \epsffile{oput02.eps}\hfil
- \vbox{\advance\hsize-1pc \hsize=0.333\hsize
- \noindent{\bf Figure 2}\quad Page layout parameters.
- This page has with
- all the optional boxes (shown with dashed lines). One text
- column has a space left for artwork. Text columns are the same
- width as grid cells.
- }}
-\medskip\hrule\medskip
-\endinsert
-
- The main part of the page (everything except the headline and
- footline) is called the {\it body}. The body is divided into a
- grid of cells. The cells are conceptually the framework on
- which page components like text columns and illustrations are
- hung. For example, text columns may span two cells. Figure~1
- shows a simple layout. Fitting on the grid usually means the
- width of the object is $N\times gridwd + (N-1)\times colsep$ and
- its left edge is $K\times(gridwd + colsep)$ from the left edge
- of the page body.
-
- The aim of using a grid layout is to combine flexibility with
- enough structure that the result is not a chaotic mess. The
- example grid is 5~cells wide, so that text columns can probably
- be 2 or 3 cells wide without being too narrow or too wide.
- Illustrations may be anything from 1 to 5 cells wide, or may
- bleed off the page.
-
-
-
-
-%}}} layout model
-%}}} introduction
-%{{{ identification
-\section{File identification}
-
- Macro files nowadays tend to start with a whole slew of header
- comments designed to be useful to people comign across the file
- in some archive and unaware of what it is for.
-
-\code
- \|\% \filename~\fileversion~\filedate~-- output routine for zines
- |
- |%%%@TeX-definition-file {
- |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex",
- \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
- \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
- |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
- |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
- |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
- |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
- |%%% codetable = "USASCII",
- |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
- |%%% supported = "Maybe",
- |%%% abstract = "TeX output routine for magazine-style layout.
- |%%% This file was generated by running
- \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx",
- |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
- \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the
- |%%% package it came in.",
- |%%% dependencies = "",
- |%%% }
- |
- \|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\}
- |
-\endcode
-%}}} identification
-%{{{ internals
-\section{Miscellaneous internal definitions}
-\subsec{Scratch registers}
-
- These are one-token names for some handy non-global temporary
- registers (in plain \TeX\ these are given names with |@| in
- them; these definitions give them names I can use).
-\code
- |\countdef\counta=255
- |\dimendef\dimena=0 \dimendef\dimenb=2
- |\toksdef\toksa=0 \toksdef\toksb=2
-\endcode
- I~don't use |\dimen1| and |\toks1| because they are supposed to
- be used only globally (as discussed in {\it\TeX book}
- Appendix~B).
-
-\subsec{Queues}
-
- These macros manipulate queues of instructions for the ouytput
- routine, represented as list macros of a form similar to those
- described in {\it\TeX book} Appendix~D Section~2 (the parameters
- in different order).
-
-\notepar
- All of these work by making assignments and so will not work in
- \TeX's mouth.
-\endnotepar
-
- We can describe these briefly using letters like $x$ to stand
- for elements (enclosed in braces) and $xs$ to stand for a list
- macro of $x$s. Each macr has a duplicate starting with `|g|-'
- which does the same operation globally.
-
-% |\prepend| $xs$ $x$ --- $xs:=\langle x\rangle + xs$
-%\code
-% |\long\def\prepend#1#2{%
-% | \toksa={\\{#2}}\toksb=\expandafter{#1}%
-% | \edef#1{\the\toksa\the\toksb}%
-% |}
-%\smallbreak
-% |\long\def\gprepend#1#2{%
-% | \toksa={\\{#2}}\toksb=\expandafter{#1}%
-% | \xdef#1{\the\toksa\the\toksb}%
-% |}
-%\endcode
- |\qappend| $xs$ $x$ --- $xs:= xs + \langle x\rangle $
-\code
- |\long\def\qappend#1#2{%
- | \toksa={\\{#2}}\toksb=\expandafter{#1}%
- | \xdef#1{\the\toksb\the\toksa}%
- |}
-\endcode
-% |\catenate| $xs$ $ys$ $zs$ --- $xs:=ys + zs$
-%\code
-% |\def\catenate#1#2#3{%
-% | \toksa=\expandafter{#2}\toksb=\expandafter{#3}%
-% | \edef#1{\the\toksa\the\toksb}%
-% |}
-%\smallbreak
-% |\def\gcatenate#1#2#3{%
-% | \toksa=\expandafter{#2}\toksb=\expandafter{#3}%
-% | \xdef#1{\the\toksa\the\toksb}%
-% |}
-%\endcode
- |\qremove| $x$ $xs$ --- $x, xs := hd(xs), tl(xs)$
- (where $xs = \langle hd(xs)\rangle + tl(xs)$)
-\code
- |\def\qremove#1#2{%
- | \expandafter\glopoff#2\glopoff#1#2%
- |}
- |\long\def\glopoff\\#1#2\glopoff#3#4{%
- | \gdef#3{#1}\gdef#4{#2}%
- |}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} internals
-%{{{ parameters
-\section{Parameters}
-
- We collect here definitions for parameters that customizate the
- layout. In documents, many of these are set in using
- higher-level macros.
-
- The abbreviations |mg| (margin), |wd| (width) and |ht| (height)
- are used a lot in dimen names.
-
-\subsec{Heights and depths}
- The physical size of the paper is $paperwd\times paperwd$. The
- area which will be filled with text columns is $bodywd\times
- bodyht$. This area is divided in to a grid of cells each
- $gridwd\times gridht$, with cells separated by $colsep$
- horizontally but butting vertically (there are $n$ cells, so
- $n\times gridwd + (n-1)\times colsep = bodywd$). Finally,
- $colwd$ is the width of text columns ($colwd = k\times gridwd +
- (k-1)\times colsep$) and $colht$ is the height of text columns
- on the current page (it is equal to $bodyht$ iff therte is no
- topbox or botbox).
-\code
- |\newdimen\paperwd \newdimen\paperht
- |\newdimen\bodywd \newdimen\bodyht
- |\newdimen\gridwd \newdimen\gridht
- |\newdimen\colwd \newdimen\colht
-\endcode
-
-
-\subsec{Margins and separators}
- These margins measure from the edge of the paper as defined by
- |\paperwd| and |\paperht|. The inner margin (|\innermg|) is on
- the left on odd pages and on the right for even pages.
-
- The bottom margin will be increased slightly later on to make
- $$vsize=N\times baselineskip + topskip\quad.$$
-
-\code
- |\newdimen\topmg \topmg=20mm
- |\newdimen\outermg \outermg=20mm
- |\newdimen\innermg \innermg=20mm
- |\newdimen\botmg \botmg=27mm
-\endcode
-
- Parameters for the distance between the baselines of the
- headline and the first line of text the corresponding distance
- for footlines.
-\code
- |\newskip\headlineskip \headlineskip=10mm
- |\newskip\footlineskip \footlineskip=10mm
-\endcode
-
-
- The parameters |\caprule| and |\capsep| specify the separation
- between captions and the adjacent text column. The vertical
- displacement is $capsep$, with a horizontal rule of thickness
- $caprule$ is drawn in the middle (set this to $0\pt$ to have no
- rule).
-
-\code
- |\newdimen\caprule \caprule=0.4pt
- |\newskip\capsep \capsep=5mm
-\endcode
-
- The corresponding parameters for column separators---this time
- it is a vertical rule.
-\code
- |\newdimen\colrule \colrule=0.4pt
- |\newdimen\colsep \colsep=5mm
-\endcode
-
- The number of text columns on a page.
-\code
- |\newcount\ncols \ncols=1
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Boxes}
- To switch the number of columns in mid page, the first text is
- run through the output routine and the resultant partial page is
- stored in |\partialpage| to be placed at the top of the next
- output.
-
-\code
- |\newbox\partialpage
-\endcode
-
- The special boxes |\topbox| and |\botbox|, if non-void, are
- placed at the top and bottom of the page, going inside the
- headline and footline but outside the body text area (which is
- reduced correspondingly). These are often useful in
- multi-column text to put titles that span the page.
-\code
- |\newbox\topbox \newbox\botbox
-\endcode
-
- These boxes, if not void, go at the left and right of the body
- text. The amount of space for columns of text is reduced by the
- width of the boxes.
-\code
- |\newbox\leftbox \newbox\rightbox
-\endcode
-
- The output routine is passed the current page contents in
- box~255.
-\code
- |\chardef\pagebox=255
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Hooks}
-
- These two list macros are used to override the output routine
- with customized layouts.
-
- One item is removed from |\pagelist| to generate each page body
- (the page body is everything except the headline, footline,
- topbox, botbox amd partial page). If the list is empty, then
- the default action is `|\makebody\pagebox|'. The commands
- should make a box with width |\bodywd|m and heght |\colht|.
-\code
- |\let\pagelist\empty
-\endcode
- An item is removed from |\collist| each time a column is to be
- created by |\makebody|. Each item should be \TeX\ commands that
- generate a box with width |\colwd| and height |\colht|.
-\code
- |\let\collist\empty
-\endcode
-
- Finally, token registers that may be used to customize pages and
- captions. For example, |\everypage| is used in |pdccmdoc.tex|
- to create an empty |\leftbox| on each page.
-\code
- |\newtoks\everypage
- |\newtoks\everycaption
-\endcode
-%}}} parameters
-%{{{ make a column (vbox)
-\section{How to make one column}
-
- This is the default way to generate a column of text---this will
- normally be invoked $k$ times if there are $k$ columns.
-
- A column is a vbox of height $colht$ and width $colwd$. It
- contains, in order from top to bottom, an illustration (vertical
- mode material, normally white space for artwork to be pasted
- into), caption separator, text (from the page), caption
- separator, and bottom illustration. The illustrations are
- usually omitted. When there is no illustration, the caption
- separators are omitted too.
- The macro takes the following parameters:
-$$\halign{\indent\tt\##\hfil&\quad#\hfil&\quad#\hfil\cr
- 1& vertical mode material& illustration at top of column\cr
- 2& \<8-bit number>& box to make middle out of\cr
- 3& vertical mode material& illustration for bottom of column\cr
-}$$
- To make baselines line up, $capsep=baselineskip$ and the height
- of a top illustration must be $N\times baselineskip + topskip$
- and of a bottom illustration must be $N\times baselineskip$
- (|\prevdepth| is set to $0\pt$ at the start of the bottom
- illustration, so if it starts with a box, baselineskip glue will
- be inserted to make the baseline of the box align correctly.)
-\code
- |\newdimen\toptotal \newdimen\bottotal
-\smallbreak
- |\def\xxxmakecolumn#1#2#3#4#5{\xmakecolumn
- | {\ifdim#1=0pt\else \kern#1 \fi
- | \def\tmp{#2}\ifx\tmp\empty\else #2 \fi}
- | {#3}
- | {\def\tmp{#2}\ifx\tmp\empty\else #2 \fi
- | \ifdim#1=0pt\else \kern#1 \fi}%
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\xmakecolumn#1#2#3{%
- | \vbox to \colht{
-\endcode
- Calculate in |\dimena| how much of the text box will be needed
- once we have allowed for any illustrations, footnotes or
- topinserts:
-\code
- | \dimena\colht
- | \setbox0=\vbox{#1}\advance\dimena-\ht0
- | \ifdim\ht0>0pt
- | \advance\dimena-\capsep
- | \advance\dimena\topskip \advance\dimena-\baselineskip
- | \fi
- | \setbox4=\vbox{\prevdepth=0pt #3}%
- | \advance\dimena-\ht4
- | \ifdim\ht4>0pt \advance\dimena-\capsep \fi
- | \ifvoid\footins\else
- | \advance\dimena-\ht\footins
- | \advance\dimena-\skip\footins
- | \fi
- | \ifvoid\topins\else
- | \advance\dimena-\ht\topins
- | \advance\dimena-\skip\topins
- | \fi
-\endcode
- Split that much text off the top of the box:
-\code
- | \splittopskip\topskip \splitmaxdepth\maxdepth
- | \setbox2=\vsplit#2to\dimena
-\endcode
- Now to sandwich it all together.
-\code
- | \dimena=\ht0 \dimenb=\dp0 \unvbox0
- | \ifdim\dimena>0pt
- | \prevdepth=\dimenb
- | \capseparator
- | \dimena\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip
- | \kern\dimena
- | \nointerlineskip
- | \fi
- | \ifvoid\topins\else \unvbox\topins \vskip\skip\topins \fi
- | \dimena\dp2
- | \ifvoid2 \vfil \else \unvbox2 \fi
- | \ifvoid\footins \else
- | \vskip\skip\footins \footnoterule
- | \dimena=\dp\footins \unvbox\footins
- | \fi
- | \ifdim\ht4>0pt
- | \prevdepth=\dimena
- | \capseparator \kern-\prevdepth \prevdepth0pt
- | \fi
- | \unvbox4
- | }%
- |}
-\endcode
- The caption separator is in an hbox so that
- baselineskip glue will be added appropriately.
-\code
- |\def\capseparator{%
- | \hbox to \colwd{%
- | \dimena=0.5ex \advance\dimena-0.5\caprule
- | \dimenb=\dimena \advance\dimenb\caprule
- | \vrule height \dimenb depth-\dimena width\colwd
- | }%
- |}
-\endcode
-
- Here's a macro for making an illustration (blank space) with
- caption, suitable for top of page. |#1| is the cation, |#2| is
- vertical mode material commands to make the illustration (often
- this will be something like `|\kern|$n$|\baselineskip|' to leave
- $n$ lines of blank space). The whitespace between illustration
- and caption is adjusted to make the whole shebang line up.
-\code
- |\def\topillustration#1#2{%
- | \setbox0=\vbox{#2}%
- | \dimena\ht0 \dimenb\dp0 \unvbox0
- | \counta\dimena \divide\counta\baselineskip
- | \advance\dimena-\counta\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip
- | \kern-\dimena \prevdepth\dimenb
- | \hsize=\colwd \vskip-\parskip \noindent#1\par
- |}
-\endcode
-
- Similar for bottom of column.
-\code
- |\def\botillustration#1#2{%
- | \setbox0\vbox{\hsize=\colwd \vskip-\parskip \prevdepth=0pt #1}
- | \setbox2=\vbox{\prevdepth=\dp0 #2}%
- | \dimena=\ht0 \advance\dimena\dp0 \advance\dimena\ht2
- | \unvbox0
- | \counta\dimena \divide\counta\baselineskip
- | \advance\dimena-\counta\baselineskip
- | \advance\dimena-\baselineskip
- | \kern-\dimena
- | \unvbox2
- |}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} make a column
-%{{{ make body part of page (hbox)
-\section{Making the page body hbox}
-
- The page body is everything except the footline, headline,
- topbox and botbox. It should be a box of height |\bodywd|
- (which is normally fixed) and height |\colht| (which is
- |\bodyht| minus the top and bot boxes).
-
- The default macro for making the body is |\makebody| which takes
- as its parameter the box number (usually |\pagebox|). (This may
- be replaced by adding items to the list macro |\pagelist|.)
-\code
- |\def\makebody#1{%
- | \hbox to \bodywd{%
- | \ifvoid\leftbox\else
- | \box\leftbox
- | \colseparator
- | \fi
- | \makecolumnfromcollist{#1}%
- | \counta\ncols
- | \loop \ifnum\counta>1
- | \colseparator
- | \makecolumnfromcollist{#1}%
- | \advance\counta -1
- | \repeat
- | \ifvoid\rightbox\else
- | \colseparator
- | \box\rightbox
- | \fi
- | }%
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\colseparator{%
- | \hfil \vrule width\colrule depth0pt \hfil
- |}
-\endcode
-
- The macro |\makecolumnfromcollist| is used to generate columns
- (which must be boxes of height |\colht| and width |\colwd|). It
- uses the next item on |\collist| if there is one, otherwise it
- just uses |\xmakecolumn|.
-\code
- |\def\makecolumnfromcollist#1{%
- | \ifx\collist\empty
- | \xmakecolumn{}{#1}{}%
- | \else
- | \qremove\temp\collist
- | \temp
- | \fi
- |}
- |
-\endcode
-%}}} make insides of page (hbox)
-%{{{ make a page (vbox)
-\section{Making a page vbox}
-
- The macro generates a new page---a vbox to be `shipped out'.
- The first page includes a |papersize| special; this is because
- if the macros used to change the paper size also generated the
- |\special| then there might be conflicting |\special|s which
- would confuse the printer driver. This way the paper size may
- be changed a few times before the first page.
-
- The |\colht| register is set to the height of text columns on
- this page (which is $bodyht$ minus the height of any partial
- page, top or bottom boxes).
-\code
- |\def\makepage{%
- | \vbox{
- | \papersizespecial
- | \colht\bodyht \advance\colht-\ht\partialpage
- | \advance\colht-\ht\topbox \advance\colht-\ht\botbox
- | \advance\colht-\dp\partialpage
- | \advance\colht-\dp\topbox
- | \the\everypage
- | \makeheadline \nointerlineskip
- | \box\partialpage \nointerlineskip
- | \box\topbox \nointerlineskip
- | \ifx\pagelist\empty
- | \makebody\pagebox
- | \else
- | \qremove\temp\pagelist
- | \temp
- | \fi
- | \unvbox\botbox
- | \makefootline
- | }%
- |}
-\endcode
-
- The |\makeheadline| macro generates the headline in the form of
- vertical mode material with zero height. It is expanded after
- |\everypage| has been expanded, at the very top of the page's
- vbox.
-\code
- |\def\makeheadline{
- | \vbox to 0pt {
- | \skip0=\topskip \advance\skip0-2\ht\strutbox
- | \advance\skip0-\headlineskip
- | \vskip\skip0
- | \hbox to \bodywd{\the\headline}
- | \vss
- | }
- |}
-\endcode
-
- The footline is, naturally, generated with |\makefootline|.
- This time there is no requirement for it to be zero height. It
- is the last thing in the box being shipped out.
-\code
- |\def\makefootline{{
- | \baselineskip=\footlineskip
- | \hbox to \bodywd{\the\footline}
- |}}
-\endcode
-
- The |papersize| special is specified in the manual for DVIPS.
- It specifies the physical size of the medium---and so must be
- multiplied by the current magnification.
-\code
- |\def\papersizespecial{{%
- | \dimena=0.001\paperwd \multiply\dimena\mag
- | \dimenb=0.001\paperht \multiply\dimenb\mag
- | \special{papersize=\the\dimena,\the\dimenb}%
- | \global\let\papersizespecial=\relax
- |}}
- |
-\endcode
-%}}} make a page (vbox)
-%{{{ output
-\section{The output routine}
-
- The output routine sets |\hoffset| appropiately (subtracting
- $1{\scriptstyle''}$ to allow for \TeX's peculiar origin point
- one inch from the top left of the page.
-\code
- |\def\pdcoutput{%
- | \ifodd\pageno \hoffset=\innermg \else \hoffset=\outermg \fi
- | \advance\hoffset-1 true in
- | \voffset=\topmg
- | \advance\voffset-1truein
- | \shipout\makepage \advancepageno
- | \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else \dosupereject \fi
- | \unvbox\pagebox
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\output={\pdcoutput}
-\endcode
-%}}} output
-%{{{ automated column setting
-\section{Specifying a grid}
-
- These macros for setting the paper size ought to be invoked
- after the base font and baseline skip have been set but before
- the numebr of columns is chosen.
-
-\subsec{Specifiying the paper size}
-
- This is a macro that might be used in documents. It takes two
- parameters, \<dimen>s for the width and height of the paper.
-\code
- |\def\setpaper#1#2{%
- | \paperwd=#1\relax
- | \paperht=#2\relax
- | \OPUTcalcbodywdht
- | \OPUTcalctopskip
- |}
-\endcode
- Calculate the page body width |\bodywd| from the paper size and
- the size of the margins:
-\code
- |\def\OPUTcalcbodywdht{
- | \bodywd=\paperwd \advance\bodywd-\outermg \advance\bodywd-\innermg
- | \bodyht=\paperht \advance\bodyht-\topmg \advance\bodyht-\botmg
- | \OPUTcalctopskip
- |}
-\endcode
-
- To avoid having to write `Aiv' or `afour' for specifying
- international standard A4 paper, I~use an
- |\ifcase|.\footnote*{Note for Americans: A4 corresponds to
- American Letter size, and A3 to Ledger size.} This macro
- handles A0 to A5.
-\code
- |\def\setpaperA#1{
- | \ifcase#1
- | \setpaper{841mm}{1189mm}\or
- | \setpaper{594mm}{841mm}\or
- | \setpaper{420mm}{594mm}\or
- | \setpaper{297mm}{420mm}\or
- | \setpaper{210mm}{297mm}\or
- | \setpaper{148mm}{210mm}
- | \else
- | \errmessage{Dunno how big DIN A#1 paper is, sorry.}
- | \fi
- |}
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Adjusting the body height and top skip}
-
- Plain \TeX\ sets |\topskip| to $10\pt$, which means there is a
- gap between the top of the letters of the top line of text and
- the top of the pages's vbox (i.e., $vsize$ is measured from the
- baseline of the last line to a line $topskip$ above the baseline
- of the first line). For magazine-style setting, it is more
- usual to have $topskip$ set to the cap-height of the font
- (assuming there are no strange tall characters in use).
-
- To have an exactly $N$ lines to a page,
- $$
- bodyht = (N-1)\times baselineskip + topskip \quad.
- $$
- This macro increases the bottom margin in order to set $bodyht$
- to such a value.
-\code
- |\def\OPUTcalctopskip{
- | \setbox0=\hbox{AXbl()!gyJQ,}
- | \topskip=\ht0 \maxdepth=\dp0
- | \advance\bodyht-\topskip \divide\bodyht\baselineskip
- | \multiply\bodyht\baselineskip \advance\bodyht\topskip
- |}
-\endcode
-
- Give this value for $bodyht$, we can set $hsize$ and $vsize$
- according to the number of columns to a page. For $N$ lines to
- a column, we need $N\times ncols$ lines to make a whole page, so
- $$
- \eqalign{vsize
- &= (ncols \times N - 1) \times baselineskip + topskip\cr
- &= (bodyht + \delta) \times ncols - \delta\cr
- }
- $$
- where $\delta=baselineskip-topskip$.
-\code
- |\def\OPUTcalchsizevsize{
- | \hsize=\colwd
- | \vsize=\bodyht
- | \advance\vsize-\topskip \advance\vsize\baselineskip
- | \multiply\vsize\ncols
- | \advance\vsize-\baselineskip \advance\vsize\topskip
- |}
-\endcode
-
-
-\subsec{Setting the number of columns}
-
- Now some macros used in documents for setting the number of
- coumns. In the general case we have a grid of $n$ cells with
- text columnns spanning $k$ cells. This macro takes two number
- parameters, $n$ and $k$. It sets |\ncols| to as many columns
- fit on the page.
- $$
- \eqalign{colwd &= k \times gridwd + (k - 1) \times colsep\cr
- ncols &= \lfloor n \mathbin/ k \rfloor\cr}
- $$
- Often $n$ is not a multiple of $k$, which leaves some grid cells
- `spare' for illustrations or extra margins and so on.
-\code
- |\def\setnkgrid#1#2{%
- | \gridwd=\bodywd
- | \advance\gridwd-#1\colsep \advance\gridwd\colsep \divide\gridwd#1
- | \colwd#2\gridwd \advance\colwd#2\colsep \advance\colwd-\colsep
- | \ncols#1 \divide\ncols#2
- | \gridht=\baselineskip
- | \capsep=\gridht
- | \OPUTcalchsizevsize
- |}
-\endcode
-
- For simpler layouts, we just set the number of columns and set
- the grid and column widths to be the same.
-\code
- |\def\setncolumns#1{%
- | \colwd=\bodywd
- | \advance\colwd-#1\colsep \advance\colwd\colsep \divide\colwd #1
- | \gridwd=\colwd
- | \ncols=#1
- | \OPUTcalchsizevsize
- |}
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Setting default values}
-
- We give all the parameters default values by assuming A4 paper
- and a single-column layout in \TeX's default fonts.
-\code
- |\setpaperA4
- |\setncolumns1
-\endcode
-
-%}}} automated column setting
-%{{{ balancing columns
-\section{Routines for balanced columns}
-
-\subsec{Balanced columns from a rigid vbox}
-
- This is the routine discussed in {\it\TeX book}, Appendix~D,
- Section~7 (pp.\thinspace396--397). It takes a rigid, regular
- vbox (rigid meaning there is no stretchable glue between lines,
- and regular meaning that baselines are all the same distance
- apart). Its parameters are
- $$\centerline{\vbox{\halign{\tt\char`\##\hfil&&\quad#\hfil\cr
- 1&\<8-bit number>& box to chop\cr
- 2&\<number>& how many columns to make (${}>0$)\cr
- 3&\<dimen>& the value of \cs{topskip} for the box\cr
- 4&tokens& what to put between columns\cr
- }}}$$
- the last parameter will usually be |\hfil| or |\colseparator|.
- Usually this command will be used like
-$$\hbox{|\hbox to \bodywd{\rigidbalance...}|}$$
-
-
-\code
- |\newcount\RGDncols
-\smallbreak
- |\def\rigidbalance#1#2#3#4{%
- | \setbox0=\box#1\relax \RGDncols=#2\relax \toksa={#4}%
- | \begingroup\splittopskip#3\relax \vbadness=10000
- | \valign{##\vfil\cr \RGDdosplits}%
- | \endgroup
- |}
-\endcode
- The helper function that produces the insides of the valign is
- recursive.
-\code
- |\def\RGDdosplits{
- | \dimena\ht0 \divide\dimena\RGDncols
- | \advance\dimena\splittopskip
- | \setbox1=\vsplit0 to\dimena
- | \unvbox1
- | \global\advance\RGDncols-1
- | \cr
- | \ifnum\RGDncols>0
- | \noalign{\the\toksa}
- | \RGDdosplits
- | \fi
- |}
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Balance partial page}
-
- Occasionally it is useful to switch between different grids or
- numbers of columns within one page. This macro does this,
- creating a shorter-than-usual page body (including topbox and
- botbox) and then putting the result in |\partialpage| Its
- parameters are |#1| the \TeX\ code used to generate the text
- columns and |#2| what to put between the partial page and the
- rest of the page.
-
-\code
- |\def\makepartialpage#1#2{
- | \maybepagebreak
- | \begingroup
- | \output{%
- | \message{[partial}
- | \setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox\pagebox}%
- | \global\setbox\partialpage\vbox{
- | \box\partialpage \nointerlineskip
- | \the\everypage
- | \box\topbox \nointerlineskip
- | \hbox to \bodywd{%
- | \ifvoid\leftbox\else
- | \box\leftbox \colseparator
- | \fi
- | #1%
- | \ifvoid\rightbox\else
- | \colseparator \box\rightbox
- | \fi
- | }% \nointerlineskip
- | \box\botbox
- | #2
- | \dimena\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip
- | \kern\dimena
- | }%
- | \message{page]}
- | }
- | \eject
- | \endgroup
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\rigidbalancepartialpage{
- | \makepartialpage{\rigidbalance0\ncols\topskip\colseparator}
- |}
-\endcode
- Occasionally \TeX\ might have just over a pageful of text when
- this command is used (since the page break calculations do not
- take into account the space subtracted by
- illustrations\footnote*{This is probably a bug.}). In this case
- we have to force out a complete page.
-\code
- |\def\maybepagebreak{%
- | \vskip0pt plus\baselineskip \penalty-100
- | \loop
- | \dimena\vsize \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\partialpage
- | \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\topbox
- | \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\botbox
- | \ifdim\pagetotal>\dimena
- | \eject\null
- | \repeat
- |}
-\endcode
-%}}} balancing columns
-\endcodefile
-\enddocument
-\bye
-%}}} pdcoput5.tex
-
-%Local variables:
-%fold-folded-p: t
-%fill-prefix: " "
-%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 30828ac9358..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,336 +0,0 @@
-% pdcoput5.dtx 5.3 1995/04/06 -- output routine for zines
-
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex",
-%%% version = "5.3",
-%%% date = "1995/04/06",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% abstract = "TeX output routine for magazine-style layout.
-%%% This file was generated by running
-%%% plain TeX on pdcoput5.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcoput5.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "",
-%%% }
-
-\message{5.3 <pdc 1995/04/06>}
-
-\countdef\counta=255
-\dimendef\dimena=0 \dimendef\dimenb=2
-\toksdef\toksa=0 \toksdef\toksb=2
-\long\def\qappend#1#2{%
- \toksa={\\{#2}}\toksb=\expandafter{#1}%
- \xdef#1{\the\toksb\the\toksa}%
-}
-\def\qremove#1#2{%
- \expandafter\glopoff#2\glopoff#1#2%
-}
-\long\def\glopoff\\#1#2\glopoff#3#4{%
- \gdef#3{#1}\gdef#4{#2}%
-}
-\newdimen\paperwd \newdimen\paperht
-\newdimen\bodywd \newdimen\bodyht
-\newdimen\gridwd \newdimen\gridht
-\newdimen\colwd \newdimen\colht
-\newdimen\topmg \topmg=20mm
-\newdimen\outermg \outermg=20mm
-\newdimen\innermg \innermg=20mm
-\newdimen\botmg \botmg=27mm
-\newskip\headlineskip \headlineskip=10mm
-\newskip\footlineskip \footlineskip=10mm
-\newdimen\caprule \caprule=0.4pt
-\newskip\capsep \capsep=5mm
-\newdimen\colrule \colrule=0.4pt
-\newdimen\colsep \colsep=5mm
-\newcount\ncols \ncols=1
-\newbox\partialpage
-\newbox\topbox \newbox\botbox
-\newbox\leftbox \newbox\rightbox
-\chardef\pagebox=255
-\let\pagelist\empty
-\let\collist\empty
-\newtoks\everypage
-\newtoks\everycaption
-\newdimen\toptotal \newdimen\bottotal
-\def\xxxmakecolumn#1#2#3#4#5{\xmakecolumn
- {\ifdim#1=0pt\else \kern#1 \fi
- \def\tmp{#2}\ifx\tmp\empty\else #2 \fi}
- {#3}
- {\def\tmp{#2}\ifx\tmp\empty\else #2 \fi
- \ifdim#1=0pt\else \kern#1 \fi}%
-}
-\def\xmakecolumn#1#2#3{%
- \vbox to \colht{
- \dimena\colht
- \setbox0=\vbox{#1}\advance\dimena-\ht0
- \ifdim\ht0>0pt
- \advance\dimena-\capsep
- \advance\dimena\topskip \advance\dimena-\baselineskip
- \fi
- \setbox4=\vbox{\prevdepth=0pt #3}%
- \advance\dimena-\ht4
- \ifdim\ht4>0pt \advance\dimena-\capsep \fi
- \ifvoid\footins\else
- \advance\dimena-\ht\footins
- \advance\dimena-\skip\footins
- \fi
- \ifvoid\topins\else
- \advance\dimena-\ht\topins
- \advance\dimena-\skip\topins
- \fi
- \splittopskip\topskip \splitmaxdepth\maxdepth
- \setbox2=\vsplit#2to\dimena
- \dimena=\ht0 \dimenb=\dp0 \unvbox0
- \ifdim\dimena>0pt
- \prevdepth=\dimenb
- \capseparator
- \dimena\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip
- \kern\dimena
- \nointerlineskip
- \fi
- \ifvoid\topins\else \unvbox\topins \vskip\skip\topins \fi
- \dimena\dp2
- \ifvoid2 \vfil \else \unvbox2 \fi
- \ifvoid\footins \else
- \vskip\skip\footins \footnoterule
- \dimena=\dp\footins \unvbox\footins
- \fi
- \ifdim\ht4>0pt
- \prevdepth=\dimena
- \capseparator \kern-\prevdepth \prevdepth0pt
- \fi
- \unvbox4
- }%
-}
-\def\capseparator{%
- \hbox to \colwd{%
- \dimena=0.5ex \advance\dimena-0.5\caprule
- \dimenb=\dimena \advance\dimenb\caprule
- \vrule height \dimenb depth-\dimena width\colwd
- }%
-}
-\def\topillustration#1#2{%
- \setbox0=\vbox{#2}%
- \dimena\ht0 \dimenb\dp0 \unvbox0
- \counta\dimena \divide\counta\baselineskip
- \advance\dimena-\counta\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip
- \kern-\dimena \prevdepth\dimenb
- \hsize=\colwd \vskip-\parskip \noindent#1\par
-}
-\def\botillustration#1#2{%
- \setbox0\vbox{\hsize=\colwd \vskip-\parskip \prevdepth=0pt #1}
- \setbox2=\vbox{\prevdepth=\dp0 #2}%
- \dimena=\ht0 \advance\dimena\dp0 \advance\dimena\ht2
- \unvbox0
- \counta\dimena \divide\counta\baselineskip
- \advance\dimena-\counta\baselineskip
- \advance\dimena-\baselineskip
- \kern-\dimena
- \unvbox2
-}
-\def\makebody#1{%
- \hbox to \bodywd{%
- \ifvoid\leftbox\else
- \box\leftbox
- \colseparator
- \fi
- \makecolumnfromcollist{#1}%
- \counta\ncols
- \loop \ifnum\counta>1
- \colseparator
- \makecolumnfromcollist{#1}%
- \advance\counta -1
- \repeat
- \ifvoid\rightbox\else
- \colseparator
- \box\rightbox
- \fi
- }%
-}
-\def\colseparator{%
- \hfil \vrule width\colrule depth0pt \hfil
-}
-\def\makecolumnfromcollist#1{%
- \ifx\collist\empty
- \xmakecolumn{}{#1}{}%
- \else
- \qremove\temp\collist
- \temp
- \fi
-}
-
-\def\makepage{%
- \vbox{
- \papersizespecial
- \colht\bodyht \advance\colht-\ht\partialpage
- \advance\colht-\ht\topbox \advance\colht-\ht\botbox
- \advance\colht-\dp\partialpage
- \advance\colht-\dp\topbox
- \the\everypage
- \makeheadline \nointerlineskip
- \box\partialpage \nointerlineskip
- \box\topbox \nointerlineskip
- \ifx\pagelist\empty
- \makebody\pagebox
- \else
- \qremove\temp\pagelist
- \temp
- \fi
- \unvbox\botbox
- \makefootline
- }%
-}
-\def\makeheadline{
- \vbox to 0pt {
- \skip0=\topskip \advance\skip0-2\ht\strutbox
- \advance\skip0-\headlineskip
- \vskip\skip0
- \hbox to \bodywd{\the\headline}
- \vss
- }
-}
-\def\makefootline{{
- \baselineskip=\footlineskip
- \hbox to \bodywd{\the\footline}
-}}
-\def\papersizespecial{{%
- \dimena=0.001\paperwd \multiply\dimena\mag
- \dimenb=0.001\paperht \multiply\dimenb\mag
- \special{papersize=\the\dimena,\the\dimenb}%
- \global\let\papersizespecial=\relax
-}}
-
-\def\pdcoutput{%
- \ifodd\pageno \hoffset=\innermg \else \hoffset=\outermg \fi
- \advance\hoffset-1 true in
- \voffset=\topmg
- \advance\voffset-1truein
- \shipout\makepage \advancepageno
- \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else \dosupereject \fi
- \unvbox\pagebox
-}
-\output={\pdcoutput}
-\def\setpaper#1#2{%
- \paperwd=#1\relax
- \paperht=#2\relax
- \OPUTcalcbodywdht
- \OPUTcalctopskip
-}
-\def\OPUTcalcbodywdht{
- \bodywd=\paperwd \advance\bodywd-\outermg \advance\bodywd-\innermg
- \bodyht=\paperht \advance\bodyht-\topmg \advance\bodyht-\botmg
- \OPUTcalctopskip
-}
-\def\setpaperA#1{
- \ifcase#1
- \setpaper{841mm}{1189mm}\or
- \setpaper{594mm}{841mm}\or
- \setpaper{420mm}{594mm}\or
- \setpaper{297mm}{420mm}\or
- \setpaper{210mm}{297mm}\or
- \setpaper{148mm}{210mm}
- \else
- \errmessage{Dunno how big DIN A#1 paper is, sorry.}
- \fi
-}
-\def\OPUTcalctopskip{
- \setbox0=\hbox{AXbl()!gyJQ,}
- \topskip=\ht0 \maxdepth=\dp0
- \advance\bodyht-\topskip \divide\bodyht\baselineskip
- \multiply\bodyht\baselineskip \advance\bodyht\topskip
-}
-\def\OPUTcalchsizevsize{
- \hsize=\colwd
- \vsize=\bodyht
- \advance\vsize-\topskip \advance\vsize\baselineskip
- \multiply\vsize\ncols
- \advance\vsize-\baselineskip \advance\vsize\topskip
-}
-\def\setnkgrid#1#2{%
- \gridwd=\bodywd
- \advance\gridwd-#1\colsep \advance\gridwd\colsep \divide\gridwd#1
- \colwd#2\gridwd \advance\colwd#2\colsep \advance\colwd-\colsep
- \ncols#1 \divide\ncols#2
- \gridht=\baselineskip
- \capsep=\gridht
- \OPUTcalchsizevsize
-}
-\def\setncolumns#1{%
- \colwd=\bodywd
- \advance\colwd-#1\colsep \advance\colwd\colsep \divide\colwd #1
- \gridwd=\colwd
- \ncols=#1
- \OPUTcalchsizevsize
-}
-\setpaperA4
-\setncolumns1
-\newcount\RGDncols
-\def\rigidbalance#1#2#3#4{%
- \setbox0=\box#1\relax \RGDncols=#2\relax \toksa={#4}%
- \begingroup\splittopskip#3\relax \vbadness=10000
- \valign{##\vfil\cr \RGDdosplits}%
- \endgroup
-}
-\def\RGDdosplits{
- \dimena\ht0 \divide\dimena\RGDncols
- \advance\dimena\splittopskip
- \setbox1=\vsplit0 to\dimena
- \unvbox1
- \global\advance\RGDncols-1
- \cr
- \ifnum\RGDncols>0
- \noalign{\the\toksa}
- \RGDdosplits
- \fi
-}
-\def\makepartialpage#1#2{
- \maybepagebreak
- \begingroup
- \output{%
- \message{[partial}
- \setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox\pagebox}%
- \global\setbox\partialpage\vbox{
- \box\partialpage \nointerlineskip
- \the\everypage
- \box\topbox \nointerlineskip
- \hbox to \bodywd{%
- \ifvoid\leftbox\else
- \box\leftbox \colseparator
- \fi
- #1%
- \ifvoid\rightbox\else
- \colseparator \box\rightbox
- \fi
- }% \nointerlineskip
- \box\botbox
- #2
- \dimena\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip
- \kern\dimena
- }%
- \message{page]}
- }
- \eject
- \endgroup
-}
-\def\rigidbalancepartialpage{
- \makepartialpage{\rigidbalance0\ncols\topskip\colseparator}
-}
-\def\maybepagebreak{%
- \vskip0pt plus\baselineskip \penalty-100
- \loop
- \dimena\vsize \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\partialpage
- \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\topbox
- \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\botbox
- \ifdim\pagetotal>\dimena
- \eject\null
- \repeat
-}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpsdoc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpsdoc.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 59d64508a5e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpsdoc.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-% pdcpsdoc.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "pdcpsdoc.tex",
-%%% version = "1.2",
-%%% date = "1995/03/30",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% This macro file was generated by running plain
-%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "pdcadobe.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex,
-%%% pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
-%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdcdoc.def",
-%%%}
-
-\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
-
-\input pdcimth
-\input pdcmigr
-\input pdcfmt2
-\input pdchyex
-\input pdcoput5
-\input pdcfsel
-\input pdcadobe
-\autoloadfonts
-\def\KBcanonical#1{%
- \expcs\ifx{KB#1}\relax #1\else\csname KB#1\endcsname \fi
-}
-\ifx\KBadobe\UNDEFINED \def\KBadobe#1{\KBcanonical{#10}} \fi
-\def\KBit#1{\KBcanonical{#1i}}
-\def\KBbi#1{\KBbf{#1i}}
-\def\KBbf#1{\expandafter\KBbfx#1.}
-\def\KBbfx#1#2#3#4#5.{\KBcanonical{#1#2#3b#5}}
-\def\KBpagbr{pagdr} \def\KBpagbri{pagdro}
-\def\KBpbkbr{pbkdr} \def\KBpbkbri{pbkdri}
-\def\KBpagri{pagro} \def\KBpagbi{pagbo}
-\def\KBphvri{phvro} \def\KBphvbi{phvbo}
-\def\KBpcrri{pcrro} \def\KBpcrbi{pcrbo}
-\def\KBphvrrni{phvron} \def\KBphvbrni{phvbon}
-\def\KBphvrrn0{phvr0n} \def\KBphvbrn0{phvb0n}
-\def\KBphvrrni0{phvro0n} \def\KBphvbrni0{phvbo0n}
-\ifx\headingfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingfontname{phvr} \fi
-\ifx\headingttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingttfontname{pcrb} \fi
-\def\STYheadingT{%
- \@\f{rm}{\headingfontname}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}%
- \@\f{asy}{psyr}%
- \@\f{it}{\KBit\headingfontname}%
- \@\f{tt}{\headingttfontname}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
-}
-\loadfont\bodysy{cmsy10 at 12pt}
-\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading}
-\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading}
-\ifx\bodyfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyfontname{ptmr} \fi
-\ifx\bodyttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyttfontname{pcrr} \fi
-\def\STYbodyT{%
- \@\m{rm}{\bodyfontname}\@\m{it}{\KBit\bodyfontname}%
- \@\m{bf}{\KBbf\bodyfontname}\@\f{bi}{\KBbi\bodyfontname}%
- \@\m{asy}{psyr}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
- \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
- \@\f{tt}{\bodyttfontname}\@\f{tb}{\KBit\bodyttfontname}%
-}
-\let\sc=\relax \let\mc=\relax \let\csc=\relax
-\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny}
-\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt}
-\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000
-\bodyfonts
-{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 }
-\input pdcdoc.def
-\inputifexists{pdcpsdoc.cfg}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpslft.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpslft.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 9912b2544fb..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpslft.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-% pdcpslft.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
-%%%@TeX-definition-file {
-%%% filename = "pdcpslft.tex",
-%%% version = "1.2",
-%%% date = "1995/03/30",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
-%%% supported = "Maybe",
-%%% This macro file was generated by running plain
-%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
-%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
-%%% package it came in.",
-%%% dependencies = "pdcadobe.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex,
-%%% pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
-%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdclft.def",
-%%%}
-
-\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
-
-\input pdcimth
-\input pdcmigr
-\input pdcfmt2
-\input pdchyex
-\input pdcoput5
-\input pdcfsel
-\input pdcadobe
-\autoloadfonts
-\def\KBcanonical#1{%
- \expcs\ifx{KB#1}\relax #1\else\csname KB#1\endcsname \fi
-}
-\ifx\KBadobe\UNDEFINED \def\KBadobe#1{\KBcanonical{#10}} \fi
-\def\KBit#1{\KBcanonical{#1i}}
-\def\KBbi#1{\KBbf{#1i}}
-\def\KBbf#1{\expandafter\KBbfx#1.}
-\def\KBbfx#1#2#3#4#5.{\KBcanonical{#1#2#3b#5}}
-\def\KBpagbr{pagdr} \def\KBpagbri{pagdro}
-\def\KBpbkbr{pbkdr} \def\KBpbkbri{pbkdri}
-\def\KBpagri{pagro} \def\KBpagbi{pagbo}
-\def\KBphvri{phvro} \def\KBphvbi{phvbo}
-\def\KBpcrri{pcrro} \def\KBpcrbi{pcrbo}
-\def\KBphvrrni{phvron} \def\KBphvbrni{phvbon}
-\def\KBphvrrn0{phvr0n} \def\KBphvbrn0{phvb0n}
-\def\KBphvrrni0{phvro0n} \def\KBphvbrni0{phvbo0n}
-\ifx\headingfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingfontname{phvr} \fi
-\ifx\headingttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingttfontname{pcrb} \fi
-\def\STYheadingT{%
- \@\f{rm}{\headingfontname}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}%
- \@\f{asy}{psyr}%
- \@\f{it}{\KBit\headingfontname}%
- \@\f{tt}{\headingttfontname}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
-}
-\loadfont\bodysy{cmsy10 at 12pt}
-\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading}
-\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading}
-\ifx\bodyfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyfontname{ptmr} \fi
-\ifx\bodyttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyttfontname{pcrr} \fi
-\def\STYbodyT{%
- \@\m{rm}{\bodyfontname}\@\m{it}{\KBit\bodyfontname}%
- \@\m{bf}{\KBbf\bodyfontname}\@\f{bi}{\KBbi\bodyfontname}%
- \@\m{asy}{psyr}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
- \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
- \@\f{tt}{\bodyttfontname}\@\f{tb}{\KBit\bodyttfontname}%
-}
-\let\sc=\relax \let\mc=\relax \let\csc=\relax
-\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny}
-\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny}
-\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt}
-\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000
-\bodyfonts
-{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 }
-\input pdclft.def
-\inputifexists{pdcpslft.cfg}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcsty.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcsty.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 58c5ac76808..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcsty.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1153 +0,0 @@
-% pdcsty -- documentation and source code for several style files -*-tex-*-
-
-%%%@TeX-document-file {
-%%% title = "Damian's random style files",
-%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcsty.dtx",
-%%% version = "$Revision: 1.2 $",
-%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
-%%% date = "$Date: 1995/03/30 16:12:17 $",
-%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
-%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
-%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
-%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for
-%%% the TeX style files pdccmdoc.tex, ma55doc.tex,
-%%% etc. and definitioon files pdcdoc1.tex and pdclft1.tex.
-%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
-%%% definitions files and the printed documentation.",
-%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
-%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute
-%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
-%%% General Public License as published by the Free
-%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
-%%% or (at your option) any later version.",
-%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
-%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
-%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
-%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
-%%% License for more details.",
-%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
-%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write
-%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
-%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
-%%% codetable = "USASCII",
-%%% dependencies = "pdccode2.tex"
-%%%}
-
-
-%{{{ pdcsty.dtx
-%{{{ preamble
-
-\input pdccode2
-\rcs$Id: pdcsty.dtx,v 1.2 1995/03/30 16:12:17 pdc Exp $\endrcs
-
-\everycode{\tt \baselineskip=0.8\baselineskip \lineskiplimit=0pt }
-\newcount\lineno
-\everycodeline{\llap{$ \global\advance\lineno1
- \scriptstyle\the\lineno $\enspace}}
-
-
-\codefile{cmX}{pdccmlft.tex} \codefile{cmT}{pdccmdoc.tex}
-\codefile{maX}{ma55lft.tex} \codefile{maT}{ma55doc.tex}
-\codefile{psX}{pdcpslft.tex} \codefile{psT}{pdcpsdoc.tex}
-\codefile{X}{pdclft.def} \codefile{T}{pdcdoc.def}
-
-\def\maonly{\global\maXtrue \global\maTtrue
- \global\cmXfalse \global\cmTfalse
- \global\psXfalse \global\psTfalse
- \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse
- \banner{Malvern}}
-\def\cmonly{\global\maXfalse \global\maTfalse
- \global\cmXtrue \global\cmTtrue
- \global\psXfalse \global\psTfalse
- \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse
- \banner{Computer Modern}}
-\def\psonly{\global\maXfalse \global\maTfalse
- \global\cmXfalse \global\cmTfalse
- \global\psXtrue \global\psTtrue
- \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse
- \banner{PostScript fonts}}
-
-\def\styonly {\global\maXtrue \global\maTtrue
- \global\cmXtrue \global\cmTtrue
- \global\psXtrue \global\psTtrue
- \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse
- \banner{Style files}}
-\def\Tstyonly{\global\maXfalse \global\maTtrue
- \global\cmXfalse \global\cmTtrue
- \global\psXfalse \global\psTtrue
- \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse
- \banner{Doc style files}}
-\def\Xstyonly{\global\maXtrue \global\maTfalse
- \global\cmXtrue \global\cmTfalse
- \global\psXtrue \global\psTfalse
- \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse
- \banner{Lft style files}}
-
-\def\Tonly {\global\maXfalse \global\maTfalse
- \global\cmXfalse \global\cmTfalse
- \global\psXfalse \global\psTfalse
- \global\Xfalse \global\Ttrue
- \banner{Sectioning macros for Docs}}
-\def\Xonly {\global\maXfalse \global\maTfalse
- \global\cmXfalse \global\cmTfalse
- \global\psXfalse \global\psTfalse
- \global\Xtrue \global\Tfalse
- \banner{Sectioning macros for Lfts}}
-
-\def\banner#1{
- \par
- \line{%
- \vrule height 1ex width 0.2ex
- \leaders\vrule height 1ex depth -0.8ex \hskip2em
- \enspace{\it \strut #1\/}\enspace
- \leaders\vrule height 1ex depth -0.8ex \hfil
- }
-}
-
-\def\onlyone#1{
- \allfilesfalse \global\csname#1true\endcsname
- \banner{{\tt\csname filename#1\endcsname}}
-}
-\def\onlytwo#1#2{
- \allfilesfalse \global\csname#1true\endcsname
- \global\csname#2true\endcsname
- \banner{{\tt\csname filename#1\endcsname},
- {\tt\csname filename#2\endcsname}}
-}
-
-\def\common{
- \par
- \allfilesfalse \global\Xtrue \global\Ttrue
- \closebanner
-}
-
-\def\closebanner{
- \line{%
- \vrule height 1.8ex depth -0.5ex width 0.2ex
- \leaders\vrule height 0.7ex depth -0.5ex \hfil
- }
-}
-
-
-
-%}}} preamble
-%{{{ introduction
-
-\null\vskip2\baselineskip\hrule\bigskip
-\leftline{Style files for the pdc- macros \fileversion\space(\filedate)}
-\bigskip\hrule\bigskip
-\headline{\hfil\global\headline={\hfil
- \sevenbf Style files for the pdc- macros
- \fileversion\space(\filedate)}}
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
-\subsec{About the style files}
-
- This document describes a family of plain \TeX\ style files for
- typesetting documents which are short enough not to need any
- fancy indexing or cross-references, but long enough to want
- numbered section headings and a table of contents.
-
- A {\it style file} in this context means a definitions file that
- specifies the formatting of for a document: layout, choice of
- fonts, instructions for how to format lists, and so on. The
- style files use the macros defined in other definition files to
- supply most of the features they need. The document only needs
- one `|\input|' command to set up most of the commands it needs.
-
-\subsec{No cross-references}
-
- Omitting cross-references is important because it means we can
- avoid having documents that have to be run through \TeX\ more
- than once (the first time to generate a raw index or
- cross-reference file, the second to incorporate the references
- into the document). This greatly simplifies the macros.
-
- So that the table of contents may be generated automatically
- without requiring a second pass, it is printed {\it last\/} in
- the file. It follows that the table of contents belongs at the
- end of the front matter of the document (on pages numbered in
- roman numerals), immediately before page~1. It is easiest if
- all the front matter is printed last. After the end of the
- document proper, put the front matter enclosed in |\frontmatter|
- \dots |\endfrontmatter|; this automatically switches to page
- numbering in roman numerals, and puts the table of contents at
- the end.
-
- The file |pdccmdoc.tex| does documents using the Computer Modern
- fonts. There is a variant called |pdccmlft.tex| intended for
- `leaflets' that are even shorter than the `docs' produced with
- |pdccmdoc.tex|. Leaflets have no front matter section, no table
- of contents, and section headings are much less prominent---they
- should only be a few pages long at most. The Malvern versions
- are called |ma55doc.tex| and |ma55lft.tex|.
-
-\subsec{About this document}
-
- The file that generates this printed documentation, |pdcsty.dtx|
- is a `documented \TeX' file. As well as briefly describing what
- the macros are for and how they work, it includes a complete
- listing of their definitions. The text of the definitions is
- also written to files in the current directory, generating fresh
- copies of the style files. This way this documentation and the
- files it describes are guaranteed to match.
-
- The lines of all definitions are numbered continuously, even
- though only a subset of all the definition lines will go in each
- file.
-
-%}}} introduction
-%{{{ starting up
-
-\section{Starting up}
-
-\subsec{File identification}
-
- Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the
- file, for the benefit of people wondering what the file is for.
- The macro file otherwise has no other comments, in the hope that
- this will let \TeX\ read it in faster. (It should be possible
- for the identification comments to go {\it after} an |\endinput|
- at the close of the file, but the convention is to have them at
- the start.)
-
- The following segment is common to the style files and the
- definiton files.
-
-\code
- \|\% \filename~\fileversion~\filedate~-- macros for short documents
-\smallbreak
- |%%%@TeX-definition-file {
- \|\%\%\% filename~~~~~~~= "\filename",
- \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
- \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
- |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0",
- |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
- |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
- |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK",
- |%%% codetable = "USASCII",
- |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
- |%%% supported = "Maybe",
-\cmonly |%%% abstract = "Top-level macro file for documents set in
- |%%% Computer Modern fonts.
-\maonly |%%% abstract = "Top-level macro file for documents set in
- |%%% Malvern 55, 56 and 75 fonts.
-\onlytwo{X}{T}
- |%%% abstract = "Sectioning macros for style files.
-\allfilestrue\closebanner
- |%%% This macro file was generated by running plain
- \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~TeX on \jobname.dtx",
- |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
- |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
- \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the
- |%%% package it came in.",
-\onlytwo{X}{T}
- |%%% dependencies = ""
-\cmonly |%%% dependencies = "pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex, pdchyex.tex,
- |%%% pdcimth.tex, pdccmsub.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
-\maonly |%%% dependencies = "maamac.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex,
- |%%% pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
-\psonly |%%% dependencies = "pdcadobe.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex,
- |%%% pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
-\Tstyonly
- |%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdcdoc.def",
-\Xstyonly
- |%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdclft.def",
-\allfilestrue\closebanner
- |%%%}
- |
- \|\\message\{\fileversion~<\fileauthor~\filedate>\}
- |
-\endcode
-
- This is followed immediately by a list of the macro files
- included by this format:
-\code
-\styonly
- |\input pdcimth
- |\input pdcmigr
- |\input pdcfmt2
- |\input pdchyex
- |\input pdcoput5
- |\input pdcfsel
-\cmonly
- |\input pdccmsub
-\maonly
- |\input maamac
-\psonly
- |\input pdcadobe
-\common
-\endcode
-
-
-%}}} starting up
-%{{{ layout
-
-\section{Layout}
-
-\subsec{Paper sizes}
-
- The section defining the paper size is at the very top of the
- file to make it easy for someone adapting the macros to American
- Letter size paper to find them.
-
- Nevertheless, we set the top and bottom margins to be large
- enough that even if it is printed on American paper, nothing
- important will be cut off. This requires decent-sized margins
- at the top and bottom of pages (since the end of the page that
- will be lost depends on whether the printer driver has its real
- origin at top-left or bottom-left). The edge of the printing
- area is guessed at as being $7\,{\rm mm}$ from the edge of the
- paper.
-\code
- |\topmg=297mm \advance\topmg-11in \advance\topmg7mm
- |\botmg=\topmg
- |\advance\topmg\ht\strutbox \advance\topmg\headlineskip
- |\ifdim \topmg<20mm \topmg=20mm \fi
- |\ifdim \botmg<27mm \botmg=27mm \fi
-\smallbreak
- |\setpaper{210mm}{297mm}
-\endcode
-
- The document has `tab-index' headings, that is, headings go in a
- wide left margin to the left of the body text. The underlying
- structure is a grid is 4~cells wide, with the text spanning
- across the rightmost 3~cells. Definitions in the fonts section
- below specify that the text will be set ragged-right.
-\code
- |\setnkgrid{4}{3}
- |\colrule=0pt
- |\leftmargin=\gridwd \advance\leftmargin\colsep
-\endcode
- The output routine's |\leftbox| is set at the start of each page
- to make space for the left margin.
-\code
- |\everypage={\ifdim\leftmargin>0pt
- | \setbox\leftbox=\hbox to \gridwd{}\fi}
-\endcode
-
- While we're here, we customize some of the environments supplied
- by pdcFMT2:
-\code
- |\everyfootnote={\notefonts}
- |\everylinenum={\smallfonts}
-\maonly
- |\def\footnotetextmark#1{{\rmsy#1}}
- |\def\footnotenotemark#1{{\rmsy#1}}
-\common
- |\everylinenum={\smallfonts}
- |\everytag={\bf}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} layout
-%{{{ fonts
-\section{Fonts}
-
- This section describes the fonts available in the document.
-
- We introduce extra nicknames |\bi| for bold italic (used for the
- first mention of new techical terms), |\mf| for the METAFONT
- logo, |\mfi| for the METAFONT logo in italic (Something of an
- affectation) and |\ttb| for an `emphasized' typewriter (usually
- it is best if this is slanted, not bold).
-\code
-\styonly
- |\autoloadfonts
-\endcode
-
- The style files differ because of encoding schemes more than
- because of the particular fonts. For example, a style for Times
- Roman will work for Palatino too,if we change the names of the
- fonts used. To do this, a macro |\basefontname| may be defined
- before the style file is read in; if it isn't defined it is
- given a default value.
-
-%{{{ cmr
-
-\subsec{Fonts for Computer Modern documents}
-\cmonly
- We use Computer Modern Sans Serif for the headings in CM
- documents. I have not put much effort into making formulas
- work in headings.
-\code
- |\def\STYheadingT{%
- | \m{rm}{cmss}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
- | \f{it}{cmssi}\f{tt}{cmtt}\f{mf}{logo}\f{mfi}{logosl}%
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\font\headingrm=cmss17 \font\headingit=cmssi17
- |\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1200}{14pt}
- | {small}{tiny}
- |\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1728}{20pt}
- | {subheading}{small}
-\endcode
-
- We use Computer Modern for body text.
-\code
- |\def\STYbodyT{\m{rm}{cmr}\m{it}{cmti}%
- | \m{bf}{cmbx}\@\f{bi}{cmbxti10}%
- | \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
- | \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
- | \f{tt}{cmtt}\@\f{ttb}{cmsltt10}%
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\font\tinytt=cmtt8 at 7pt
- |\font\bodysy=cmsy10 at 12pt
-\endcode
-
-%}}} cmr
-%{{{ malvern
-
-\subsec{Fonts for Malvern documents}
-\maonly
-
- Headings are in Malvern~75. The maths fonts are scaled for
- expediency; I~do not make much effort to make formulas work in
- headings.
-\code
- |\def\STYheadingT{%
- | \m{rm}{ma75a}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}%
- | \f{it}{ma76a}\@\f{tt}{cmtt10}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading}
- |\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading}
-\endcode
-
-
- We use Malvern~55 for body text. The supplementary font with
- encoding~B is added, with font nickname |\rmsy|.
-\code
- |\newfam\rmsyfam
-\smallbreak
- |\def\STYbodyT{%
- | \m{rm}{ma55a}\f{rmsy}{ma55b}\m{it}{ma56a}%
- | \m{bf}{ma75a}\f{bi}{ma76a}%
- | \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
- | \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
- | \f{tt}{cmtt}\f{tb}{cmsltt}%
- |}
-\endcode
-% The main problem with defining the body fonts is that the
-% $x$-height of Malvern is larger then Computer Modern. This makes
-% in necessary to load the maths fonts at a larger size to match.
-% (A better solution might be to make a parameter file for
-% Computer Modern so that maths fonts may be generated with
-% compatible proportions.)
-%\code
-% |\loadfont\bodytt{cmtt10 scaled \magstep2}
-% |\loadfont\notett{cmtt10 scaled \magstep1}
-% |\loadfont\smalltt{cmtt10 scaled \magstephalf}
-% |\loadfont\bodytb{cmsltt10 scaled \magstep2}
-% |\loadfont\smalltb{cmsltt10 scaled \magstep1}
-% |\loadfont\notetb{cmsltt10 scaled \magstephalf}
-%\endcode
- There is no point using |\loadfont| on the maths symbol fonts,
- since they have to be loaded anyway the first time |\bodyfonts|
- is called.
-\code
- |\font\bodymi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep2
- |\font\bodysy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
- |\font\notemi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep1
- |\font\notesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
- |\font\smallmi=cmmi10 scaled \magstephalf
- |\font\smallsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstephalf
-\endcode
-%}}} malvern
-%{{{ PostScript
-
-\subsec{Fonts for Times documents}
-\psonly
- The big problem with PostScript fonts is what they are called;
- I~shall be assuming that Fontname~$1.6$\footnote*{Karl Berry,
- {\it File Names for \TeX\ Fonts} $1.6$ ({\tt
- ftp:\penalty\exhyphenpenalty //ftp.umb.edu\slash pub\slash
- tex\slash fontname/}).} applies: fonts with |afm2tfm|'s
- variation on the \TeX\ Text encoding are called |ptmr| and fonts
- with Adobe's StandardRoman encoding are called |ptmr0| (rather
- than |rptmr|).
-
- This macro attempts to make it possible to guess the standard
- name for the italic variant of a given font.
- |\KBcanonical{|\<tentative font name>|}| takes a font name which
- is formed from an upright name optionally followed by `|i|'
- representing an italic variation. It returns the corresponding
- standard name. For example, |ptmri| is left unchanged, but
- |phvri| is changed to |phvro| and |phvrrni| is changed to
- |phvron|.
-\code
- |\def\KBcanonical#1{%
- | \expcs\ifx{KB#1}\relax #1\else\csname KB#1\endcsname \fi
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\ifx\KBadobe\UNDEFINED \def\KBadobe#1{\KBcanonical{#10}} \fi
- |\def\KBit#1{\KBcanonical{#1i}}
- |\def\KBbi#1{\KBbf{#1i}}
- |\def\KBbf#1{\expandafter\KBbfx#1.}
- |\def\KBbfx#1#2#3#4#5.{\KBcanonical{#1#2#3b#5}}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\KBpagbr{pagdr} \def\KBpagbri{pagdro}
- |\def\KBpbkbr{pbkdr} \def\KBpbkbri{pbkdri}
- |\def\KBpagri{pagro} \def\KBpagbi{pagbo}
- |\def\KBphvri{phvro} \def\KBphvbi{phvbo}
- |\def\KBpcrri{pcrro} \def\KBpcrbi{pcrbo}
- |\def\KBphvrrni{phvron} \def\KBphvbrni{phvbon}
- |\def\KBphvrrn0{phvr0n} \def\KBphvbrn0{phvb0n}
- |\def\KBphvrrni0{phvro0n} \def\KBphvbrni0{phvbo0n}
-\endcode
-
- Headings are in Helvetica. The maths fonts are scaled for
- expediency; I~do not make much effort to make formulas work in
- headings.
-\code
-
- |\ifx\headingfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingfontname{phvr} \fi
- |\ifx\headingttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingttfontname{pcrb} \fi
-\smallbreak
- |\def\STYheadingT{%
- | \@\f{rm}{\headingfontname}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}%
- | \@\f{asy}{psyr}%
- | \@\f{it}{\KBit\headingfontname}%
- | \@\f{tt}{\headingttfontname}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\loadfont\bodysy{cmsy10 at 12pt}
-\smallbreak
- |\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading}
- |\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading}
-\endcode
-
-
- We use Times Roman by default for body text, and Courier for
- typewriter text. Adobe's Symbol font is included, with font
- nickname |\asy|; a family called |\asyfam| has already been
- created by |pdcadobe.tex|.
-\code
- |\ifx\bodyfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyfontname{ptmr} \fi
- |\ifx\bodyttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyttfontname{pcrr} \fi
-\smallbreak
- |\def\STYbodyT{%
- | \@\m{rm}{\bodyfontname}\@\m{it}{\KBit\bodyfontname}%
- | \@\m{bf}{\KBbf\bodyfontname}\@\f{bi}{\KBbi\bodyfontname}%
- | \@\m{asy}{psyr}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
- | \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
- | \@\f{tt}{\bodyttfontname}\@\f{tb}{\KBit\bodyttfontname}%
- |}
-\endcode
-
-
- Finally the alphabet-switching commands defined for Malvern
- fonts are given dummy definitions.
-\code
- |\let\sc=\relax \let\mc=\relax \let\csc=\relax
-\endcode
-
-%}}} malvern
-
-\common
-\subsec{Definitions common to all formats}
-
-\code
-\styonly
- |\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny}
- |\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny}
- |\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny}
- |\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny}
-\endcode
-
- The text is set left-justified (ragged-right). To make this
- work, the fontdimens that control word spacing are set to force
- interword spaces to all be the same width.
-\code
- |\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt}
- |\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000
-\smallbreak
- |\bodyfonts
- |{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 }
-\common
-\endcode
-
-%}}} fonts
-%{{{ minimal section headings
-\section{Simple sectioning}
-
-\onlyone{X}
- A `leaflet' is divided into short sections, which may contain
- subsections (but usually will not). There may well be more than
- one section on a page.
-
- The section number is held in two count registers, and printed
- (enclosed in |\n{|\dots|}|) with the macro |\thesecno|:
-
-\code
- |\newcount\secno \newcount\subsecno
-\smallbreak
- |\def\thesecno{%
- | \n{%
- | \number\secno
- | \ifnum\subsecno>0
- | .\number\subsecno
- | \fi
- | }%
- |}
-\endcode
-
- The section and subsection commands are implemented
- straightforwardly with macros from |pdcfmt2.tex|, since there is
- no need for marks or fiddling with table-of-contents files.
-\code
- |\def\section{
- | \global\advance\secno1 \global\subsecno0
- | \doheading\medskipamount{\subheadingfonts\thesecno\enspace}{}
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\subsec{
- | \global\advance\subsecno1
- | \doheading\smallskipamount{\bodyfonts\thesecno\enspace}{}
- |}
-\endcode
-
- The page header includes only the title of the file, which the
- user sets with the command |\majorheadline{|\<text>|}|
-\code
- |\newtoks\majorheadline
- |\expandafter\majorheadline
- | \expandafter{\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\jobname}}
-\endcode
- All those |\expandafter|s are to get the initial value in upper
- case.
-
- The flag |noheadline| signals that the headline is to be omitted
- on this page (e.g., the title page). The |twosided| flag is set
- for two-sided binding.
-\code
- |\newif\ifnoheadline \newif\iftwosided
-\smallbreak
- |\headline{%
- | \ifnoheadline
- | \hfil
- | \else\iftwosided
- | \ifodd\pageno
- | \hfil \the\majorheadline \quad{\bf\folio}%
- | \else
- | {\bf\folio}\quad \the\majorheadline\hfil
- | \fi
- | \else
- | \hfil \the\majorheadline \quad{\bf\folio}%
- | \fi\fi
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\footline{%
- | \ifnoheadline
- | \global\noheadlinefalse
- | \hfil{\bf\folio}\hfil
- | \else
- | \hfil
- | \fi
- |}
-\endcode
-
-%}}} minimal section headings
-%{{{ sectioning
-\section{Sectioning in PDCCMDOC documents}
-
-\onlyone{T}
- Now a document is divided into {\it sections}, which are further
- divided into so-called {\it subsecs} and {\it subsubsecs}.
- (Division into subsubsecs should be done sparingly.)
-
- The sections may be grouped into {\it parts}---or, to look at it
- another way, parts are a larger division of the document than
- sections, but sections are not numbered within part numbers.
- Each |\part| command should be almost immediately followed by
- |\section|.
-
-\subsec{Macros for section numbers}
-
- The part and section numbers are kept in \TeX\ number registers,
- with corresponding `|\the|-' macros to print the value
- formatted.
-\code
- |\newcount\partno
-\smallbreak
- |\def\thepartno{%
- | \ifcase\partno O\or I\or II\or III\or IV\or V\else
- | \expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral\partno}%
- | \fi
- |}
-\endcode
- Formatted section and subsec numbers are generated by one macro
- |\thesecno|. It automatically omits (sub)subsec numbers if they
- are zero. The whole number is enclosed in |\n{|\dots|}| so that
- the formatting of numbers may be customized.
-\code
- |\newcount\secno \newcount\subsecno \newcount\subsubsecno
-\smallbreak
- |\def\thesecno{%
- | \n{%
- | \number\secno
- | \ifnum\subsecno>0
- | .\number\subsecno
- | \ifnum\subsubsecno>0
- | .\number\subsubsecno
- | \fi
- | \fi
- | }%
- |}
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Parts}
-
- The |\part| macro takes one argument, the title. It sets a
- token register |\majorheadline| which is printed on the left
- page of two-sided documents.
-
- The |\majorheadline{|\<text>|}| command may be used immediately
- after a |\part| command if the part title is not suitable to go
- in the headline. This should also be used at the start of the
- document to the title of the document, if division into parts is
- not used.
-\code
- |\newtoks\majorheadline
- |\expandafter\majorheadline
- | \expandafter{\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\jobname}}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\part#1{%
- | \global\advance\partno1
- | \newpageheading{2\baselineskip}{\headingfonts}
- | {}{\thepartno.\quad#1}
- | \TOCwrite\TOCentrypart{\thepartno}{#1}
- |}
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Section headings}
-
- Section headings will start on a new page if the current page is
- almost finished. The section heading is set across the full
- width of the page, including the margin usually used for
- tab-indexed headings.
-
- To force the next section to start a new page, do
- |\sectionpenalty-10000| immediately before it.
-\code
- |\newcount\sectionpenalty
-\smallbreak
- |\def\sectionheading#1{
- | \par
- | \vskip 0pt plus 0.3\vsize
- | \penalty\sectionpenalty \sectionpenalty-200
- | \vskip 1\bigskipamount plus -0.3\vsize
- | \begingroup \advance\leftskip-\leftmargin
- | \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt
- | \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=500
- | \interlinepenalty=100
- | \headingfonts \nointerlineskip
- | \hbox{\hskip-\leftmargin
- | \vrule height 2pt depth 0pt width \leftmargin
- | \vrule height 2pt depth 0pt width \hsize}
-% | \nobreak\medskip
- | #1\par
- | \nobreak\smallskip
- | \endgroup
- | \global\noindenttrue
- |}
-\endcode
- As well as generating a heading, the section macro generates
- marks used for the page headings and a TOC entry. The marks are
- of the form in a way similar to that discussed in Chapter~23 of
- the {\it\TeX book}. More precisely, a mark is placed on either
- side of the section heading of the form
-$$\hbox{\tt\arg{\<rhs>}\arg{\<lhs>}}$$ where \<rhs> is the section
- number that belongs on the right-hand page, reflecting the
- situation at the bottom of the page, whereas \<lhs> is what
- belongs on following left-hand pages.
-\code
- |\newtoks\sectiontoks
- |\newif\ifsecno \secnotrue
-\smallbreak
- |\def\section#1{
- | \ifsecno
- | \global\advance\secno1 \global\subsecno0 \global\subsubsecno0
- | \fi
- | \toks0={#1}
- | \mark{{\the\sectiontoks}{\ifsecno\S\thesecno\space\fi\the\toks0 }}
- | \edef\tmp{\ifsecno\noexpand\S\the\secno\space\fi}
- | \global\sectiontoks\expandafter{\tmp#1}
- | \sectionheading{\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi #1}
- | \mark{{\the\sectiontoks}{\the\sectiontoks}}
- | \TOCwrite\TOCentrysection{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1}
- |}
-\endcode
- Subsecs and subsubsecs use the |\doheading| macro defined in
- |pdcfmt.tex|. They do not appear in page headings, but may
- appear in the TOC.
-\code
- |\def\subsec#1{%
- | \ifsecno \global\advance\subsecno1 \global\subsubsecno0 \fi
- | \doheading\medskipamount{\subheadingfonts}{}
- | {\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi#1}
- | \TOCwrite\TOCentrysubsec{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1}
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\subsubsec#1{%
- | \ifsecno \global\advance\subsubsecno+1 \fi
- | \doheading\smallskipamount{\rm}{}{\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi#1}
- | \TOCwrite\TOCentrysubsubsec{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1}
- |}
-\endcode
-
- The headline and footline are controlled by two flags. The
- command |\noheadlinetrue| suppresses the headline for this page
- (e.g., a title page). The |twosided| flag says whether the
- document should be formatted for two-sided printing.
-\code
- |\newif\ifnoheadline
- |\newif\iftwosided
-\smallbreak
- |\footline={%
- | \ifnoheadline
- | \global\noheadlinefalse
- | \hfil\bodyfonts\n\folio\hfil
- | \else
- | \hfil
- | \fi
- |}
-\endcode
- The headline varies according to whether it is a one-sided page,
- a left-hand page or a right-hand page. On a one-sided page, it
- has the major headline (part or document title) at the left, and
- the section title of the {\it first} section on the page on the
- right with the folio. On a left-hand page, there is the folio
- and the major headline, and on a right-hand page there is the
- section title for the {\it last} section on the page, and the
- folio.
-\code
- |\headline={%
- | \ifnoheadline
- | \hfil
- | \else
- | \bodyfonts
- | \iftwosided
- | \ifodd\pageno
- | \hfil
- | \expandafter\firstoftwo\botmark\quad
- | {\bf\n\folio}%
- | \else
- | {\bf\n\folio}\quad
- | \the\majorheadline
- | \hfil
- | \fi
- | \else
- | \the\majorheadline
- | \hfil
- | \expandafter\secondoftwo\topmark\quad
- | {\bf\n\folio}%
- | \fi
- | \fi
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\firstoftwo#1#2{#1}
- |\def\secondoftwo#1{}
-\endcode
-%}}} sectioning
-%{{{ table of contents
-\section{Table of contents intrinsics}
-
- This section defines the macros used to generate a table of
- contents. The entries are written to a file \<jobname>|.toc| in
- the current directory. At the end of the manuscript this files
- is closed and then read to generate the table of contents.
-
- Macros special to the TOC-generating section have names starting
- with `|\TOC|-'.
-\code
- |\newwrite\TOCfile
- |\openout\TOCfile=\jobname.toc
-\endcode
-
- Entries in the TOC file are of the form
-$$\hbox{\tt\cs{TOCentry}\<foo>\arg{\<secno>}\arg{\<title>}\arg{\<folio>}}$$
- where |\TOCentry|\<foo> is a csname, \<secno> is some
- automatically-generated section number like `|1.2|', \<title> is
- the section title as supplied by the user, and \<folio> is the
- folio for this page, in arabic or lower-case roman numeral form.
-
- They are generated with calls to |\TOCwrite| like this
-$$\hbox{\tt\cs{TOCwrite}\cs{TOCentry}\<foo>\arg{\<secno>}\arg{\<title>}}$$
- The \<secno> is evaluated when |\TOCwrite| is called, whereas
- the \<title> is carefully written without being expanded so that
- its expansion happens when the TOC file is read in. The
- \<folio> is automatically appended when it is written.
-\code
- |\def\TOCwrite#1#2#3{%
- | \begingroup\def\n{\string\n}
- | \def\tmp{#3}%
- | \edef\tmp{\string#1{#2}{\expandafter\TOCtrim\meaning\tmp}}
- | \write\TOCfile\expandafter{\tmp{\folio}}\endgroup
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\TOCtrim#1:->{}
-\endcode
-
-
- Now we define all the `|\TOCentry|-' macros.
-\code
- |\def\TOCentrypart#1#2#3{
- | \smallskip
- | \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0\leftmargin
- | \moveleft\leftmargin\hbox to\dimen0{\strut\bf #1. #2\hfil}
- | \smallskip
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\TOCentrysection#1#2#3{
- | \smallskip\noindent\llap{#1\kern1pc}%
- | {\bf \ignorespaces #2\quad\rm \n{#3}}\par
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\TOCentrysubsec#1#2#3{
- | \ifvmode \noindent \else \quad \fi
- | {#1}~{\ignorespaces #2}
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\TOCentrysubsubsec#1#2#3{}
-\endcode
-%}}} table of contents
-%{{{ front matter
-\section{Printing the front matter}
-
- The front matter of the document---the title page, preface,
- forword, etc.---must be printed {\it last}, with the table of
- contents at the end of the front matter; this is so that the
- table of contents may be accumulated during the \TeX ing of the
- file.\footnote*{It has a benefit for people reading the document
- with a browser: page~1 of the document is the first page of the
- DVI file, which makes selecting a given page easy, and the table
- of contents is at the very end, so the browsers `go to last
- page' command can be used to find the table of contents
- quickly.}
- The front matter starts with the command |\frontmatter| and may
- contain |\section| commands. Such sections will be unnumbered
- and will not appear in the table of contents.
-
- For a short document, a separate title page is probably
- excessive, and an abstract may be preferable to a preface. In
- this case the first page after |\frontmatter| could have the
- title of the document (with author etc.)\ followed by an
- abstract, any copyright information (or other small print), and
- the contents (generated by |\endfrontmatter|). In other words,
- something like this:
-$$\halign{\indent#\hfil\cr
- |\frontmatter|\cr
- \quad\it commands to print the title, etc.\cr
- \quad|\abstract|\cr
- \qquad\it the text of the abstract\cr
- \quad|\endabstract|\cr
- \quad\it copyright information, etc.\cr
- |\endfrontmatter|\cr
-}$$
- For a longer document, there will be a separate title page and
- perhaps a preface.
-$$\halign{\indent#\hfil\cr
- |\frontmatter|\cr
- \quad|\titlepage|\cr
- \qquad\it commands to print the title, etc.\cr
- \quad|\splittitlepage|\cr
- \qquad\it print copyright information, etc.\cr
- \quad|\endtitlepage|\cr
- \quad|\section{Preface}|\cr
- \qquad\it text of preface, etc.\cr
- |\endfrontmatter|\cr
-}$$
- The macro |\splittitlepage| marks the division between the title
- page (title recto, page~i) and the back of the title page (title
- verso, page~ii), which is where copyright information goes. On
- a one-sided document, the copyright information belongs on the
- title recto, because the title verso will be blank, so
- |\splittitle| instead does |\vfill|.
-
- Setting |\pageno| nagative makes it print in roman numerals.
- Calling |\secnofalse| suppresses section numbering. The first
- page has no headline.
-\code
- |\def\frontmatter{
- | \write\TOCfile{\string\endinput}
- | \write\TOCfile{\folio}
- | \closeout\TOCfile
- | \vfill\supereject
- | \ifvoid\partialpage\else \null\vfill\eject \fi
- | \beginthe{frontmatter}
- | \pageno=-1 \secnofalse \noheadlinetrue
- | \def\TOCwrite##1##2##3{}
- |}
-\endcode
- The front matter is finshed off with the contents list,
- generated by |\endfrontmatter|. This reads the TOC file, which
- was closed at the end of the last page of the body of the
- document.
-\code
- |\def\endfrontmatter{
- | \section{Contents}
- | \input\jobname.toc
- | \vfill\supereject
- | \endthe{frontmatter}
- |}
-\endcode
-
- Here's macros for generating the titlepage---it shoul;d enclose
- commands to generate the title, author and publisher information
- for the document. If it is used, it goes immediately after
- |\frontmatter|, so that the title page is page~i.
-\code
- |\def\titlepage{
- | \vfill\eject
- | \beginthe{titlepage}
- | \noheadlinetrue
- | \def\splittitlepage{
- | \iftwosided \vfill\eject\null\vfill \else \vfill \fi
- | }
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\endtitlepage{
- | \eject
- | \endthe{titlepage}
- |}
-\endcode
-
- This |abstract| environment doesn't do anything fancy.
-\code
- |\def\abstract{
- | \smallskip
- | \beginthe{abstract}
- | \setbox\parbox\hbox to \gridwd{\subheadingfonts Abstract\hfil}
- | \noindenttrue \bodyfonts
- |}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\endabstract{
- | \smallskip
- | \endthe{abstract}
- |}
-\endcode
-%}}} front matter
- This concludes the code that is included only in documents with TOC.
-\common
-
-%{{{ abbreviations
-
-\section{abbrevs}
-
-
- The definitions of |\pt| and |\mm| work only in maths mode.
-\code
- |\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}}
- |\def\mm{\,{\rm mm}}
-\smallbreak
- |\def\MF{{\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi META}\-%
- | {\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi FONT}}
- |\def\MSDOS{\leavevmode\hbox{MS-DOS}}
-\endcode
-
-\subsec{Program names with small caps}
-
- Some program names use small capitals in their names. For
- normal fonts there is no point trying to duplicate this, since
- small capitals aren't common to all fonts. But small capitals
- come `for free' with Malvern, so we might as well use them. The
- following definitions apply to Malvern~A fonts.
-\code
-\maonly
- |\def\PS{\csc{PostScript}}
- |\def\La{L\negthinspace\flushtop{\char"C1 }}
-\cmonly
- |\def\PS{PostScript}
-\common
-\endcode
-
-\font\sf=cmss10
- Here's a redefinition of |\TeX|. This adds a spacefactor 1000
- to the end (so that \TeX\ doesn't apply its usual heuristic that
- a full stop following a capoital {\it X} isn't a sentence end).
- It also loosens up the logo, producing `\TeX' rather than the
- usual `T\negthinspace\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-0.125emX'. This
- design is more forgiving of changes in font (for example, in
- sanserif it makes `{\sf\TeX}' instead of `{\sf
- T\negthinspace\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-0.125emX}').
-\code
- |\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}X\spacefactor1000 }
-\endcode
-
- The macro |\dfn{...}| formats a defining instance of a word or
- phrase (usually used the first time a new technical term is
- introduced). When generating an index with a command |\index|,
- this also adds the phrase to the index.
-\code
- |\begingroup\catcode`\|=12 \toks0={\endgroup
- | \def\dfn#1{\ifx\index\UNDEFINED\else\index{#1|INDdfn}\fi{\bi #1}}
- |} \the\toks0
-\endcode
-
- Here's a hack for using email-style emphasis using
- `asterisking'. Text enclosed in matching asterisks is
- emphasized.
-\code
- |\declareactivechar\* \def*#1*{{\it#1\/}}
-\endcode
-
-
-\begingroup\defverbatim\~
- When documenting computer progams it is useful to be able to
- present dialogues between the user and the computer, with the
- user's commands distinguished by a slightly different font.
- Here we define ~\|~\<text>~|~ so that it behaves like
- ~|~\<text>~|~ except that |\ttb| is used instead of |\tt|. In
- maths mode it is still equivalent to |\Vert|.
-\code
- |\def\|{%
- | \relax\ifmmode
- | \Vert
- | \else
- | \begingroup
- | \ttb \setupverbatim
- | \catcode`\|=13 \let|\endgroup
- | \fi
- |}
-\endcode
-\endgroup
-%}}} abbreviations
-%{{{ postamble
-\section{Finally}
-
- The definitions common to all style files are read last, so that
- they can take account of changes to |\baselineskip|.
-\code
-\Tstyonly
- |\input pdcdoc.def
-\Xstyonly
- |\input pdclft.def
-\common
-\endcode
-
- And, at last, a file {\tt\<filename>.cfg} is read, if it exists.
-\code
- |\def\inputifexists#1{%
- | \openin15=#1
- | \ifeof15 \else \input #1 \fi
- | \closein15
- |}
-\styonly
- \|\\inputifexists\{\filenamesanssuffix.cfg\}
-\common
-\endcode
-
-\endcodefile{cmX} \endcodefile{cmT} \endcodefile{maX} \endcodefile{maT}
-\endcodefile{psX} \endcodefile{psT} \endcodefile{X} \endcodefile{T}
-\bye
-%}}} postamble
-%}}} pdccmcode.dtx
-
-%Local variables:
-%fold-folded-p: t
-%fill-prefix: " "
-%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall
deleted file mode 100644
index 0bcb9be0459..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
-#!/bin/sh
-
-# I can't figure out how I'm supposed to use a builtin "install"
-# program in a makefile given that every Unix has an incompatible version!
-
-# This script shall behave similarly to GNU "install".
-
-version="1.1 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-24>"
-
-echo=
-strip=:
-
-while test $# -gt 0; do
- case $1 in
- -c) ;;
- -n|--no-create)
- echo=echo ;;
- --g*=*)
- group=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ;;
- -g|--g*)
- group=$2; shift ;;
- -g*)
- group=`expr $1 : '-.\(.*\)$'` ;;
- --o*=*)
- owner=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ;;
- -o|--o*)
- owner=$2; shift ;;
- -o*)
- owner=`expr $1 : '-.\(.*\)$'` ;;
- --m*=*)
- mode=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ;;
- -m|--m*)
- mode=$2; shift ;;
- -m*)
- mode=`expr $1 : '-.\(.*\)$'` ;;
- -s|--strip)
- strip=strip ;;
- -h|--help)
- cat <<@EOF
-$0 -- install files
-usage:
- $0 [ OPTION ]... FILE1 FILE2
- $0 [ OPTION ]... FILE1...FILEn DIR
- $0 --help | --version
-options:
- -c ignored
- --group=GROUP --owner=USER --mode=MODE -g GROUP -o USER -m MODE
- --strip -s
-@EOF
- exit 0 ;;
- -V|--version)
- echo "PDCMAC install ($0) version $version"
- exit 0 ;;
- -*)
- echo >&2 $0: $1: not understood -- try $0 --help
- exit 2 ;;
- *)
- files="$files $lastfile"
- lastfile=$1 ;;
- esac
- shift
-done
-
-#echo group=$group owner=$owner mode=$mode lastfile=$lastfile files=$files
-
-$echo cp -p $files $lastfile || exit 1
-if test -d "$lastfile"; then
- $echo cd $lastfile
-else
- files="$lastfile"
-fi
-
-if test -n "$group"; then
- $echo chgrp $group $files || exit 1
-fi
-
-if test -n "$owner"; then
- $echo chown $owner $files || exit 1
-fi
-
-if test -n "$mode"; then
- $echo chmod $mode $files || exit 1
-fi
-$echo $strip $files
-
-exit 0
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall.1 b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b405f35ace..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,108 +0,0 @@
-.TH PINSTALL 1 "Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-27>" "PDCMAC 1.0" "CONTRIBUTED SOFTWARE"
-.SH NAME
-pinstall \- shellscript for copying programs into system directories,
-compatible with install
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.na
-.B pinstall
-[
-.B \-c
-] [
-.I options
-]
-.I file1
-.I file2
-.br
-.B pinstall
-[
-.B \-c
-] [
-.I options
-]
-.I file\|.\|.\|.
-.I dir
-.br
-.BR pinstall
-.B \-\-help
-|
-.B \-\-version
-.PP
-.I options
-= [
-.B \-\-no\-create
-] [
-.BI \-\-group= groupname
-] [
-.BI \-\-owner= username
-] [
-.BI \-\-mode= mode
-] [
-.B \-\-strip
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.na
-This documents the
-.SM PDCMAC
-version of
-.IR install (1),
-called
-.IR pinstall .
-It is only used if
-.SM GNU
-.I install
-is not available.
-.PP
-This copies
-.I file1
-(which must exist)
-to the name
-.IR file2 ,
-or
-the
-.I files
-into the directory called
-.IR dir ,
-preserving the last-modified times
-(just like
-.BR "cp \-p" ).
-.PP
-This command is implemented as a shellscript.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-c
-Ignored.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-group= "groupname, " "\-g " groupname
-.PD 0v
-.TP
-.BI \-\-owner= "username, " "\-o " username
-.TP
-.BI \-\-mode= "mode, " "\-m " mode
-.PD
-Set the group, owner or mode for the new files (using the same
-conventions as
-.IR chgrp (1),
-.IR chown (1),
-and
-.IR chmod (1)
-respectively).
-Only root can combine changes of mode and group.
-.TP
-.BR \-\-help ", " \-h
-Print a usage message and exit.
-.TP
-.BR \-\-no\-create ", " \-n
-Do not copy files; instead print the commands that would have been performed.
-.TP
-.BR \-\-strip ", " \-s
-Apply
-.IR strip (1)
-to the files after copying them.
-.TP
-.BR \-\-version ", " \-V
-Print a version identification message and exit.
-.SH AUTHOR
-P. Damian Cugley
-.I damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-pmkdir(1), chgrp(1), chown(1), chmod(1), cp(1), strip(1), install(1)
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir
deleted file mode 100644
index b0b5862cc3b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-#!/bin/sh
-
-version="1.0 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-27>"
-
-# pmkdir [ -m MODE | -g GROUP | -o OWNER | -n ] DIR
-# -- create a directory DIR, including any necessary
-# intervening directories.
-# Also takes note of 3 enbvironment variables:
-# GROUP -- group to give to new directories
-# OWNER -- owner for new directories
-# MODE -- mode for new directories
-# If called with the name of an existing directory, this will still
-# change group, mode, owner (if they are set).
-
-me=`basename $0`
-
-while test $# -gt 0; do
- case $1 in
- --m*=*)
- MODE=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ; export MODE ;;
- -m|--m*)
- MODE=$2 ; export MODE; shift ;;
- --g*=*)
- GROUP=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ; export GROUP ;;
- -g|--g*)
- GROUP=$2; export GROUP; shift ;;
- --o*=*)
- OWNER=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ; export OWNER ;;
- -o|--o*)
- OWNER=$2; export OWNER; shift ;;
- -n*|--n*)
- echo=echo ;;
- -h|--h*)
- cat <<'@EOF'
-$me -- make directory and any parent directories necessary
-
-$me [--no-create] [--mode=MODE] [--group=GROUP] [--owner=OWNER] DIR...
-$me --help | --version
-
-MODE is a mode for the new directory(s); see chmod(1).
-GROUP and OWNER are the group and owner; see chown(1) and chgrp(1).
-
-The --no-create option means don't do anything, print the commands instead.
-
-If not specified on the command line, the environment variables MODE,
-GROUP and OWNER are used. If there are no environment variables, the
-defaults used by mkdir(1) apply.
-@EOF
- exit 0
- ;;
- -V|--v*)
- echo $me for PDCMAC $version
- exit 0 ;;
- -*)
- echo >&2 `basename $0`: $1: not understood
- exit 2 ;;
- *)
- p=`dirname $1`
- test -d $p || $0 $p || exit 1
- $echo mkdir $1 || exit 1
- test -n "$OWNER" && { $echo chgrp $OWNER $1 || exit 1; }
- test -n "$GROUP" && { $echo chgrp $GROUP $1 || exit 1; }
- test -n "$MODE" && { $echo chmod $MODE $1 || exit 1; }
- ;;
- esac
- shift
-done
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir.1 b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir.1
deleted file mode 100644
index c9a5981cb21..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-.TH PMKDIR 1 "Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-27>" "PDCMAC 1.0" "CONTRIBUTED SOFTWARE"
-.SH NAME
-pmkdir \- make a directory and possibly its parents as well
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.na
-.B pmkdir
-[
-.B \-\-no\-create
-] [
-.BI \-\-group= groupname
-] [
-.BI \-\-owner= username
-] [
-.BI \-\-mode= mode
-]
-.I dir\|.\|.\|.
-.br
-.BR pmkdir
-.B \-\-help
-|
-.B \-\-version
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.na
-This documents the
-.SM PDCMAC
-version of
-.IR mkdirhier (1),
-called
-.IR pmkdir .
-.PP
-For each
-.I dir
-this creates a directory with that file name.
-Unlike
-.IR mkdir (1),
-any intermediate directories required will also be
-created.
-.PP
-This command is implemented as a shellscript.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.BI \-\-group= "groupname, " "\-g " groupname
-.PD 0v
-.TP
-.BI \-\-owner= "username, " "\-o " username
-.TP
-.BI \-\-mode= "mode, " "\-m " mode
-.PD
-Set the group, owner or mode for the new files (using the same
-conventions as
-.IR chgrp (1),
-.IR chown (1),
-and
-.IR chmod (1)
-respectively).
-Only root can combine changes of mode and group.
-.TP
-.BR \-\-help ", " \-h
-Print a usage message and exit.
-.TP
-.BR \-\-no\-create ", " \-n
-Do not copy files; instead print the commands that would have been performed.
-.TP
-.BR \-\-version ", " \-V
-Print a version identification message and exit.
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-.TP
-.SM GROUP
-.PD 0v
-.TP
-.SM OWNER
-.TP
-.SM MODE
-.PD
-The values of these variables are used if the corresponding command-line
-options are omitted.
-.SH AUTHOR
-P. Damian Cugley
-.I damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-pinstall(1), chgrp(1), chown(1), chmod(1), mkdir(1), mkdirhier(1)